Z Macros

Macro
Reference
Manual for
Macro Reference Manual

for Z-MAP Plus/ZCL
2003 Landmark Graphics Corporation
Part No. 161336 October 2003

2003 Landmark Graphics Corporation
All Rights Reserved Worldwide
This publication has been provided pursuant to an agreement containing restrictions on its use. The publication is also
protected by Federal copyright law. No part of this publication may be copied or distributed, transmitted, transcribed,
stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means,
electronic, magnetic, manual, or otherwise, or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of:
Landmark Graphics Corporation

Building 1, Suite 200, 2101 CityWest, Houston, Texas 77042, USA
P.O. Box 42806, Houston, Texas 77242, USA
Phone: 713-839-2000
FAX: 713-839-2401
Web: www.lgc.com
Trademark Notice
3D Drill View, 3D Drill View KM, 3Dview, Active Field Surveillance, Active Reservoir Surveillance, ADC,
ARIES, Asset Development Center, Asset Development Centre, Automate, BLITZ, BLITZPAK, CasingSeat,
CDDM, COMPASS, Contouring Assistant, Corporate Data Archiver, Corporate Data Store, DataStar, DBPlot,
Decision Suite, Decisionarium, DecisionDesktop, DecisionSpace, DecisionSpace AssetPlanner, DecisionSpace
Atomic Meshing, DecisionSpace PowerModel, DecisionSpace PrecisionTarget, DecisionSpace TrackPlanner,
DecisionSpace Well Seismic Fusion, DepthTeam, DepthTeam Explorer, DepthTeam Express, DepthTeam Extreme,
DepthTeam Interpreter, DESKTOP-PVT, DESKTOP-VIP, DEX, DFW, DIMS, Discovery, Drillability Suite,
DrillModel, DrillVision, DSS, Dynamic Reservoir Management, Dynamic Surveillance System, EarthCube,
EdgeCa$h, eLandmark, Engineer's Desktop, EOS-PAK, EPM, Executive Assistant, FastTrack, FZAP!,
GeoDataLoad, GeoGraphix (stylized), GeoGraphix Exploration System, GeoLink, GES, GESXplorer, GMAplus,
GRIDGENR, Handheld Field Operator, I2 Enterprise, iDIMS, IsoMap, Landmark, Landmark and Design,
Landmark logo and Design, LandScape, Lattix, LeaseMap, LMK Resources, LogEdit, LogM, LogPrep,
Make Great Decisions, MathPack, MIRA, Model Builder, MultiWell, MyLandmark, MyWorkspace, OpenBooks,
OpenExplorer, OpenJournal, OpenOrigin, OpenSGM, OpenVision, OpenWells, OpenWire, OpenWorks,
OpenWorks Well File, PAL, Parallel-VIP, PetroBank, PetroWorks, PlotView, Point Gridding Plus,
Pointing Dispatcher, PostStack, PostStack ESP, PowerView, PRIZM, PROFILE, ProMAGIC, ProMAX,
ProMAX 2D, ProMAX 3D, ProMAX 3DPSDM, ProMAX MVA, ProMAX VSP, pSTAx, QUICKDIF,
QUIKCDP, QUIKDIG, QUIKRAY, QUIKSHOT, QUIKVSP, RAVE, RAYMAP, Real Freedom,
Real-Time Asset Management Center, Real-Time Asset Management Centre, Real Time Knowledge Company,
Reservoir Framework Builder, RESev, ResMap, RMS, SafeStart, SCAN, SeisCube, SeisMap, SeisModel, SeisSpace,
SeisVision, SeisWell, SeisWorks, SeisWorks MultiView, SeisWorks PowerSection, SeisXchange, Sierra,
Sierra (design), SigmaView, SimResults, SIVA, SpecDecomp, StrataMap, StrataModel, StrataAmp, StrataSim,
StratWorks, StressCheck, STRUCT, Surf & Connect, SynTool, SystemStart, SystemStart for Clients,
System Start for Servers, SystemStart for Storage, T2B, TDQ, Team Workspace, TeamView, TERAS,
Total Drilling Performance, TOW/cs The Oilfield Workstation, Trend Form Gridding, Turbo Synthetics, VIP,
VIP-COMP, VIP-CORE, VIP-DUAL, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-EXECUTIVE, VIP-Local Grid Refinement,
VIP-THERM, WavX, Web Editor, Web OpenWorks, Wellbase, Wellbore Planner, WELLCAT, WELLPLAN,
WellXchange, WOW, Xsection, Xsource, You're in Control. Experience the difference, ZAP!, and Z-MAP Plus
are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of Landmark Graphics Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Note
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a
commitment by Landmark Graphics Corporation. Landmark Graphics Corporation assumes no responsibility for any
error that may appear in this manual. Some states or jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of expressed or implied
warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
Landmark Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL
Contents
Macro Reference Manual
for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL
Introduction.................................................................................................. 1
Overview............................................................................................................ 1
Uses of Macros............................................................................................ 1
Types of Macros .......................................................................................... 1
About This Guide.............................................................................................. 2

Purpose of and Audience for This Guide.................................................. 2
Contents of This Guide............................................................................... 2
Typographic Conventions .......................................................................... 3
Related Documentation .............................................................................. 4
Macro Descriptions ............................................................................... 5
Introduction....................................................................................................... 5
Macro Description Table .................................................................................. 6
Macros Called by Menu Options ..................................................................... 12

Macros Menu ............................................................................................... 12
Macros: Quick-look Menu ..................................................................... 13
Macros: Graphics Menu ........................................................................ 13
Macros: Operations Menu..................................................................... 14
Macros: Geophysics Menu ................................................................... 14
Macros: Utilities Menu........................................................................... 15
R2003.12.0 Contents iii

Macro Descriptions .......................................................................................... 15

Information Included in Macro Descriptions ............................................ 15
Macro Name ........................................................................................... 16
Menu Option........................................................................................... 16
Purpose .................................................................................................. 16
Description ............................................................................................. 16
Results.................................................................................................... 16
Technical Notes ..................................................................................... 16
Prompt and Parameter Descriptions.................................................... 17
Description........................................................................................ 18
Macro Parameter .............................................................................. 18
Options for ETEXT Type Parameter................................................ 19
Data Type .......................................................................................... 19
Range ................................................................................................ 20
Default Value..................................................................................... 21
ZCL Processes Used ............................................................................. 21
Additional Information ................................................................................ 22
ANTILOG-TEN-DATA......................................................................................... 23
ANTILOG-TEN-GRID......................................................................................... 26
APPEND-XY....................................................................................................... 28
AREA-DEPTH .................................................................................................... 32
BUBBLE-POSTING ........................................................................................... 40
CHANGE-MFD-NAME ....................................................................................... 49
CLEAN ............................................................................................................... 50
COLOR-BAR...................................................................................................... 51
COLOR-CONTOURS ......................................................................................... 60
CONTOUR-WINDOW......................................................................................... 72
R2003.12.0 Contents iv
CONVERT-DMS-DEG ........................................................................................ 78
DATA-BLANK..................................................................................................... 82
DATA-ENUMERATION....................................................................................... 85
DATA-HISTORY ................................................................................................. 88
DATA-PROFILES ............................................................................................... 90
DATA-SUMMARY............................................................................................... 97
DEBUG-SIL-TOGGLE........................................................................................ 99
DIP-PLOT-DATA ................................................................................................. 100
DIP-PLOT-GRID ................................................................................................. 105
ENVELOPE ........................................................................................................ 110
Summary of the ENVELOPE Macro........................................................... 111

Understanding the ENVELOPE Macro ...................................................... 112
Modeling the Envelope Control Parameters ............................................. 115
Discontinuity Use .................................................................................. 115
Discontinuity Generalization Tolerance .............................................. 116
Quantized Contours .............................................................................. 116
Map Design Parameters ........................................................................ 117
File Saving.............................................................................................. 118
Framework Logic ........................................................................................ 119
Minimal Input Requirements................................................................. 119
File Saving.............................................................................................. 120
Gross Rock Volume Modeling .............................................................. 120
Graphical Outputs ................................................................................. 121
Other Volumetric Evaluations .................................................................... 125
EVALUATE-CONGRID....................................................................................... 154
EVALUATE-POLYN............................................................................................ 157
EXPORT-CPS-FILE............................................................................................ 167
R2003.12.0 Contents v
EXPORT-ZGF-FILE............................................................................................ 169
FASTCONTOURMAP ........................................................................................ 171
FASTMAPFROMGRID ....................................................................................... 174
FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS ................................................................................... 177
FAULT-BALANCER............................................................................................ 182
FAULT-CONTOURS ........................................................................................... 186
FAULT-DIP-SYMBOL ......................................................................................... 197
FAULT-MIGRATION............................................................................................ 202
FAULT-PROFILING ............................................................................................ 208
FAULT-SHRINKER ............................................................................................. 214
FIELD-LISTING.................................................................................................. 223
FILL-BORDER ................................................................................................... 225
FISHNET-PLOT .................................................................................................. 227
GEOSORT.......................................................................................................... 239
GRIDANDMAPX ................................................................................................ 242
GRID-LT-EQ-GT ................................................................................................. 246
GRID-TO-SEISMIC ............................................................................................ 249
HAND-CONTOUR .............................................................................................. 252
IMPORT-CPS-FILE ............................................................................................ 257
IMPORT-GRID.................................................................................................... 268
IMPORT-ZGF-FILE............................................................................................. 273
INTERPOLATION .............................................................................................. 275
LABL-FOUR-CRNS ........................................................................................... 277
R2003.12.0 Contents vi
LEASE-DRAWING ............................................................................................. 281
Technical Notes........................................................................................... 283

Preparing Lease Polygon (Vertex) Files .............................................. 283
Segment I.D. Field ............................................................................ 283
Area Identification Field................................................................... 283
Color Code Field............................................................................... 283
Preparing Lease Identification (Text) Files.......................................... 284
Text Fields (Required)...................................................................... 284
Area Identification Field (Required)................................................ 285
Area Symbol Code Field (Optional) ................................................ 286
Segment I.D. Field (Optional) .......................................................... 287
Color Code Fields (Optional)........................................................... 287
Z Fields (Optional)............................................................................ 287
Lease Drawing Hints ............................................................................. 288
Activating Shared Lease Attributes ..................................................... 288
LINE-GRID-PLUS .............................................................................................. 295
LIST-CPS-FILE................................................................................................... 312
MAKEMAPGENERAL ....................................................................................... 313

NADCONCV....................................................................................................... 314
NEW-CONTOUR ................................................................................................ 318
NIV-DATA ........................................................................................................... 330
NIV-GRIDS ......................................................................................................... 336
PATCH-GRID...................................................................................................... 343
PENETRATE-GRIDS ......................................................................................... 346
PENETRATE-ONEGRD ..................................................................................... 354
R2003.12.0 Contents vii

PICT-AND-PST-DLS........................................................................................... 358
PICT-AND-PST-NTS........................................................................................... 366
PICT-NTS-DLS ................................................................................................... 385
PICTURE-STATS ............................................................................................... 394
POLYGON-CLOSE ............................................................................................ 395
POLYGON-FILL ................................................................................................. 397
POST-DLS.......................................................................................................... 399
POST-LINE......................................................................................................... 403
POST-NTS.......................................................................................................... 407
POST-NTS-DLS ................................................................................................. 423
POST-PIC-STATS............................................................................................... 441
POST-STAR ....................................................................................................... 445
PROFILE-CONTOURS ...................................................................................... 468
QUALITY ............................................................................................................ 496
QUICKVOL-TWOPOLS ..................................................................................... 504
QUIKVOL-FORTYPOL....................................................................................... 508
REDUCE-POSTING ........................................................................................... 512
RESAMP-W-AOIGRID ....................................................................................... 516
RMLOCK............................................................................................................ 519
SHADE-POLYGONS.......................................................................................... 520
SPAWN-PROCESS ............................................................................................ 524
SPECIFY-CONTOURS ...................................................................................... 526
START ................................................................................................................ 533
STRATATHICKNESS ......................................................................................... 534
Technical Notes........................................................................................... 535

Technical Approach............................................................................... 536
R2003.12.0 Contents viii

SURFCORRECT ................................................................................................ 539
Summary...................................................................................................... 540
Production Geology .............................................................................. 540
Basin Studies ......................................................................................... 541
Stratigraphic/Reservoir Framework Building...................................... 541
Understanding the SURFCORRECT Macro ......................................... 543
Method of Macro Application (MMETHOD) .................................... 543
Quality Control Data File (OPRSDAT) ............................................. 545
SURFACE-INTRSECT ....................................................................................... 557
SURFACEPIC..................................................................................................... 566
Parameters for constructing first surface................................................. 569

Parameters for constructing second surface........................................... 571
Parameters for constructing second surface........................................... 573
THREED-T-TO-D ................................................................................................ 575
Technical Notes........................................................................................... 576

Preparing the Three-Dimensional Grid................................................ 576
TIME-SLICE ....................................................................................................... 580
TRANSFORM-COORDS.................................................................................... 585
TREND-ANAL-GRID.......................................................................................... 589
Technical Notes........................................................................................... 590

Factors Affecting Trend Gridding Accuracy ....................................... 590
Spatial Distribution .......................................................................... 591
Number of Terms.............................................................................. 592
Accuracy of the Trend Fit ................................................................ 592
Block Averaging..................................................................................... 595
Output Grid Parameters ........................................................................ 595
Limiting Z Values ................................................................................... 596
R2003.12.0 Contents ix
USER-FILTER .................................................................................................... 600
VEL-FUN-T-TO-D ............................................................................................... 604
VERT-TO-DGRID................................................................................................ 612
ZGF-SUMMARY................................................................................................. 615
Running Macros ....................................................................................... 617
Overview............................................................................................................ 617
Running a Macro in Z-MAP Plus ..................................................................... 618
Running a Macro from ZCL.............................................................................. 621
Creating a Macro ..................................................................................... 623
Overview............................................................................................................ 623
Creating a Log File with Z-MAP Plus .............................................................. 626
Creating Macros ............................................................................................... 627

Steps for Creating a Macro ........................................................................ 628
Common User Errors ....................................................................................... 644
Storing and Gaining Access to Macros.......................................................... 645

Z-MAP Plus Access..................................................................................... 645
ZCL Storage and Access............................................................................ 646
Using the Z-MAP Plus Command Menu .............................................. 646
Using the RZCL Script........................................................................... 648
R2003.12.0 Contents x
Macro Structure........................................................................................ 649
Overview............................................................................................................ 649
Parts of a Macro................................................................................................ 652

Macro Name Record ................................................................................... 652
Parameter Definition Records.................................................................... 652
Possible Elements of a Parameter Definition Record ........................ 653
Example Macro Parameter Definition Records ................................... 654
Detailed Descriptions of Parameter Definition Elements .................. 657
Required Parameter Flag ................................................................. 657
Parameter Name ............................................................................... 657
Parameter Type................................................................................. 657
Color Button Widget ........................................................................ 659
Font Widget....................................................................................... 659
File Type ............................................................................................ 660
Field Type.......................................................................................... 661
Maximum Length.............................................................................. 661
Precision Value................................................................................. 661
Default Value..................................................................................... 662
Range ................................................................................................ 662
End Record Symbol ......................................................................... 662
Options.............................................................................................. 662
Comments......................................................................................... 663
End Parameters ................................................................................ 663
Abstract........................................................................................................ 663
R2003.12.0 Contents xi
Prompts........................................................................................................ 663
Parameter Prompt Records .................................................................. 664
New Dialog Box Control ........................................................................ 664
ZCL Commands........................................................................................... 666
R2003.12.0 Contents xii

Introduction
Overview
A macro is a set of Z-MAP Command Language (ZCL) process
commands that have been packaged together and are called and
executed as a group, either by Z-MAP Plus or by another ZCL
command stream. The 2003.3.0 release of Z-MAP Plus includes over
70 macros supplied by Landmark. However, you can also write your
own macros and then store them for your use or for use by others.
Uses of Macros
In general, macros are used to can procedures. For the novice user,
this can make a difficult procedure easier to execute. Canning
procedures is also an excellent way of documenting and storing a
complex workflow that may need to be duplicated in the future.
Because macros have access to all functionality within ZCL, you can
use them to gain access to ZCL functions that are not yet available in
the Z-MAP Plus interface.
Types of Macros
Macros executed from Z-MAP Plus are called Z-MAP Plus macros,
and macros executed from a ZCL Command Stream are called ZCL
macros. The structure of these two types of macros is slightly different,
and is covered in Macro Structure starting on page 649. You can run
Z-MAP Plus macros as ZCL macros, but you cannot run ZCL macros
from Z-MAP Plus. Z-MAP Plus macros are also classified as either
user-supplied or Landmark-supplied.
R2003.12.0 Overview 1
About This Guide
Purpose of and Audience for This Guide

This guide is designed as a reference tool to help you more fully
understand the Landmark-supplied macros, their components, and how
to use them to the best advantage.
You can help ensure this guide meets that goal by providing
constructive feedback. Help us make sure this guide covers the areas of
most importance to you.
This guide is intended for ZCL and Z-MAP Plus users who want to
learn:
More about the Landmark-supplied macros
How macros are structured
How to create macros
Typical users of this guide include petroleum engineers, geologists,
geophysicists, and geo-technicians.
Contents of This Guide

This guide is divided into five sections:
Introduction A general introduction to macros and this guide.
Macro Descriptions Details about the Z-MAP Plus macros
supplied with the current release, including:
A quick reference table describing the function of the
Landmark macros
Graphic representations of the Macro menu options and the
macros they call
An alphabetical listing of all Landmark-supplied macros. The
lists are divided into 4 groups: A-H, I - M, N-R, S-Z. Each
listing includes:
Purpose and use of the macro
Required and optional input
Results
Prompt and parameter descriptions
ZCL processes used by the macro
R2003.12.0 About This Guide: Introduction 2

Running Macros Steps for:

Running a macro in Z-MAP Plus
Creating a command stream to run a macro in ZCL.
Creating A Macro Steps for:
Using Z-MAP Plus to log a procedure
Creating a macro to run in Z-MAP Plus or ZCL
and information about:
Common errors in user-written macros
Storing and accessing macros
Macro Structure Definitions of each part of a macro,
including:
Macro parameter definitions
Abstract
Prompts
ZCL commands
Typographic Conventions
To make the information in this guide as accessible as possible, the
following conventions are observed throughout:
Examples of macro records and screen displays are in a
typewriter-style font, such as:
NCONTOUR, INTEGER , 1, , 0, 256 /
A portion of an example that is to be replaced by a user value is
presented in italic typewriter-style font, such as:
MACRO NAME = DESIRED-MACRO-NAME
The names of menu and button selections appear in bold type. The
path to a Z-MAP Plus process is shown with the menu selections
connected by arrows, such as:
Select Files Directory Paths in the Z-MAP Plus window.
Default field names (as described in Appendix B. File and Field
Codes *) appear in all capital letters. In text, they are sometimes
appear with initial capitals for easier reading. X (Easting) and Y
(Northing) are often represented with X and Y.
Notes contain information to assist you in understanding an
application.

Z-MAP Plus Users See this Prompt Even If NUMFLDS = 1

If you do not want to post a second field, select (None - use no field).
Related Documentation
The following guides are available from your system administrator or
Landmark representative.
ZCL Operators Manual (Volumes 1 and 2) present the Z-MAP
Command Language and shows you how to start the program and
use process statements to write a command stream for generating a
variety of maps. The ZCL Operators Manual covers all
parameters for ZCL processes.
Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual provides easy access to reference
information about Z-MAP Plus procedures and features. Overview
workflows, tables, and selected screen captures supplement the
text to help you understand how to use each task.
Each of these guides contains appendixes with information you may
find useful for structuring macros.

Macro Descriptions
Introduction
This section describes over 70 Landmark-supplied Z-MAP Plus macros

designed to supplement the standard suite of Z-MAP Plus capabilities.
Other macros may be available at your site, which are not described
here user-supplied macros (for example, ones written by you or
other company employees).
Landmark-supplied macros are presented in alphabetical order in this
guide. Macro descriptions include the macro type, menu option
associated with the macro, purpose, results, prompt and parameter
descriptions. In addition, technical notes accompany the descriptions of
the following macros: LEASE-DRAWING, STRATATHICKNESS,
THREED-T-D, and TREND-ANAL-GRID.
In this first topic of the section, Landmark macros are organized in two
ways:
In an alphabetical table that includes a brief description of the
function of each macro,
In a graphic format where Macros menu options are correlated to
the name of the macro they call.
R2003.12.0 Introduction 5
Macro Description Table

The following table lists the Landmark-supplied macros in alphabetical
order, with a brief description and a link to the beginning of the macro
documentation.
Table 1: Macros Described in This Guide
Macro Name Description Page
ANTILOG-TEN-DATA Computes the antilogarithm to base ten for the values in the 23
input field.
ANTILOG-TEN-GRID Computes the antilogarithm (base ten) for the value of each 26
grid node.
APPEND-XY Attaches x and y values to a seismic file. 28
AREA-DEPTH Checks the results of the volumetrics task as compared to 32
volumetric results arrived at by hand.
BUBBLE-POSTING Posts symbols on a map, with symbol size being determined 40
by the z field value.
CHANGE-MFD-NAME Changes the internal name on an MFD. 49
CLEAN Used only for performing product demonstrations. 50
COLOR-BAR Posts a color bar on your map. 51
COLOR-CONTOURS Places color-filled contours and color bar on map. 60
CONTOUR-WINDOW Generates a contour map of a windowed area of the dataset. 72
CONVERT-DMS-DEG Converts degrees, minutes, and seconds lat/long to decimal 78
degrees lat/long or vice versa.
DATA-BLANK Blanks a data field on the selected data file inside all 82
polygons. It is designed as a work-around for
Operations Data Operations Blank Data, which
only blanks using the first polygon on the vertex file.
DATA- Builds a Segment ID field from an input dataset. 85
ENUMERATION
DATA-HISTORY Prints the history of a selected data file to the screen. 88

DATA-PROFILES Generates profiles along lines of a dataset with a line ID 90
field.
R2003.12.0 Macro Descriptions: Macro Description Table 6

DATA-SUMMARY Displays all files in the attached master files (MFDs). 97

DEBUG-SIL-TOGGLE This macro toggles on or off the SIL debug flag. 99
DIP- PLOT -DATA Generates arrows on a map that point in the direction of dip 100
or gradient.
DIP-PLOT-GRID Adds dip vectors at grid locations to a plot. 105
ENVELOPE Produces net hydrocarbon pore thickness grids. 110
EVALUATE- Builds a constant grid from user-defined input. 154
CONGRID
EVALUATE- Evaluates a polynomial function over a user defined grid 157

POLYN and stores the results as a new grid. Polynomial trends of up
to the 2nd order can be handled by the macro.
EXPORT-CPS-FILE Exports an MFD to a CPS SAVE file. 167
EXPORT-ZGF-FILE Converts a ZGF to a flat ASCII file. 169
FASTCONTOURMAP Builds a grid and generates a contour map. 171
FASTMAPFROMGRID Builds a contour map using a grid file. 174
FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS Given a value for two fields describing a centerline fault, 177
backfills the value of the third field.
FAULT-BALANCER Locates bifurcations in a center-line fault file and balances 182
throw at the bifurcations.
FAULT-CONTOURS Puts color-filled contours and a color bar on your map. 186
FAULT-DIP-SYMBOL Produces polylines that aid in the symbolization of fault 197
polygons produced by the fault expansion phase of Point
Gridding Plus post processing module.
FAULT- MIGRATION Migrates a set of center-line traces from their current map 202
position to the position they would have on a structure
surface.
FAULT-PROFILING Creates a fault file and an optional vertex file that can be 208
used to validate graphically vertical separation distribution
along the faults in a center-line fault file.
FAULT-SHRINKER Automatically converts faults with gaps to center-line 214
faults.

FIELD-LISTING Lists the field descriptors for the selected dataset. 223
FILL-BORDER Fills the selected area of the map with a user-defined color. 225
FISHNET-PLOT Generates an isometric plot. 227
GEOSORT Geographically sorts fragmented line data back. 239
GRIDANDMAPX Grids a z field on a data file and contours the resultant grid. 242
Adds a border, border labels, and posts well points.
GRID-LT-EQ-GT Creates a Boolean grid. 246
GRID-TO-SEISMIC Converts the rows and columns of a grid to seismic lines 249
and concatenates them into one seismic file.
HAND-CONTOUR Performs linear interpolation along lines and outputs 252
interpolated values to a file.
IMPORT-CPS-FILE Imports a CPS SAVE file into an MFD. 257
IMPORT-GRID Uses formats you create to import a grid dataset from an 268
external diskfile.
IMPORT-ZGF-FILE Converts a flat Z-MAP Graphics File (ZGF) into a ZGF 273
usable in Z-MAP Plus.
INTERPOLATION Interpolates along a seismic line, repopulating the line at the 275
indicated shotpoint limit.
LABL-FOUR-CRNS Labels each of the four corners of a map with either 277
latitude/longitude or northing/easting labels.
LEASE-DRAWING Posts and annotates lease polygons. 281
LINE-GRID-PLUS Extends the functionality of Line Gridding. 295
LIST-CPS-FILE Lists the contents of a CPS SAVE file. 312
MAKEMAPGENERAL Not a standalone macro. It is used by the ENVELOPE and 313
SURFCORRECT macros.
NADCONCV Translates NAD 27 latitude and longitude values to NAD 83 314
latitude and longitude values. The translation is available in
both directions.
NEW-CONTOUR Contours opaque faults, profile faults, colorfills and posts 318
color bar.

NIV-DATA Uses a Carter-Good Iterative Depth Algorithm (IDA) to 330

produce a depth field.
NIV-GRIDS Uses a Carter-Good Iterative Depth Algorithm (IDA) to 336
produce an output depth grid.
PATCH-GRID Patches a small grid into a large grid using the x and y 343
coordinates in both grids to determine its position.
PENETRATE-GRIDS Calculates the x, y, z coordinates at which deviated well 346
tracks penetrate one or more gridded horizons.
PENETRATE-ONEGRD Calculates the x, y, z coordinates at which deviated well 354
tracks penetrate one gridded horizon.
PICT-AND-PST-DLS Creates a new picture on which you may plot Dominion 358
Land Survey (DLS) information.
PICT-AND-PST-NTS Creates a picture on which you may plot National 366
Topographic Survey (NTS) information.
PICT-NTS-DLS Creates a picture using the area of interest parameters from 385
the Dominion Land Survey (DLS) or the National
Topographic Survey (NTS).
PICTURE-STATS Gives information on a picture. 394
POLYGON-CLOSE Closes all polygons in a vertex file. 395
POLYGON-FILL Fills polygons with a solid color and stores them on an 397
MFD.
POST-DLS Posts Dominion Land Survey (DLS) lines on a picture that 399
has already been created.
POST-LINE Posts a single line using FALT, DATA or VERT type files. 403
POST-NTS Posts National Topographic Survey (NTS) Map, Series, 407
Block, Unit and/or Quarter lines and labels on a previously
created picture.
POST-NTS-DLS Posts DLS or NTS survey onto existing map 423
POST-PIC-STATS Draws a box on a map and posts information about the 441
scale, size, and projection of the map.

POST-STAR Posts star symbols on the current picture for data distributed 445
at control points.
PROFILE- Contours grids that have abrupt changes in surface slope 468
CONTOURS along well-defined profile lines.
QUALITY Performs quality assurance on a grid and a dataset. 496
QUICKVOL-TWOPOLS Provides a quick estimate of the volume between the 504
surface represented by the input grid and a flat surface with
a constant z value. User can specify a maximum of two
input polygons.
QUIKVOL- Provides a quick estimate of the volume between the 508
FORTYPOL surface represented by the input grid and a flat surface with
a constant z value. User can specify a maximum of 40 input
polygons.
REDUCE-POSTING Reduces posting of a text field in an area based on a keyfield 512
such as operator name.
RESAMP-W-AOIGRID Resamples a grid using a control grid as a source of output 516
grid parameters.
RMLOCK Used only for performing product demonstrations. 519
SHADE-POLYGONS Fills a set of polygons with hachured lines. 520
SPAWN-PROCESS Spawns a process to allow another program to run within 524
Z-MAP Plus.
SPECIFY-CONTOURS Enables the user to specify special contour levels as input 526
(such as the OWC or GOC), which do not fall in even
increment levels.
START Used only for performing product demonstrations. 533
STRATATHICKNESS Computes stratigraphic thickness for an interval defined by 534
top and base grids.
SURFACEPIC Contours up to three surfaces and posts the Z-Fields around 566
the control points
SURFCORRECT Provides a way of correcting a surface or of conformably 539
merging a surface with a set of new well picks

SURFACE-INTRSECT Determines whether two input grids intersect; if they do, it 557
produces the curve of their intersection as a fault file.
THREED-T-TO-D Converts a time grid to a velocity grid using a special 575
three-dimensional time slice grid in the conversion
process.
TIME-SLICE Builds the pseudo three-dimensional velocity grid needed 580
for the Time-to-Depth conversion method that is provided
in the THREED-T-TO-D macro
TRANSFORM-COORDS Performs coordinate transformations (map projections). 585
TREND-ANAL-GRID Creates a trend grid and a residual grid. 589
USER-FILTER Uses various methods to define a grid filter and filter 600
operator.
VEL-FUN-T-TO-D Executes Velocity-Function-Time-to-Depth Conversion. 604
VERT-TO-DGRID Records the shortest distance from each grid node to any 612
point along any line segment in a user-specified input vertex
file of the form (x,y,seg id).
ZGF-SUMMARY Generates a report for each picture in your graphics file 615
(ZGF).

Macros Called by Menu Options

The Macros menu options, like many Z-MAP Plus menu options, use
macros to accomplish their tasks. When you start a process by using a
macro, the Z-MAP Plus System Window reports the macro name called
by the menu option and a brief description of the macro. Often the
macro name and the Macros menu option name are very similar (for
example, the Geographical Sorting menu option calls the GEOSORT
macro), but sometimes the connection is not so clear (for example, the
Boolean Grid menu option calls the GRID-LT-EQ-GT macro).
The figures in the following text correlates the Macros menu options
and the macros they call. Use the alphabetical listing in this section to
learn more about the function of each menu option.
Macros Menu
The Macros menu contains the User Macros option and submenus for
the following macro groups:
User Macros Displays a dialog box for creating custom
macros.
Quick-look Displays a submenu of macros that enable you to
see your work quickly.
Graphics Displays a submenu of macros that alter the
appearance of your work.
Operations Displays a submenu of macros that manipulate file
information.
Geophysics Displays a submenu of macros for handling
seismic and geographical data.
Utilities Displays a submenu of macros for handling lines and
files.
Faults Macros
To display the dialog boxes for fault handling macros, select the
Operations Faults menu options.
R2003.12.0 Macro Descriptions: Macros Called by Menu Options 12

Macros: Quick-look Menu

The following illustration shows the Macros: Quick-look menu options
and the macros they call:
GRIDANDMAPX
FASTMAPFROMGRID
FAULT-CONTOURS
Macros: Graphics Menu

The following illustration shows the Macros: Graphics menu options
AREA-DEPTH
BUBBLE-POSTING
COLOR-CONTOURS
SPECIFY-CONTOURS
FILL-BORDER
DATA-PROFILES
DIP-PLOT-DATA
DIP-PLOT-GRID
LABL-FOUR-CRNS
PROFILE-CONTOURS
SURFACEPIC
POST-LINE
POST-STAR
REDUCE-POSTING
CONTOUR-WINDOW

Macros: Operations Menu

The following illustration shows the Macros: Operations menu options
CONVERT-DMS-DEG
DATA-BLANK
PATCH-GRID
QUALITY
RESAMP-W-AOIGRID
STRATATHICKNESS
SURFACE-INTRSECT
PENETRATE-ONEGRD
PENETRATE-GRIDS
Macros: Geophysics Menu

The following illustration shows the Macros: Geophysics menu options
GEOSORT
GRID-TO-SEISMIC
INTERPOLATION
VEL-FUN-T-TO-D
TIME-SLICE
THREED-T-TO-D

Macros: Utilities Menu

The following illustration shows the Macros: Utilities menu options
POLYGON-CLOSE
CHANGE-MFD-NAME
DATA-HISTORY
FIELD-LISTING
DATA-SUMMARY
VERT-TO-DGRID
PICTURE-STATS
DATA-ENUMERATION
Macro Descriptions
Macros are presented in alphabetical order.
Information Included in Macro Descriptions

Information provided in the macro description consists of:
Macro name (next topic)
Corresponding menu option (16)
Purpose (16)
Description (optional) (16)
Results (16)
Technical notes (optional) (16)
Prompt and parameter descriptions (17)
ZCL processes called by the macro (21)
R2003.12.0 Macro Descriptions: Macro Descriptions 15

Macro Name
The macro name identifies the procedure(s) to be executed. A macro
name is a string of up to 16 characters and may contain no blanks,
numbers, or underbars.
All Z-MAP Plus macros are identified by the .ZCLMAC extension.
Menu Option
Many Z-MAP Plus menu options call macros to accomplish their tasks.
This field in the description of the macro identifies the menu option
associated with the macro, if any.
Purpose
The purpose provides a description of what the macro does.
Description
The description includes additional information about the macro, such
as a list of the parameters that you are asked to specify. In some cases,
this description is extensive.
Results
This section summarizes the expected output. Where appropriate,
examples of graphic or data output are provided.
Technical Notes
Technical notes explain theory and use of four of the more complex
macros LEASE-DRAWING, STRATATHICKNESS,
THREED-T-D, and TREND-ANAL-GRID.

Prompt and Parameter Descriptions

This portion of the macro description links each prompt to its related
macro parameter.
The first line of each description is the Z-MAP Plus prompt. Two types
of prompts appear in the documentation:
* Bolded prompt
When the prompt is bolded, the prompt appears during the use of the
macro in Z-MAP Plus. An asterisk (*) preceding the prompt indicates
that it is a required parameter.
o Unbolded Prompt
Unbolded prompts represent an input MFD. These prompts are not
seen by the user when running the macro in Z-MAP Plus. Input MFD
prompts have a degree () symbol preceding the prompt. These
prompts are included in the descriptions because when the macro is
executed as a ZCL macro values for these parameters must be
supplied.
Prompts are listed in the order in which they appear in the macro. Each
prompt is followed by these elements:
A description of the parameter
The name of the macro parameter
Popup button options, if any
Data type
Data range, if any
Default value, if any

Required Parameter
Prompt
Range of acceptable
Input Member File types
Input Master File Prompt

(not seen in Z-MAP Plus)
Range of acceptable
Input Field types
Data Type for FIELD

is listed as I (Integer),
used for ZCL input
ETEXT Options
Data Type for ETEXT

is listed as C*N
where N is the
maximum length
Example Macro Parameter Descriptions
Description
This item describes the purpose of the parameter.
Macro Parameter
This is the actual parameter name used to specify an input value for the
parameter when writing the ZCL macro process call. For example:
FAULTIN = Triangle Faults

Options for ETEXT Type Parameter

ZCL users can only specify one of these valid character string
responses. Z-MAP Plus users select one of these options from a pop-up
button list. See the example on 18.
Data Type
The Data Type is one of three types: C*N, R, or I.
C*N indicates the response is a text string up to N characters in length.
For example, C*8 stands for character text of a maximum length of 8
characters. Note that embedded blanks are counted as characters.
Z-MAP Plus users enter values in fields or select from popup
menus.
ZCL users enter values in single quotes; see Parameter value in the
ZCL Operators Manual. When options are listed, the text string
response must come from the list; see Options for ETEXT Type
Parameter," above.
R indicates that the value must be a real numberfor example, a
number with a decimal point such as 1.0, 2.27325, 21252.52, or 1.0E7.
I indicates that the value must be an integer number, such as 1, 2002, or
25.
ZCL users must not use a decimal point to specify an integer
value, or ZCL responds with an error message.
If the user specifies a real number as input (instead of an integer),
Z-MAP Plus ignores the decimal value.

Range
Range identifies supported values for the parameter. A value outside
the range causes an error. Ranges are given for input files, input fields,
MFDs, and some real and integer parameters.
Range for Input Member Files

The range for input member files corresponds to the acceptable File
Type(s) , such as DATA, CNTR, GRID, and VERT.
Z-MAP Plus users select from a list of all attached member files of
the correct type(s).
ZCL users must enter an appropriate member file name as a
character string.
Input Fields
The range for input fields corresponds to the acceptable Field Type(s) ,
such as X (EASTING), Z VALUE, and vertical separation.
Z-MAP Plus users select from a list of all fields of the correct
type(s) in the input file.
ZCL users must enter the sequential number of the field.
Master Files
The range for MFDs is always 0 through 5, since 5 is the maximum
number of MFDs and scratch files that can be attached at the same
time.
Z-MAP Plus users do not have to specify input MFDs. The input
MFDs are the currently attached MFDs. Output MFDs are
specified by selection from a popup menu.
ZCL users must enter the sequential number of the desired MFD,
as described in the ZCL Operators Manual.

Default Value
The default value is used when the macro user does not specify a macro
parameter value. If no value is specified by the user and the macro
parameter default given is ZCL Default, then the ZCL parameter default
is used if one exists.
The ZCL default output file name is based on the input file name or is
based on a field name.
Be careful about using default values. Default values are not always
optimal for your application. The documentation in the guide should
help you to choose optimal parameter values.
Color Index Referenced by a Macro Parameter

The color index specified by a macro parameter refers to that color index in
the color table associated with the current picture.
ZCL Processes Used

This portion of the macro description lists the ZCL processes used by
the macro. However, you are not told how many times the process was
used and processes that are common to all macros, such as STOP, are
not listed. Users are encouraged to look at Landmark-supplied macros
to see how they are structured.

Additional Information
For more information on the parts of a macro, see Macro Structure
starting on page 649. Appendixes in Z-MAP Plus and ZCL guides
provide additional information about and examples of:
Graphics Feature (Segment Type) Codes
Data File Type Codes
Data Field Type Codes
Well Symbols
Font Types
Line Patterns
State Plane Projection Codes
Color Representation Section and Color Index Section of the
Default Color Table
Reference Spheroids

ANTILOG-TEN-DATA
Macro Name ANTILOG-TEN-DATA
Menu Option Operations Data Operations Antilog Base 10 (from Data)
Purpose This macro computes the antilogarithm to base ten (also called the
common logarithm) of the numbers in the input field. This is the inverse
operation for the single data operation LOG10.
Description You are asked to specify the following input values:

name of the input data file and its associated MFD
field on the input data file to be used as input to the antilog
operation
name for the output data file
MFD for the output data file
field to receive the output antilogarithm
name for the field to receive the output antilogarithm
Results The antilogarithm is calculated and saved in the specified field in the
output file. Note: Antilogarithms can be calculated successfully only
for numbers in a range from about -40.0 to +38.0; the exact range
depend on the machine being used. Antilogarithms are always positive
numbers.
PROMPT AND PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

*Select Input File
Description Name of the input data file.
Macro Parameter DATAIN
Data Type C*24
Range All attached DATA files
Default Value No default
R2003.12.0 ANTILOG-TEN-DATA 23
ANTILOG-TEN-DATA: Parameters
o
MFD for the Input File
Description The MFD for the input data file.
Macro Parameter MFDIN
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Default Searches all attached MFDs
Select Input Field

Description Field on the input file whose antilogarithm is to be calculated.
Macro Parameter INFLD
Data Type I
Range All real-number value fields on the input file
*Select Output Field

Description Number of the field where output antilogarithms are written. This
overwrites the existing data in the designated field.
Macro Parameter OUTFLD
Data Type I
Range Any non-text field on the file.
*Output Field Name

Description Name for the field where output antilogarithms will be written.
Macro Parameter FLDNAME
Data Type C*20
R2003.12.0 ANTILOG-TEN-DATA: Parameters 24

ANTILOG-TEN-DATA: Parameters
*Output file name

Description Name for the output data file.
Macro Parameter DATAOUT
Data Type C*24
oMFD of Output File

Description MFD that contains the output data file.
Macro Parameter MFDOUT
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Default Value 1 first attached MFD
ZCL PROCESSES
DATA BLOCK
FILE STATISTICS
BRANCH
DATA BLOCK UTILITY
SINGLE DATA OPS
DELETE FILE
R2003.12.0 ANTILOG-TEN-DATA: Parameters 25

ANTILOG-TEN-GRID
Macro Name ANTILOG-TEN-GRID
Menu Option Operations Grid Operations Antilog Base 10 (from Grid)
Purpose The ANTILOG-TEN-GRID macro calculates the antilogarithm (base

10) for the value of each grid node. This is the inverse operation for
Single Grid Operation LOG10.
Description Specify the following input values:

name of the input grid file and its associated MFD
name of the output grid file
MFD for the output grid file
Results Output is a grid file whose node values are the antilogarithms of the
corresponding node values in the input grid. Note: Antilogarithms can
be calculated successfully only for numbers in a range from about -40.0
to +38.0; the exact range will depend on the machine being used.
Antilogarithms are always positive numbers.

*Input GRID File
Description Name of the input grid file.
Macro Parameter GRIDIN
Data Type C*24
oMFD of Input GRID File

Description The MFD containing the input grid file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 ANTILOG-TEN-GRID 26
ANTILOG-TEN-GRID: Parameters
*Output GRID file name

Description Name of the output grid file.
Macro Parameter GRIDOUT
Data Type C*24
o
MFD of Output GRID File
Description The MFD for the output grid file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
SINGLE GRID OPS
DELETE FILE
R2003.12.0 ANTILOG-TEN-GRID: Parameters 27

APPEND-XY
Macro Name APPEND-XY
Menu Option Operations Geophysical Operations

Append X-Y to Seismic Time File
Purpose The APPEND-XY macro attaches X (Easting) and Y (Northing) values

to a seismic time file. Using shotpoint locations in a Seismic Location
File (sometimes called a geographic location file), the macro
interpolates x,y values from the location values. As a result, x,y values
for the shotpoint numbers in the Seismic Time File are merged with the
Digitized Seismic Section File.
Description If the process must interpolate or extrapolate to get the correct location
values, you can specify:
a maximum distance between points for interpolation
an interpolation value
an extrapolation value
The seismic time file must be of type DATA, and it must contain Line
Name and Shotpoint Number fields. Sort the file first by Line Name
and then by Shotpoint Number. * 3D seismic data files (containing 3D
Line Name and 3D Shotpoint Numbers do not work with this macro.
The coordinate reference file must be of type DATA, and it must
contain line name, shotpoint number, and x and y coordinate fields. Sort
the file first by Line Name and then by Shotpoint Number.1
Results The correct interpolated x and y values appended to a seismic time file.
1. Z-MAP Plus users select Operations Data Operations Sort Data. ZCL users call SORT process.
R2003.12.0 APPEND-XY 28
APPEND-XY: Parameters

*Enter the Seismic Time File
Data Type C*24
o
Description The MFD for the input data file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
*Enter the Seismic Location File

Description Name of the input coordinate reference file, also known as the
geographic location file or digitized basemap shotpoint location
file.
Macro Parameter COORDIN
Data Type C*24
oMFD for the Reference Coordinate File

Description The MFD for the reference coordinate file.
Macro Parameter MFDCOORD
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 APPEND-XY: Parameters 29

Maximum Distance for Interpolation

Description Specifies the break distance tolerance. If two successive points in
the seismic location file are further apart than this distance, then no
shotpoint interpolation or extrapolation is performed.
Macro Parameter DISTANCE
Data Type R
Default Value 0.10000E+09
Max SP Number Difference for Interpolation

Description Interpolation shotpoint numbering interval tolerance. Upon
selecting two shotpoints on the seismic location file, the program
checks to see if the difference in shotpoint number between these
two points exceeds this parameter value. If so, interpolation is not
performed and extrapolation is considered.
Macro Parameter INTERPOL
Data Type R
Max SP Number Difference for Extrapolation

Description Extrapolation shotpoint numbering interval tolerance. The
difference between the shotpoint number of the input point (taken
from the seismic location file) and the shotpoint number of the
closest coordinate reference point (taken from the seismic location
file) is compared to this parameter value. If it exceeds the value,
then extrapolation is not performed for that point.
Macro Parameter EXTRAPOL
Data Type R
Enter the name of the Merged Output File

Description Name of the output data file.
Data Type C*24
Default Value GETXY

MFD for the Output File

Description The MFD for the output file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
SEIS APPEND XY

AREA-DEPTH
Macro Name AREA-DEPTH
Menu Option Macros Graphics Area/Depth Plot or

CARM Area/Depth Plot
Purpose The AREA-DEPTH macro checks the results of the volumetrics task as
compared to volumetrics results achieved by hand. This macro runs
volumes by slice increment on a surface and converts the output to a
line suitable for plotting on an area versus depth plot.
Description The input depth grid is scaled to a negative value, and then biased by a
value that you provide. The volume of the grid covered by the polygon
area is then calculated using the following values that you supply:
volume and area scaling factors
slice limit
increment
The resulting file is converted to a vertex file and used to produce a
picture plotting the area versus depth.
You are asked to input:
the GRID file on which volumetrics is calculated (TVDSS)
an optional fault (FALT) file
the polygon vertex (VERT) file defining the area for the
volumetrics calculation
bias to move grid up or down
volume and area scaling factors (optional)
slice limit for end of volumes and slice increment
R2003.12.0 AREA-DEPTH 32
AREA-DEPTH: Results
Results A picture that plots the area versus depth, as shown in the following
example.
This isochore grid is based on true triple point geometry from fault
plane models. The area bounded by the box is processed to generate the
area depth curve.
Area Depth Curve
AREA-DEPTH.PICMAC Plot
R2003.12.0 AREA-DEPTH: Results 33

AREA-DEPTH: Parameters

*Enter the Grid File Representing Surface
Description Name of the input grid file representing the surface.
Data Type C*24
Range All attached GRID files
o
MFD for the Surface Grid File
Description The MFD for the input grid.
Macro Parameter MFDGRID
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Default Search all attached MFDs
Polygon File Defining Area of Integration

Description Name of the vertex file defining the area of the grid for which the
volume is calculated.
Macro Parameter POLYGON
Data Type C*24
Range All attached VERT files
Default Value ZCL default
oMFD for the Polygon File

Description The MFD for the input polygon vertex life.
Macro Parameter MFDPOLY
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Default Search all attached MFDs
R2003.12.0 AREA-DEPTH: Parameters 34

Enter Constraining Fault File

Description Name of the input fault file.
Macro Parameter FAULTS
Data Type C*24
Range All attached FALT files
o
Master File for the Fault File
Description The MFD for the input fault file.
Macro Parameter MFDFAULT
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Constant Number to Add to All Grid Values

Description Bias factor applied to input grid to shift the value up or down.
Macro Parameter BIAS
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0
Area Scale Factor of the Surface Grid

Description Area scale factor.
Macro Parameter AREASCAL
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0001
Volume Scale Factor of the Surface Grid

Description Volume scale factor.
Macro Parameter VOLSCAL
Data Type R
Default Value 1.0

Base Level to Start Slicing

Description Minimum contour level.
Macro Parameter BASEPLAN
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0
Slice Increment
Description Slice thickness. Volumes are generated for slices of thickness from
the baseplane upwards to the cutoff.
Macro Parameter SLINC
Data Type R
Default Value 10.0
Top Level to Stop Slicing

Description Maximum contour level.
Macro Parameter SLICLIM
Data Type R
Default Value 100.0
Label for the Area Axis

Description Character string that labels the x axis of the area vs. depth plot.
Macro Parameter AREALABL
Data Type C*40
Default Value Acre
Label for the Volume Axis

Description Character string that labels the y axis of the area vs. depth plot.
Macro Parameter DPTHLABL
Data Type C*40
Default Value Feet

Label Increment of Area (X) Axis

Description Value interval for labeling x axis.
Macro Parameter LABLINCR
Data Type R
Default Value 10.0
Number of Decimal Places to Label Axes

Description Number of places to the right of the decimal point for area (x) and
depth (y) axes labels.
Macro Parameter NDECIMAL
Data Type I
Default Value 2
Specify the Format of the Area to Depth Labels

Description Format for axis labels.
Macro Parameter LABLFRMT
Options
COMMAS = Integers with commas
SCIENTIFIC = Scientific notation
Data Type C*12

Default Value SCIENTIFIC
Character Size of Plot Title

Description Size of the characters to use for the title of the area vs. depth plot.
Macro Parameter TITLSIZE
Data Type R
Default Value 0.3
Color of the Plot Line

Description Specify the color to use for the area vs. depth plot line.
Macro Parameter LINCOLOR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 7

Symbol Type to Post at Plot Point

Description Symbol to use to identify a point on the area vs. depth graph.
Macro Parameter LINSYMBL
Data Type I
Default Value 14
Save the Area to Depth Curve Vertex File

Description Decide whether to save the area vs. depth vertex file or not.
Macro Parameter SAVEOUT
Options
NO = Do not save the vertex file.
YES = Save the vertex file.
Data Type C*4

Default Value NO
Enter the Name of the Output Vertex File

Description Name of the vertex file for the area vs. depth plot.
Macro Parameter AREADPTH
Data Type C*24
Default Value AREA DEPTH CURVE
Master File for the Vertex File

Description MFD for the output area vs. depth vertex file.
Macro Parameter MFDPLOT
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Default Value 0 scratch MFD
*Graphics File to Hold Area to Depth Plot

Description Name of the graphics file for the area vs. depth plot.
Macro Parameter ZGFNAME
Data Type C*80

New or Old Graphics File

Description Specify whether the graphics file (ZGF) is new or old.
Macro Parameter NEWZGF
Options
NEW = New graphics file
OLD = Old graphics file
Data Type C*4

Default Value OLD
*Picture Name of Area to Depth Plot

Description Name of the picture for the area vs. depth plot.
Macro Parameter PICTURE
Data Type C*80
ZCL PROCESSES
SINGLE GRID OPS VOLUMETRICS
DELETE FILE FILE UTILITY
SINGLE DATA OPS BRANCH
FILE CONVERSION POST LINES
DATA BLOCK DATA STATISTICS
DATA BLOCK UTILITY PICTURE
BORDER LABEL N/E
TEXT

BUBBLE-POSTING
Macro Name BUBBLE-POSTING
Menu Option Macros Graphics Bubble Map Posting
Purpose Use the BUBBLE-POSTING macro to create a bubble map in which

the size of the symbol posted at each control point depends on the
z field value.
Description You are asked to input:

a control point dataset
the z field which varies the size of the symbol
up to two fields for annotation
an optional symbol code field
color, size, and location of the two annotation values
Results Control points posted on the current picture, as shown in the example.
Example of BUBBLE-POSTING.ZCLMAC Output
R2003.12.0 BUBBLE-POSTING 40
BUBBLE-POSTING: Parameters

Input Data File
Description Name of the input file to control posting. This file contains the
z field that controls the symbol size.
Macro Parameter FILEIN
Data Type C*24
Range All attached DATA and DWEL files
o
MFD for the Input Data
Description The MFD that contains the input file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Z Field to Use to Determine Symbol Size

Description The z field used to vary the size of the top symbols.
Macro Parameter SIZEFLD
Data Type I
Range All Z VALUE fields on the input file
Number of Fields to Annotate Symbol (1-2)

Description Number of fields for annotation (specify 1 or 2).
Macro Parameter NUMFLDS
Data Type I
Range 1 or 2
Default Value 1
R2003.12.0 BUBBLE-POSTING: Parameters 41

First Field for Annotation

Description First field to post at the top location. All field types are valid.
Macro Parameter TOPFLD1
Data Type I
Second Field for Annotation

Description Second field to post at the top location. All field types are valid.
Macro Parameter TOPFLD2
Z-MAP Plus Users See this Prompt Even If NUMFLDS = 1

If you do not want to post a second field, select (None - use no field).
Data Type I
Mode of Picking Symbol

Description Determine the source of the symbol to post at top locations.
Macro Parameter SYMMODE
Options
NUMBER = Use symbol given by SYMBOL parameter.
FIELD = Use symbol given by SYMFIELD parameter.
Data Type C*8

Default Value NUMBER
Symbol Number (If Using Number)

Description Code of the symbol to post at top locations. Used when
SYMMODE = NUMBER.
Macro Parameter SYMBOL
Data Type I
Default Value 1

Mode of Picking Symbol Color

Description Method for defining the color of the symbol at top locations.
Macro Parameter COLMODE
Options
INDEX = Vary color based on the color index given by SYMCOLOR.
FIELD = Vary color based on a field given by COLFIELD.
Data Type C*8

Default Value INDEX
Color of Symbol (If Using Index)

Description Color index for symbols at top locations.
Macro Parameter SYMCOLOR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 5
Symbol Field (If Using Field)

Description Symbol field used to determine the symbol to post at top locations.
Used when SYMMODE = FIELD.
Z-MAP Plus Users Receive an Error Message if there is no

Symbol Fields on the File
Z-MAP Plus users see a list of fields. If there are no fields of the correct
type, you must dismiss the dialog box.
Macro Parameter SYMFIELD

Data Type R
Default Value 21
Color Field (if Using Field)

Description Color field used to determine the color index for the symbol color.
Used when COLMODE = FIELD.
Macro Parameter COLFIELD
Data Type R
Default Value 41

Minimum Symbol Size

Description Minimum symbol size to post at tops, in plotter units (in or cm).
You cannot enter a value smaller than the default.
Macro Parameter MINSIZE
Data Type R
Default Value 0.05 in or 0.15 cm
Maximum Symbol Size

Description Maximum symbol size to post at tops, in plotter units (in or cm).
You cannot enter a value larger than the default; to exaggerate
symbol size, make your maps smaller.
Macro Parameter MAXSIZE
Data Type R
Increment for Symbol Size

Description Symbol size increment at tops, in plotter units (in or cm). There
may be no more than six increments, and increments must fit in
between minimum and maximum sizes given above.
Macro Parameter INCREMENT
Data Type R
Number of Increments
Description Number of increments for top symbol size.
Macro Parameter LEVELS
Data Type I
Range 1 through 6
Default Value 6

Color of the First Label

Description The color index for posting the first field of annotation.
Macro Parameter LBLCLR1
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 5
Font of the First Label

Description The font type for posting the first field of annotation.
Macro Parameter FONT1
Options
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN
Digits Right of Decimal - First Label

Description The number of digits right of decimal to post for the first field of
annotation.
Macro Parameter NUMDEC1
Data Type I
Default Value 0

Location of the First Label

Description The location for posting the first field of annotation relative to the
symbol.
Macro Parameter LOCATE1
Options
ABOVE = Above the top symbol
BELOW = Below the top symbol
RIGHT = Right of the top symbol
LEFT = Left of the top symbol
CENTERED = At the well location. Normally, this is used only when no
symbol is posted.
Data Type C*8

Default Value ABOVE
Size of the First Label

Description The size for posting the first field of annotation, in plotter units (in
or cm).
Macro Parameter LBLSIZE1
Data Type R
Color of the Second Label

Description The color index for posting the second field of annotation.
Macro Parameter LBLCLR2
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 5

Font of the Second Label

Description The font type for posting the second field of annotation.
Macro Parameter FONT2
Options
PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN
Digits Right of Decimal - Second Label

Description The number of digits right of decimal to post for the second field of
annotation.
Macro Parameter NUMDEC2
Data Type I
Default Value 0
Location of the Second Label

Description The location for posting the second field of annotation relative to
the symbol.
Macro Parameter LOCATE2
Options
ABOVE = Above the top symbol
BELOW = Below the top symbol
RIGHT = Right of the top symbol
LEFT = Left of the top symbol
CENTERED = At the well location. Normally, this is used only when no
symbol is posted.
Data Type C*8

Default Value ABOVE

Size of the Second Label

Description The size for posting the second field of annotation, in plotter units
(in or cm).
Macro Parameter LBLSIZE2
Data Type R
ZCL PROCESSES
POST DATA NEW

CHANGE-MFD-NAME
Macro Name CHANGE-MFD-NAME
Menu Option Macros Utilities Change Internal MFD Name
Purpose The CHANGE-MFD-NAME macro changes the internal name of an

MFD. The internal name is assigned when the MFD is created and is
usually the same as the MFD name.
Z-MAP Plus displays the MFD internal name in all dialog boxes that
refer to MFDs. If you change the disk file name, change the internal
name to match.
Description You are asked to specify these input values:

MFD to change
new internal name for the MFD
Results The internal name for the selected MFD is changed.

*Enter the MFD for Changing
Description Disk file name of the MFD.
Macro Parameter MFDNAME
Data Type C*80
*Enter the New Internal Name for the MFD

Description New internal name for MFD.
Macro Parameter HEADER
Data Type C*24
ZCL PROCESSES
RENAME MFD
R2003.12.0 CHANGE-MFD-NAME 49
CLEAN
Macro Name CLEAN
Menu Option
Purpose Run the CLEAN macro if you execute the SURFCORRECT macro or
ENVELOPE macro and experience a mid-stream Abnormal
Termination. The CLEAN macro cleans up the system files and
SCRATCH MFD member files left after the unsuccessful execution
attemptso you have a clean start for the next execution attempt.
Description
Results
R2003.12.0 CLEAN 50
COLOR-BAR
Macro Name COLOR-BAR
Menu Option Features Contouring Color Scale
Purpose The COLOR-BAR macro draws a color scale relating a series of color
indices to a variation in some quantity. This macro is used primarily for
placing a color scale bar on a map with color-filled contours, but you
can show almost any quantity variation in this way.
Much of the information needed is also used in the CONTOURNEW
process in ZCL.
To use this macro, you must have a graphics file and a picture attached
in Z-MAP Plus. To see the resulting color bar, select View Full
Display in the Z-MAP Plus window.
Description You are asked to make these specifications:

file providing the data range
field number providing data range (optional)
information about contour intervals, number of contours, and
contour minimum and contour maximum
color bar and color-fill information
line color information (optional)
contour labeling information (optional)
Results A color scale bar appears in the currently displayed picture.
R2003.12.0 COLOR-BAR 51
COLOR-BAR: Parameters
PROMPT AND PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Name of Input File Providing Data Range
Description Name of the input file providing data range. If blank, data range
comes from SURFZMIN and SURFZMAX.
Data Type C*24
Range All attached files of type DATA, FALT, VERT, or GRID
o
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Field Containing Range Data

Description Field on the input file providing data range. If blank, data range
comes from SURFZMIN and SURFZMAX.
Macro Parameter FIELD
Data Type I
Draw Contours on Output Picture

Description Specify whether or not to draw contours on the picture.
Macro Parameter POSTCNTR
Options
POST = Draw the contours on the picture.
OMIT = Do not draw the contours on the picture.
Data Type C*4

Default Value POST
R2003.12.0 COLOR-BAR: Parameters 52

Number of Contour Levels to Draw

Description Number of basic contour levels to draw.
Macro Parameter NCONTOUR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Minimum Contour Level

Description Lowest contour level to draw, which is always the first contour
drawn.
Macro Parameter CONMIN
Data Type R
Maximum Contour Level

Description Highest contour level to draw, which is always the most recent
contour drawn.
Macro Parameter CONMAX
Data Type R
Contour Interval
Description Interval between successive contours.
Macro Parameter CONINT
Data Type R
Minimum Color Bar Range Value

Description Minimum value to show in the color bar.
Macro Parameter SURFZMIN
Data Type R

Maximum Color Bar Range Value

Description Maximum value to show in the color bar.
Macro Parameter SURFZMAX
Data Type R
Color Bar Location

Description Specify placement of color bar relative to the map.
Macro Parameter COLORBAR
Options
LEFT = Left of map
RIGHT = Right of map
ABOVE = Above the map
BELOW = Below the map
USER = According to user-defined coordinates
Data Type C*8

Default Value LEFT
Color Bar X Minimum Plot Coordinate

Description Minimum x coordinate of the color bar, in plotter units (in or cm).
Used when COLORBAR = USER.
Macro Parameter XMINBAR
Data Type R
Color Bar X Maximum Plot Coordinate

Description Maximum x coordinate of the color bar, in plotter units (in or cm).
Macro Parameter XMAXBAR
Data Type R

Color Bar Y Minimum Plot Coordinate

Description Minimum y coordinate of the color bar, in plotter units (in or cm).
Macro Parameter YMINBAR
Data Type R
Color Bar Y Maximum Plot Coordinate

Description Maximum y coordinate of the window, in plotter units (in or cm).
Macro Parameter YMAXBAR
Data Type R
First Color Index of First Area

Description Specify the starting color index number. The first contour fill
appears in this color.
Macro Parameter FILLCOLR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 56
How Often to Bump Fill Color

Description Rate at which the contour colorfill color index is changed.
Macro Parameter FILLRATE
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1

Colorfill Below Lowest Contour

Description Specify whether or not to colorfill below the lowest contour.
Macro Parameter FILBELOW
Options
YES = Colorfill below the minimum contour

NO = Stop colorfilling at minimum contour
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
Colorfill Above Highest Contour

Description Specify whether or not to colorfill above the highest contour.
Macro Parameter FILABOVE
Options
YES = Colorfill above the maximum contour.

NO = Stop colorfilling at maximum contour
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
Rate at Which to Label Contours

Description Rate at which the contours are labeled.
Macro Parameter LABLRATE
Data Type I
Default Value 1

Contour Line Color Selection Method

Description Specify the method for changing contour colors. The method
chosen controls the meaning of the LINERATE parameter.
Macro Parameter LINCLRTP
Options
HIGHLIGHT = Every LINERATE-th contour is colored in the HILTCOLR
color with all other contours being colored in the
STARTCLR color.
INCREMENT = For every LINERATE-th contour, the color of the contour is
changed to the next color in the color table.
Data Type C*12

Default Value HIGHLIGHT
Color Index of First Contour Line

Description Specify the starting color index number. The first contour appears
in this color.
Macro Parameter STARTCLR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 4
Color Index of Highlighted Contour Line

Description If LINCLRTP = HIGHLIGHT, then every LINERATE-th contour is
colored in the HILTCOLR color with all other contours being
colored in the STARTCLR.
Macro Parameter HILTCOLR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 3

Rate to Bump the Color Index

colored in the STARTCLR. If LINCLRTP = INCREMENT, every
LINERATE-th contour the color is changed to the next color in the
color table.
Macro Parameter LINERATE
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1
Label: Number of Digits After the Decimal

Description Specify how many decimal places in the label.
Data Type I
Default Value 0
Plot Size of All Contour Labels

Description Height of the contour label characters, in plotter units (in or cm).
Macro Parameter LABLSIZE
Data Type R
Color of All Contour Labels

Description Color index specifying color of all contour labels.
Macro Parameter LABLCOLR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 9

Contour Label Scaling Factor

Description Specify scaling factor of the contour label. Value of the label is
(LABLSCLE)*(contour level value) + LABLBIAS.
Macro Parameter LABLSCLE
Data Type R
Default Value 1.0
Contour Label Bias

Description Bias value of the contour label.
Macro Parameter LABLBIAS
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0
ZCL PROCESSES
COLORBAR

COLOR-CONTOURS
Macro Name COLOR-CONTOURS
Menu Option Macros Graphics Color-filled Contours
Purpose Use the COLOR-CONTOURS macro to put color-filled contours and a

color bar on the current map, and to change the color of the contours on
the map. The macro uses the Profile Contouring algorithm with the
PROFILE option, indicating that the grid and profile datasets were
probably created using Point Gridding Plus. You can clip contours
either inside or outside of a polygon.

a GRID dataset from Point Gridding Plus
a PROFILE dataset from Point Gridding Plus
a POLYGON dataset to restrict contouring (optional)
whether to clip inside or outside of polygons (only requested if a
polygon file is input)
information about contour interval, number of contours, contour
minimum and contour maximum (optional)
color-fill and color bar information
Results A contour map is generated that meets your specifications.
R2003.12.0 COLOR-CONTOURS 60
COLOR-CONTOURS: Parameters

*Input Grid Name
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the Input Grid
Description The MFD that contains the input grid file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Name of the Profile File

Description Name of the input profile file, which contains z values that mark
gradient discontinuity.
Macro Parameter PROFILES
Data Type C*24
oMFD for the Input Profiles

Description The MFD that contains the input profile file.
Macro Parameter MFDPROF
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 COLOR-CONTOURS: Parameters 61

Contouring Refinement
Description Specify the smoothness of the contour line. All contours are made
up of a series of connected straight lines. The longer these lines, the
rougher (coarser) the contour looks.
Macro Parameter SMOOTH
Options
COARSEST = Coarsest point spacing along curves. Approximately one grid
interval.
COARSE = Coarse point spacing along curves. Approximately1/2 the grid
interval.
MEDIUM = Medium point spacing along curves. Approximately 1/4 the
grid interval.
FINE = Fine point spacing along curves. Approximately 1/8 the grid
interval.
VERY FINE = Very fine point spacing along curves. Approximately 1/16 the
grid interval.
Data Type C*12

Default Value MEDIUM
Contour Interval or Increment

Description Interval between successive contours. If the number of contours to
be drawn is specified, this parameter should be left blank.
Data Type R
Default Value ZCL default computed from input data

Description Lowest contour level to be drawn, which is always the first contour
drawn.
Data Type R


Description Highest contour level to be drawn, which is always the most recent
contour drawn.
Data Type R
Number of Contours to be Drawn

Description Specify the number of contour levels. If the contour interval is
specified, this parameter should be left blank. If the contour interval
is not specified, then either the range between CONMAX and
CONMIN or the entire grid MIN and MAX range is used to derive
the number of contours to be placed on the map.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 50
Rate at which to Label Contours

Description Labeling rate. Enter 5 to label every fifth contour; 10 to label every
tenth contour; 16 to label every sixteenth contour, etc.
Data Type I
Default Value 1
Size of the Labels on Contours

Description Height of the character in the contour label, in plotter units.
Data Type R

Contour Label Color Index Number

Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 9
Rate at which Contours are Bold

Description Rate for drawing bold line contours. Enter 5 to bold every fifth
contour; 10 to bold every tenth contour; 16 to bold every sixteenth
contour, etc.
Macro Parameter BOLDRATE
Data Type I
Default Value 0
Rate at which Contours are Hachured

Description Rate for drawing hachured line contours.
Macro Parameter HACHRATE
Data Type I
Default Value 0
Rate at which Contours are Dashed

Description Rate for drawing dashed line contours.
Macro Parameter DASHRATE
Data Type I
Default Value 0


Description Specify the method for determining contour color, thereby
controlling the meaning of the LINERATE parameter.
Options
STARTCLR color.
Data Type C*12


in this color.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 3
Color Index of Highlighted Contour

colored in the STARTCLR color. If LINCLRTP and LINERATE
are defaulted, then all contours use the HILTCOLR color index.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 4

Rate at which to Change Line Color

colored in the STARTCLR. If LINCLRTP = INCREMENT, every
LINERATE-th contour the color is changed to the next color in the
color table.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1
Include Color-filled Contours

Description Specify whether or not the area between contours is color-filled.
Macro Parameter COLORFIL
Options
COLORFILLED = Colorfill between the contours.
NO COLORFILL = Do not colorfill between the contours.
Data Type C*12

Default Value COLORFILLED
Use the Contour Lines to Generate Colorfill

Description Contour lines are used to generate colorfill polygons.
Macro Parameter CNTRFILL
Options
YES = Use the contours to help generate the polygons.
NO = Colorfill polygons are colored by average cell value rather than by
position between contours.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES

Draw Contour Lines on the Picture

Description Specify whether or not to draw the contour lines on the picture.
Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value POST
Color Bar Location (if any)

Description Specify the location of the color bar. Relative positions with regard
to the AOI are automatically positioned in the map offset areas.
Options
NONE = Post no color bar
LEFT = Left of the map
RIGHT = Right of the map
Data Type C*8

Default Value NONE
Color Index of First Fill Color

Description Specify the starting color index for the colorfill.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 56
Rate at which to Change Fill Color

Description Specify the rate at which to change the fill color index.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1


Description Specify whether or not to colorfill below the lowest contour
Options
YES = Colorfill below the lowest contour.
NO = Stop colorfilling at the lowest contour.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES

Options
YES = Colorfill above the highest contour.
NO = Stop colorfilling at the highest contour.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
Name of the Polygon file

Description Name of the input vertex file containing polygons. Contours are
clipped to the input polygon(s) for display.
Macro Parameter POLYGONS
Data Type C*24
oMFD for the Input Polygon File

Description The MFD that contains the input vertex (polygon) file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5

Clip Inside or Outside the Polygon

Description Specify whether or not to clip inside or outside of polygons. Used
when clipping polygon file is specified.
Macro Parameter POLYCLIP
Options
INSIDE = Clip contours inside the polygons.
OUTSIDE = Clip contours outside the polygons.
Data Type C*8

Default Value OUTSIDE
Rate to Blank Contours with High Gradient

Description Rate at which contours are allowed to be gradient blanked in steep
areas. For positive BLNKRATE, every BLNKRATE-th contour is
subject to gradient blanking in steep regions.
Macro Parameter BLNKRATE
Data Type I
Default Value 1
Minimum Allowed Distance for Blanking

Description Minimum allowed distance between contours subject to gradient
blanking, in plotter units (in or cm). Contour trace is not plotted if
the distance between that contour and its neighbors is less than
BLNKDIST.
Macro Parameter BLNKDIST
Data Type R
Range 0.0

Draw the Profile Lines on the Picture

Description Indicate whether or not to draw profile lines on the picture. The
fault profile selected at the beginning of the macro is drawn as a
solid line, using the color index specified for PROFCOLR.
Macro Parameter PLOTPROF
Do not Answer YES Unless You Have Selected Fault Profiles

If fault profiles are not selected and YES is specified here, the job
terminates abnormally and polygons are not posted.
Options
YES = Profile lines are drawn on the picture.
NO = Profile lines are not drawn on the picture.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
Color for the Profile Lines

Description Color index for drawing profile lines.
Macro Parameter PROFCOLR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 14

Draw the Polygon on the Picture

Description Indicate whether or not to draw polygon lines on the picture. These
polygons are used to clip the colorfill and the contours.
Macro Parameter PLOTPOLY
Do Not Answer YES Unless You Have Selected Polygon Files

If polygon files are not selected and YES is specified here, the job
Options
YES = Polygon lines are drawn on the picture.
NO = Polygon lines are not drawn on the picture.
Data Type C*4

Default Value NO
Color for the Polygon

Description Color index for drawing polygon lines.
Macro Parameter POLYCOLR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 16
ZCL PROCESSES
BRANCH POST DATA NEW
CONTOUR NEW

CONTOUR-WNDOW
Macro Name CONTOUR-WINDOW
Menu Option Macros Graphics Windowed Contour Map
Purpose Use the CONTOUR-WINDOW macro to generate a contour map of a

windowed area of a dataset.

a grid file for contouring
a fault file
minimum and maximum rows and columns
color-fill information
information about contour interval, number of contours,
contour minimum and contour maximum (optional)
contour smoothing tolerance
contour labeling information
Results A contour map is generated that meets your specifications.
R2003.12.0 CONTOUR-WNDOW 72
CONTOUR-WNDOW: Parameters

*Enter the File to Contour
Data Type C*24
o
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Enter the Fault File (if any)

Macro Parameter AUXFILE
Data Type C*24
oMFD
for the Fault File
Macro Parameter MFDAUX
Data Type I
Minimum Row for Contouring

Description Top grid row of the windowed region.
Macro Parameter RMINWIN
Data Type I
Default Value 1
R2003.12.0 CONTOUR-WNDOW: Parameters 73

Maximum Row for Contouring

Description Bottom grid row of the windowed region.
Macro Parameter RMAXWIN
Data Type I
Minimum Column for Contouring

Description Minimum grid column (the leftmost column) of the windowed
region.
Macro Parameter CMINWIN
Data Type I
Default Value 1
Maximum Column for Contouring

Description Maximum grid column (the rightmost column) of the windowed
region.
Macro Parameter CMAXWIN
Data Type I
Contour Line Color

Description Initial color index used to display contours.
Macro Parameter LINECLR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 3

Color-fill the Contours

Description Specify whether the area between contours is to be color-filled.
Options
Data Type C*20

Starting Color for Colorfill

Description Specify the starting color index number. The first contour fill
appears in this color.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 56
Minimum Contour Value

Description Lowest contour level to be drawn, which is always the first contour
drawn.
Data Type R
Contour Interval
Data Type R

Maximum Contour Value

Description Highest contour level to be drawn, which is always the most recent
contour drawn.
Data Type R
Contouring Smoothness Tolerance

Description Specify how smooth the contour line is. All contours are made up
of a series of connected straight lines. The longer these lines, the
rougher (coarser) the contour looks.
Macro Parameter TOLER
Options
interval.
grid interval.
interval.
grid interval.
Data Type C*12

Contour Label Size

Description Label size for each contour being generated, in plotter units (in or
cm).
Data Type R
Range 0.001

Contour Labeling Rate

Description Labelling rate. Enter 5 to label every fifth contour; 10 to label every
tenth contour; 16, to label every sixteenth contour, etc.
Data Type I
Range 0
Default Value 1
Contour Bolding Rate

contour; 10 to bold every tenth contour; 16, to bold every sixteenth
contour, etc.
Data Type I
Range 0
Default Value 0
ZCL PROCESSES
CONTOUR

CONTOUR-DMS-DEG
Macro Name CONVERT-DMS-DEG
Menu Option Macros Operations

Convert Lat/Lon (DMS) to Decimal Degrees
Purpose Use the CONVERT-DMS-DEG macro to convert latitude/longitude

coordinates from degrees-minutes-seconds to decimal degrees and vice
versa. This macro executes the DMS TO/FROM DEG process from
ZCL.
The input file to convert can be a file on an attached MFD or it can be
an external ASCII file. If the input file is an ASCII file, then it must be
imported. If the file is imported, you must specify a dictionary file and
format group.
Description Specify these parameters:

origin of the input file
name of the input file on an attached MFD or name of the external
diskfile for the data
name of the dictionary file and format group (if the input file
originates from an external diskfile)
direction of the transformation
name of output latitude field and longitude field
Results An output data file with the transformed latitude/longitude fields.
R2003.12.0 CONTOUR-DMS-DEG 78
CONTOUR-DMS-DEG: Parameters

*Enter Origin of the Input Dataset
Description Specify whether the input dataset comes from a file on an attached
MFD or an external diskfile.
Macro Parameter ORIGIN
Options
MFD = File originates on a currently attached MFD.
DISKFILE = File originates on an external diskfile and must be imported.
Data Type C*8

Specify the Transformation Direction

Description Direction to transform the latitude/longitude coordinates.
Macro Parameter DIRECT
Options
DEG TO DMS = Convert floating point latitude/longitude to integer degrees,
minutes, and seconds.
DMS TO DEG = Convert integer degrees, minutes, seconds to floating point
latitude/ longitude.
Data Type C*12

Default Value DEG TO DMS
R2003.12.0 CONTOUR-DMS-DEG: Parameters 79

Enter Name of the Input File

Description Name of the input file to transform.
Data Type C*24
Range All attached DATA, CNTR, FALT, and VERT files
o
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Enter External Diskfile with Input Dataset

Description Name of the external diskfile for the data to be transformed.
Macro Parameter DISKFILE
Data Type C*80
Name of the Dictionary File

Description Name of the external dictionary file for the format group used to
describe the input file. If none is specified, the information is
assumed to be in the external diskfile.
Macro Parameter DICTNARY
Data Type C*80
Format Group Describing Input Dataset

Description Name of the format group in the dictionary file to be used to
describe the input file.
Macro Parameter GROUP
Data Type C*40

Name of the Output File

Description Name of the output file; output file is same file type as input file.
Macro Parameter FILEOUT
Data Type C*24
MFD of the Output File

Description The MFD that contains the output file.
Macro Parameter MFOUT
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Enter Name of the Output Latitude Field

Description Name of the latitude field on the output file.
Macro Parameter LATFLDNM
Data Type C*20
Default Value LATITUDE
Enter Name of the Output Longitude Field

Description Name of the longitude field on the output file.
Macro Parameter LONFLDNM
Data Type C*20
Default Value LATITUDE
ZCL PROCESSES
BRANCH DATA STATISTICS
DELETE FILE DMS TO FROM DEG
IMPORT

DATA-BLANK
Macro Name DATA-BLANK
Menu Option Macros Operations Data Blanking (Multiple Polygons)
Purpose Using one of the z fields on the selected data file, this macro blanks
data in all polygons in the input vertex file. The DATA-BLANK macro
is a workaround for the Blank Data process (Operations Data
Operations Blank Data in Z-MAP Plus) that only blanks data by
using the first polygon in the vertex file.
Using this technique, a flat grid is built of all ones, and the grid is then
blanked. It then back interpolates a new field from that grid, and
multiplies the field to be blanked by the new field. Because of this
approach, you need to provide a grid increment that creates at least a
250 by 250 grid over the area of the data. One more field called
MULTIPLIER is added to the output file.
If you have a lot of data close to the polygon lines, you can control
precision by reducing the grid increment to create a 600 x 600 grid or
more.

file that contains the field you wish to blank
z field to blank
vertex file that is to be used for blanking
grid increment
name of the output file and where to store it
Results Data blanking of the selected z field inside all polygons on the input
vertex file.
For example:
X X X O
X X
X X O O
X O
X X X X O X O O
X X X X X X
X = Defined Value
O = Null Data Value
Defined Values are Replaced by Nulls in Two Polygons
R2003.12.0 DATA-BLANK 82
DATA-BLANK: Parameters

*Select File with Field to Blank
Description Name of the input control point (DATA) or deviated well (DWEL)
file.
Data Type C*24
Range All attached DATA and DWEL files
o
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
*Which Z Field Do You Want Blanked

Description Field number of the data in the control point file that you want to
blank. You cannot use a character field.
Data Type I
*Select Vertex File to Use for Blanking

Description Name of the vertex file for the polygons.
Macro Parameter VERTICES
Data Type C*24
R2003.12.0 DATA-BLANK: Parameters 83

DATA-BLANK: Parameters
o
MFD for the Vertex File
Description MFD that contains the vertex file.
Macro Parameter MFDVERT
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Grid Increment (Make at Least 250 x 250 Grid)

Description The x and y increment for grid.
Macro Parameter GINC
Data Type R
Default Value 1
Name of the Output Data File

Description Name of the output file.
Data Type C*24
Default Value BLANKED DATA
MFD of the Output Data File

Description MFD that contains the output file.
Range 0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
DATA BLOCK BLANK GRID
FILESTATISTICS DATA STATISTICS
DATABLOCL UTILITY EVALUATE
BACK INTERPOLATE DUAL DATA OPS
DELETE FILE
R2003.12.0 DATA-BLANK: Parameters 84

DATA-ENUMERATION
Macro Name DATA-ENUMERATION
Menu Option Macros Utilities Segment ID Generator
Purpose The DATA-ENUMERATION macro counts records and as a result can

build a Segment I.D. field from an input dataset (such as a well dataset)
that has random records. As it builds the Segment I.D. field, the macro
assigns a different value to each record, starting with 1 and increasing
sequentially. A new record is detected when the value in the key field
changes from the previous value.
You can identify a record number by its sequence in the file. The output
field type is always 35 and, in this macros output, it is always named
CHANGE VALUE SEG ID and appended onto the input dataset as the
last field in the output dataset.

the data file for which you wish to create a Segment I.D. field
the key field on which to sort
the name of the output file and MFD to store it
Results A dataset containing a Segment I.D. field which is built from an input
dataset having random records.
In the following example, the key field is Top 1.
CHANGE
X (EASTING) Y (NORTHING) TOP 1 VALUE SEG ID
49800.000 207600.00 9999.0000 1.0000000

49900.000 207400.00 9999.0000 1.0000000
49800.000 208200.00 9999.0000 1.0000000
49300.000 208300.00 8566.2002 2.0000000
49600.000 208200.00 9999.0000 3.0000000
49500.000 208400.00 8499.9004 4.0000000
49400.000 207900.02 8187.3999 5.0000000
49500.000 208100.00 9999.0000 6.0000000
49500.000 207800.00 9999.0000 6.0000000
49200.000 208000.00 8414.5000 7.0000000
R2003.12.0 DATA-ENUMERATION 85
DATA-ENUMERATION: Parameters

*Enter the File to Number
Description Name of the input file to enumerate.
Data Type C*24
Range All attached files except GRID files
o
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
*Enter the Key Field

Description The field to base the enumeration process on.
Macro Parameter FIELDIN
Data Type I
Output File Is
Description Enter the name of the output data file.
Data Type C*24

Description The MFD to use for storing the output file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 DATA-ENUMERATION: Parameters 86

DATA-ENUMERATION: Parameters
The New Field Name for the SEG ID Type Field

Description Name for the new Segment I.D. field added to the output file.
Macro Parameter FLSNUM
Data Type C*20
Default Value CHANGE VALUE SEG ID
ZCL PROCESSES
DATA ENUMERATION
R2003.12.0 DATA-ENUMERATION: Parameters 87

DATA-HISTORY
Macro Name DATA-HISTORY
Menu Option Macros Utilities Data File History
Purpose Use the DATA-HISTORY macro to print the history of a selected file to
the monitor.
Description You are asked to select the data or grid file for which the history is
requested.
Results The history of the selected dataset is printed to the screen.
For example:
DATA FILE: ANTICLINE SEISMIC
CREATED: 19 MAY 92
AT: 17:23
! DATA FILE: ANTICLINE SEISMIC

! CREATED: 19 MAY 92
! AT: 17:23
SINGLE DATA OPS: ! EXTENDED HISTORY OUTPUT,

DATAIN =BIASED ANTICLINE , MFDIN = 0, ! DATAIMFD =
!SCRATCH FILE,
DATAOUT =ANTICLINE SEISMIC , MFDOUT = 1, ! DATAOMFD =
!ANTICLINE.MFD,
INFLD = 4,! INFLDNAM =Y-FIELD ,
OUTFLD = 4, FLDNAME =Y-FIELD ,
OPNAME =BIAS , PARAM = -0.23100E+08,
ZNON = 0.10000E+31 / 91.11
! DATA FILE: BIASED ANTICLINE

! GENERATION: 1 CREATED: 19 MAY 92
! AT: 17:23
SINGLE DATA OPS: ! EXTENDED HISTORY OUTPUT,
DATAIN =ANTICLINE SEIS , MFDIN = 0, ! DATAIMFD =
!SCRATCH FILE,
DATAOUT = BIASED ANTICLINE , MFDOUT = 1, ! DATAOMFD =
!SCRATCH FILE,
INFLD = 3,! INFLDNAM = X-FIELD ,
OUTFLD = 3, FLDNAME = X-FIELD ,
OPNAME = BIAS , PARAM = -0.17000E+07,
ZNON = 0.10000E+31 / 91.11
R2003.12.0 DATA-HISTORY 88
DATA-HISTORY: Parameters
PROMPT and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

Enter the File for the History
Description Name of the file whose history you want to view.
Macro Parameter DATA
Data Type C*24
Range All attached DATA and GRID files
o
Description The MFD the input file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
FILE HISTORY
R2003.12.0 DATA-HISTORY: Parameters 89

DATA-PROFILES
Macro Name DATA-PROFILES
Menu Option Macros Graphics Dataset Profile Generator
Purpose Use the DATA-PROFILES macro to generate profiles along all lines of
a dataset that have a line I.D. field (such as a z or Seg I.D. field). The
profiles are of a z field in the file and are for display on a map. The
profiles look similar to a well log trace, where the line is the bore hole
and the profile is the log trace.
In a typical application, you might save the cross-section profile data in
the Cross Section task and post the profiles along the cross-section
baseline to show elevation above and below a datum (the baseline
used). You might do the same thing along a single seismic line to see a
side-on view of the seismic line as digitized for an event along the
geographic location of the line. In another example, you might generate
profiles along centerline fault traces.
The input file contains x, y, z (for the profile), and an I.D. field. The I.D.
field may be of any field type, but consecutive points in the same line
must have the same value in this field.
You can control:
the z value at the baseline
whether z values higher than the baseline value are positioned to
the right or the left of the line
whether the polygons for shade represent the area above (higher)
or below (lower values) the baseline value
a scaling factor to control the distance of the profile from the
baseline
R2003.12.0 DATA-PROFILES 90
DATA-PROFILES

the x, y, z and I.D. fields
maximum shift from the line
z value positioned on the baseline
direction in which high values are deviated
shading information
name of the output fault file and where to store it
name of the output vertex file and where to store it
method for drawing the data profiles on the map
profile line color and fill color
Results Two files are created: a fault file and a vertex file. The fault file
represents the profile both above and below the baseline. The vertex file
is used to create shading that represents the area between the baseline
and the profile (either above or below). Profiles can be added to the
current picture, but they are optional.

*Name of the Input Data or Vertex File
Description Name of the file to obtain statistics for.
Data Type C*24
Range All attached DATA, VERT, FALT, XSEC, SSEC, WLOG,
DWEL, and CNTR files
oMFD for the Input Data

Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 DATA-PROFILES 91
DATA-PROFILES: Parameters
Select the X-Field

Description The X (Easting) field of the dataset.
Macro Parameter XFLD
Data Type I
Range All fields of type 1, X (Easting)
Default Value ZCL default first field of appropriate type
Select the Y-Field

Description The Y (Northing) field of the dataset.
Macro Parameter YFLD
Data Type I
Range All fields of type 2, Y (Northing)
Select the I.D. Field

Description The field that identifies the line. The I.D. field may be of any field
type, but consecutive points in the same line must have the same
value in this field.
This parameter identifies the baseline about which the attribute
profile is going to be drawn. When a seismic file is used as input,
this would be the line name field.
Macro Parameter IDFLD
Data Type I
Range All fields on the input dataset
Select the Z-Field

Description The z field to be profiled.
Macro Parameter ZFLD
Data Type I
Range All fields of type 3, Z Value
R2003.12.0 DATA-PROFILES: Parameters 92

Maximum Shift from the Line-? x Map Diagonal

Description The value to scale the z field for inclusion on the x,y plane. This
number multiplied by the diagonal distance across the input file
AOI is the mapped maximum shift (in scaled map units) from the
baseline to display the profile in map view.
Macro Parameter SCALE
Data Type R
Default Value 0.03
Z-Value Positioned on the Baseline

Description The value of the z field positioned on the seismic line (baseline)
being profiled. You can control how the profile crosses the line of
section (baseline) with this parameter. For example, where z values
= 200 to 300, BASEVAL = 250; some profiles fall above the
baseline and some fall below the baseline.
Macro Parameter BASEVAL
Data Type R
Default Value 0
Which Direction are High Values Deviated

Description Indicate whether to deviate high values to the left or the right, as
you walk in the direction of the baseline being profiled.
Macro Parameter HIGHDEV
Options
RIGHT = Right of the line as drawn from first to last SP (or first to last
sequential point)
LEFT = Left of the line as drawn from first to last SP (or first to last
sequential point)
Data Type C*8

Default Value RIGHT

Shade Above or Below the Baseline Value

Description Indicate whether to shade above or below the baseline value.
Macro Parameter SHADE
Options
ABOVE = Shade the area with z values greater than the base value.
BELOW = Shade the area with z values less than the base value.
Data Type C*8

Default Value ABOVE
*Name of the Output Fault File

Description The FALT type file containing the profile line reflected in the x, y
plane for addition to your picture.
Macro Parameter FAULTOUT
Data Type C*24
MFD of the Output Fault File

Description The MFD to use for storing the output fault file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
*Name of the Output Vertex File

Description The VERT type file containing the shading polygons on the x,y
plane for addition to your picture.
Macro Parameter VERTOUT
Data Type C*24

MFD of the Output Vertex File

Description The MFD to use for storing the output vertex file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Type of Drawing to Current Map

Description Indicate which of the Data Profile features is to be drawn on the
map.
Macro Parameter DRAW
Options
NONE = Draw no features on the map.
LINE+FILL = Draw only the profile and shading on the map.
Shading uses the COLOR-FILLED POLYGONS
feature (LGB) type.
SEISMIC+LINE+FILL = Draw the profile, shading and seismic lines on the
map. This option performs simple baseline posting
of the profile tracks across your map. It is added to
the picture as a SEISMIC LINES feature (LGB)
type.
Data Type C*20

Default Value SEISMIC+LINE+FILL
Color of the Profile Line

Description Color index for drawing the profile lines.
Macro Parameter LINECOLR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 25

Color to Fill Above (Below) the Base

Description Color index for colorfilling the shaded polygons.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 27
ZCL PROCESSES
DATA BLOCK FILE STATISTICS
BRANCH FILE CONVERSION
FILE UTILITY DATA ENUMERATION
SINGLE DATA OPS DATA STATISTICS
FAULT PROFILING POST DATA NEW
COLOR POLYGONS POST SEISMIC
DELETE FILE

DATA-SUMMARY
Macro Name DATA-SUMMARY
Menu Option Macros Utilities Data File Summary
Purpose Use the DATA-SUMMARY macro to display a list of all member files
of the type DATA, GRID, FALT, VERT, CNTR, or TEXT in the
attached MFDs. Files are sorted by type. The file list appears on the
monitor.
Description All attached MFDs are used as input.
For Z-MAP Plus Users

No parameter panels are used in executing this macro.
Results A list of all files on the attached MFDs sorted by type. See the
following example.
R2003.12.0 DATA-SUMMARY 97
DATA-SUMMARY: Results
For example:
****** PROCESS SHOWFILES USE 5538 ******
CONTENTS OF DIRECTORY:
NAME TYPE MASTER FILE SIZE
CoordTrans5-3 DATA ARGENTINA.MFD 5

DRAKE SEISMIC TIMES DATA DRAKE.MFD 6
seismic with 352 names DATA DRAKE.MFD 131
REEF DATA DATA DRAKE.MFD 8
mara test 1 DATA DRAKE.MFD 7
MASTER FILE - ARGENTINA.MFD
RECORDS ALLOCATED 312 RELEASED 0 TOTAL USED 312
MASTER FILE - DRAKE.MFD
TOTAL MEMBER FILES LISTED 5
****** PROCESS SHOWFILES USE 5539 ******
CONTENTS OF DIRECTORY:
NAME TYPE MASTER FILE SIZE
G/TIME HORZ R GRID DRAKE.MFD 14

G/TIME HORZ R V-02 GRID DRAKE.MFD 14
bad G/G/TIME HORZ R GRID DRAKE.MFD 13
REEF - NO SLOPES GRID DRAKE.MFD 7
MASTER FILE - DRAKE.MFD
TOTAL MEMBER FILES LISTED 7
ZCL PROCESSES
SHOW FILES
R2003.12.0 DATA-SUMMARY: Results 98

DEBUG-SIL-TOGGLE
Macro Name DEBUG-SIL-TOGGLE
Menu Option Tools SIL Debug Print Switch
Purpose Use the DEBUG-SIL-TOGGLE macro to toggle on or off the SIL

debug flag.
Description When you start Z-MAP Plus, the SIL debug switch is off. If the SIL
debug switch is off, running the macro turns it on, and if the SIL debug
switch is on, running the macro turns it off. When on, each SIL module
prints its input and output parameters. This information is useful when
debugging. This macro has no parameters.
Results Changes the status of the SIL debug flag.
R2003.12.0 DEBUG-SIL-TOGGLE 99
DIP-PLOT-DATA
Macro Name DIP-PLOT-DATA
Menu Option Macros Graphics Dip Vector Map (from Data)
Purpose Use the DIP-PLOT-DATA macro to produce an arrow on a map that

points in the direction of dip or gradient. Vector arrows can be varied in
color according to their magnitude values.
Description If the data is in gradients, the dataset must contain DZ/DX and DZ/DY
fields. If the data is in radians or degrees, the dataset must contain Dip
Angle and Dip Azimuth Angle fields.
Creating the Required Fields

You can create the following required fields: DZ/DX, DZ/DY or Dip Angle
and Dip Azimuth Angle. Create the required fields by back interpolating the
corresponding grids before executing this macro.
A major benefit of this macro is the graphical representation of all dip

angles within an area of interest. Color variation options allow users to
make quick comparisons of magnitude in the gradients within an area.
R2003.12.0 DIP-PLOT-DATA 100

DIP-PLOT-DATA
Results When this macro executes, it positions dip vectors at each control point
location on the current picture. You must re-open the picture to see
your results.
Dip Plot Vectors at Control Point Locations

The direction of the vectors in the picture above shows the azimuth of
the dip, while the length of the vectors shows the magnitude of the dip.
R2003.12.0 DIP-PLOT-DATA 101

DIP-PLOT-DATA: Parameters

Input Data for Dip Vectors
Description The input data file that already contains the necessary Dip and
Azimuth or gradient fields.
Data Type C *24
o
MFD Number for the Input File
Description The MFD that contains the input data file.
Macro Parameter MFDDATA
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Data Units
Description Specify how the dip angle is measured or select gradient option.
Macro Parameter DEGORRAD
Options
DEGREES
RADIANS
GRADIENT
Data Type C*8

Default Value RADIANS
Clip Vectors at Border

Description Clip vectors against the AOI border.
Macro Parameter CLIP
Options
NO CLIP VECTOR = Vectors appear beyond the map border.
CLIP VECTOR = Vectors stop at the map border.
Data Type C*16

Default Value NO CLIP VECTOR
R2003.12.0 DIP-PLOT-DATA: Parameters 102

Post Symbol if Length Is Less Than Minimum

Description You may post a symbol at locations with dip magnitudes resolving
to less than a specified minimum arrow length.
Macro Parameter POST
Options
POST = Draw a symbol where dip magnitudes resolve to less than the
minimum arrow length.
OMIT = Do not draw a symbol where dip magnitudes resolve to less than the
Data Type C*4

Default Value OMIT
Symbol Number (if posting)

Description Symbol to post at less than specified minimum arrow.
Data Type I
Default Value 14
Minimum Arrow Length

Description Minimum allowed dip vector arrow length, in plotter units (in or
cm).
Macro Parameter MINARROW
Data Type R
Range 0.01 through 10.in or 0.0 through 25.5 cm
Maximum Arrow Length

Description Maximum allowed dip vector arrow length, in plotter units (in or
cm).
Macro Parameter MAXARROW
Data Type R
Range 0.05 through 20.0 in or 0.15 through 50.8 cm

Color Mode
Description Specify if the plot is to be color coded based on dip magnitude.
Macro Parameter COLORMOD
Options
NO COLOR CODE = Variations in magnitude are not reflected in dip vector
colors.
COLOR CODE = Variations in magnitude result in different color
vectors.
Data Type C*16

Default Value COLOR CODE
Number of Color Levels

Description If the COLOR CODE option was selected, you must enter the
number of color levels to be used.
Macro Parameter COLORNUM
Data Type I
Range 1 through 6
Default Value 4
Start Color
Description The starting color index value must be entered when the Color
Code option is selected. Z-MAP Plus users can click on the palette
to view the attached color table.
Macro Parameter START
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 17
ZCL PROCESSES
DIP VECTOR PLOT

DIP-PLOT-GRID
Macro Name DIP-PLOT-GRID
Menu Option Macros Graphics Dip Vector Map (from Grid)
Purpose Use the DIP-PLOT-GRID macro to add dip vectors at grid locations to
a plot. A major benefit of this process is the graphical representation of
all dip angles in an area of interest. Color variation options enable you
to quickly compare gradient magnitudes in an area.
Area of Interest Must be Exactly the Same

To use DIP-PLOT-GRID, the AOI of the picture and the grid must be exactly
the same. This is true because the vectors used to plot the picture are based on
vectors generated from the grid. If your picture and grid do not have the same
AOI, you can make a picture specifically for the dip plots and then overlay
this onto the picture that does not have the correct AOI.
Description This macro makes use of five ZCL processes:

Single Grid Ops to create the Dip Magnitude grid
Single Grid Ops to create the Dip Azimuth grid
Dip Vector Plot to add the vectors to the plot
Delete File to delete the Dip Magnitude grid
Delete File to delete the Dip Azimuth grid
Transparent to users, the Dip Magnitude and Dip Azimuth grids are
input to the Dip Plot Vector process and then deleted.
R2003.12.0 DIP-PLOT-GRID 105

DIP-PLOT-GRID: Results
Results Dip vectors at each grid node on the current picture. You must re-open
the picture to view the results of this macro.
Dip Plot Vectors on Posted Grid Nodes

The direction of the vectors in the picture above shows the azimuth of
the dip, while the length of the vectors shows the magnitude of the dip.
Clusters of longer vectors indicate location of pinnacle reefs.
R2003.12.0 DIP-PLOT-GRID: Results 106

DIP-PLOT-GRID: Parameters

Input Grid
Description Input grid file for computing dip directions and dip magnitudes.
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the First Grid
Description The MFD that contains the input magnitude grid (GRIDIN).
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Clip Vectors at Border

Description Specification for whether vectors are clipped against the AOI
border.
Macro Parameter CLIPVECT
Options
NO CLIP VECTOR = Vectors appear beyond the map border.
CLIP VECTOR = Vectors stop at the map border.
Data Type C*16

Default Value NO CLIP VECTOR
Post a Symbol
Description Specification for posting a symbol at grid locations with values less
than the specified minimum.
Macro Parameter POST
Options
POST = Draw a symbol where dip magnitudes resolve to less than the
OMIT = Do not draw a symbol where dip magnitudes resolve to less than
the minimum arrow length.
Data Type C*4

Default Value POST
R2003.12.0 DIP-PLOT-GRID: Parameters 107

Symbol Number (if posting)

Description Symbol to post at points with values less than the specified
minimum value.
Data Type I
Default Value 14
Minimum Arrow Length

Description Minimum allowed dip vector arrow length, in plotter units (in
or cm).
Macro Parameter MINARROW
Data Type R
Range 0.01 through 10.in or 0.0 through 25.5 cm
Maximum Arrow Length

Description Maximum allowed dip vector arrow length, in plotter units (in
or cm).
Macro Parameter MAXARROW
Data Type R
Maximum Dip Magnitude

Description Upper limit for dip magnitude. All magnitudes above this value are
equated to the maximum arrow length.
Macro Parameter MAGNITUD
Data Type R
Default Value ZCL default the maximum z value of the dip magnitude grid
created

Color Mode
Description Specify if the plot is to be color coded based on dip magnitude.
Macro Parameter COLORMOD
Options
NO COLOR CODE = Variations in magnitude are not reflected in dip vector
colors.
COLOR CODE = Variations in magnitude result in different color
vectors.
Data Type C*16

Default Value COLOR CODE
Number of Color Levels

Description Enter the number of color levels to use.
Macro Parameter COLORNUM
Data Type I
Range 1 through 6
Default Value 4
Start Color
Description The starting color index value must be entered when the Color
Code option is selected. To view the attached color table, click the
color box next to the parameter box.
Macro Parameter START
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 56
ZNON or Null Value

Description Specify the null data value associated with the grid.
Macro Parameter ZNON
ZCL PROCESSES
SINGLE GRID OPS
DIP VECTOR PLOT
DELETE FILE

ENVELOPE
Macro Name ENVELOPE
Menu Option CARM Reservoir Envelope Volumetrics
Purpose The purpose of this macro is to produce net hydrocarbon pore thickness
grids and to perform quick, visual, reportable results for HC
volumetrics for a prospect or field.
Description The macro analyzes a two phase reservoir system using basic grid file
and numerical input. Quick turnaround and accurate results make this
workflow ideal for use in sensitivity analysis.
Results The output of the macro consists of a montaged picture for each phase
that shows these elements:
a Gross Rock Volume Isochore for each HC zone that can display
unconformities
a Net Hydrocarbon Volume Isochore posted with information as in
the map described above
a map with the primary polygon Net HC Volumes Posted, with
units
a map with the secondary polygon Net HC Volumes Posted, with
units
Additionally, all pertinent data files made in modeling and
evaluation steps are saved to an attached MFD and can be assigned
a unique numerical suffix ID.
R2003.12.0 ENVELOPE 110

ENVELOPE: Summary
Summary of the ENVELOPE Macro

The ENVELOPE macro is designed for production geologists.
Z-MAP Plus has historically had two main uses: creating quality base
maps, and assessing hydrocarbon in place using the Volumetrics
application tools.
You should be well versed in the use of the product to get the most out
of the two applications mentioned above. By offering the ENVELOPE
and the SURFCORRECT macro applications, we hope to provide you,
as the production geologist, with two extremely valuable, encapsulated
workflows. These workflows will help speed up productivity, especially
in performing the ongoing update of hydrocarbons in place in a
reservoir that is being actively developed.
The typical scenario is that a reservoir with several zones of production
is being drilled. There will be structural control for the underground
form of the reservoir and usually, but not always, grids for the gross
unit top and base of production. Alternatively, there could only be a
gross hydrocarbon isochore available for a particular phase of
production. In either case, you can use the ENVELOPE macro to
evaluate the hydrocarbons in place (HIP).
R2003.12.0 ENVELOPE: Summary 111

ENVELOPE: Summary
Understanding the ENVELOPE Macro

A typical execution of the ENVELOPE macro, requires that you have:
A Z-MAP Plus grid that is tied to an existing well control for the
top of the producing system
A Z-MAP Plus grid that is tied to an existing well control for the
structure base
Information from well log analysis that pinpoints the common
OWC (oil/water contact) and GOC (gas/oil contact) for the entire
field
Secondary rock property gridded surface models or numerical
values
Conversion numeric constants and units for posting results on the
maps
Optionally, you can also have primary and secondary polygons.
The system may have vertical faults through the producing zone.
Hence, there can be a fault file associated with the top and base
structure surfaces.
If the structure pinches out in the hydrocarbon production areas of
interest, you must make sure that the Top and Base are built to reflect
this. In other words, you must produce the zero line of gross pinchout
when the corresponding isopach (produced in dual grid operations) has
the zero line contoured on a basemap. Logic internal to the macro
shows the pinchouts position and correctly treats the gross and net
isochores for the HIP calculations.
Units of Measurement
All structural surfaces supplied to the macro must be in elevation relative to
sea level. Negative Feet Sub-Sea or Negative Meters Sub-Sea are acceptable.
Positive depth (TVD) is NOT acceptable. If you do not have elevation grids
or fluid contact numbers for input, then use surface operations and the well
data to convert the grid models and contact constants to Sub-Sea values.
If the contacts are not constant over the entire field and can be modeled
by grids, then these grid models can be supplied for both or either the
OWC or GOC.

ENVELOPE: Summary
A typical situation where this case might apply is when a fault block
within the top and base surfaces is sealed and has a different OWC
and/or GOC from the rest of the unit in the field. You must build these
grids using polygon blanking on the field-wide constant elevation grid
that represents the appropriate contact. Build the blanking polygons
using the structural fault files. When the macro takes these grids as
input with the supplied structural fault files, it treats the gridded contact
surfaces correctly, derives gross and net hydrocarbon isopachs, and
then correctly integrates the isopachs for volumes.
The secondary rock properties referred to here are:
UNIT POROSITY GRID - or value as a decimal fraction of 1.0
(15% porosity has a node or numeric value of 0.15)
NET to GROSS ratio as a gridded surface over the units extent, or
a numeric value (80% N/G = node or numeric value of 0.8)
GAS SATURATION as a gridded surface model or a numeric
value (75% gas saturation = node or numeric value of 0.75)
OIL SATURATION as a gridded surface model or a numeric value
(65% Oil Saturation = node or numeric value of 0.65)
OIL FORMATION VOLUME FACTOR- A decimal value or
gridded model that has a value representing a combination of PVT
parameters that bring the hydrocarbons to surface conditions. You
could also build a recovery factor into this value. Typically, it is a
constant input.
GAS FORMATION VOLUME FACTOR- Similar to the oil
formation volume factor, but is applied only to the evaluation of
the gas system by the macro.
Grids and Constants

All of the above parameters can be supplied as grids or constants. In the
macro user interface, the grids are asked for first. If you do not have a grid for
the appropriate parameter, the correct choice from the lists is none - use no
file. Within the macros processing logic, a grid supplied for one of the
above parameters is used even if a numeric value is supplied later in the user
interface. In all cases, grid inputs override numeric value inputs.

ENVELOPE: Summary
The primary and secondary polygons are stored as Z-MAP Plus vertex
files. For the ENVELOPE macro, each vertex file can contain a
maximum of 40 separate polygons. The ENVELOPE macro makes
separate volumetric calculations and postings on maps, depending on
which files are supplieda primary polygon file, a secondary polygon
file, both polygon files, or neither file. If no secondary polygon file is
supplied, only the primary polygons are evaluated. If no primary file is
supplied, the entire reservoir is evaluated and a report is generated in
picture and file output. If neither polygon file is supplied, the entire
reservoir area of interest is evaluated in picture and file output only.
Complex Fraction Operations

No complex fraction or overlapping polygonal operations are used to derive
and report polygonal area volumes.
The conversion numeric constants and units that are used for posting
results on the maps convert map units into the desired reportable area
units and volume (Map X Depth) units to the desired reported
volumetric units. Along with the conversion constants, you are asked to
supply an alphanumeric representation of the output unit. These
supplied strings are concatenated with the results from the volumetric
calculations and posted on the output maps, with the requested result
rounded up to the desired number of decimal places. Both area and
volumetric output are posted on the map for each polygon evaluated.
Conversion Numeric Constants and Decimal Representation

You can enter conversion numeric constants in exponential formatso you
can use your companys standard values. (For a list of the most commonly
used area and volume conversion constants, see the Volumetrics topic in
the CARM section of the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual.)

ENVELOPE: Summary
Modeling the Envelope Control Parameters

In addition to the input listed above, the macro has several complex
modeling workflows built into it.
Discontinuity Use
When we produce the structural contour maps for gross or net reservoir
planimetered volumetric calculations, we know that there are
distinctive wedge zones in the reservoirs dimensions. Examples of
these are located on the edge of the OWC and GOC, and at the
intersection of these contacts and the base structural limits of the
reservoir.
These intersections separate contour forms on either of their sides.
They are considered discontinuity lines. In grid modeling and
evaluation terms, these boundaries should be treated as faults.
Z-MAP Plus deals with discontinuities by treating them as faults.
To treat these areas of special characteristics correctly, the macro
compares the gridded input you supply to the description of the
system-generated contacts and graphically identifies where these
discontinuities appear.
You may choose to incorporate or ignore the correct treatment of the
discontinuities in the modeling and mapping procedures. This choice is
allowed because many times there are historical results where the
discontinuities have been ignored and because we want to provide a
means of verification of past results with the workflow.
Therefore, it is desirable to be able to turn this part of the workflow on
or off. Technically speaking, it should always be on and the
discontinuities should always be used. Being able to turn discontinuity
usage on and off simply allows for sensitivity analysis of the results.

ENVELOPE: Summary
Discontinuity Generalization Tolerance

The Z-MAP Plus Volumetrics Integration module runs into efficiency
problems when it has to use densely sampled fault files. Segments of
discontinuities that are defined by many points through a grid cell slow
the execution down excessively.
To alleviate this decrease in performance without giving up accuracy,
you can generalize the fault segments that are oversampled through
cells. Oversampling often happens when fault file input is derived from
unconformities that are defined by surface intersections.
This generalization has been built into the workflow for you. You can
turn the generalization off, use the default, or use the user tolerance
mode. In default mode, the macro uses the fault file AOI to derive a
generalization tolerance. Alternatively, you can specify a desirable
tolerance. The ability to switch modes saves you time.
Quantized Contours
Often, when you build surface models to condition the final gross or net
HPV isochore, there are areas in the secondary parameter grids that,
when multiplied together, give a zero or positive resulting node value
outside of the positive evaluation area of the isochore.
Generating positive volumes at these sites causes great concern and
problems among users. The most typical example of a grid that causes
this problem is the So grid, which can be derived from the Z-MAP Plus
water saturation module. It typically has 0.0 as a node value outside the
OWC.
When the gross hydrocarbon grid is conditioned by another such grid,
the zero edge is no longer defined in the map nor used in the
volumetrics calculation, because its occurrence is modeled as a
unconformity without a fault file to show it. What you must do is to
reconstruct the grid so that the product Net HPV goes through to
negative values as the zero edge is crossed.

ENVELOPE: Summary
The method for correcting this situation is called Quantized

Contours. A version of this method has been implemented to quantize
the zero line on all output isochores from your macro. There is a switch
to turn the feature on or off. It is always on except when you supply
input constants with no secondary parameter grids. In this case the
macro is in charge of creating the secondary parameter grids, and it will
not let a grid stray from the correct values.
With the function turned off, the resulting net isochore is made,
displayed, and integrated without consideration for the possible
problem. In the graphical results, the user may be astounded at the
number of mistakes.
Again, this is an interesting sensitivity analysis tool. Implementing it in
the workflow is another time saver, because manual, interactive
correction of this problem is very tedious and time consuming.
Map Design Parameters

These map design parameters are simple and not too numerous.
Map Scale and Units
Map scale is specified in absolute map scale (1:10,000 - means one
meter on a map is representative of 10,000 real meters on the
ground). All text and features are dynamically sized and placed on
the individual pictures created by the macro. The choice of map
units is either METERS or FEET.
Contour Interval for the Gross Rock Volume and Net Rock
Volume Isochore
You can specify this interval or have the macro calculate it. The
latter is usually the preferred method, because sometimes you are
not sure what an optimum choice would be. The workflow usually
comes up with an optimized choice that will deliver 10 to 20
contours on each map with a color bar, the correct number of
decimal places, legible contour annotation labels, etc.

ENVELOPE: Summary
Name of a Well Data File

If this name is supplied, the macro posts the wells and their names
on the gross and net isochore maps. On the volumetric report
pictures it posts the well positions only, so that no text interferes
with the volumetric report numbers displayed on the maps.
A Project Title
This text string is the title for your project. It appears on all
pictures in the project. All other text titles are controlled by the
macro and in all cases are descriptive and meaningful. All maps
are also time and date stamped. The time stamp displays the
interval from the time the macro began execution to the time the
map was completed, further graphically documenting the macros
output.
File Saving
The last significant input is a six-digit unique identifier for all pertinent
files created in any particular execution of the workflow. The files can
be directed to any MFD attached at runtime, including a scratch MFD
file. Even text files with all of the different runtime parameter values
are saved as MFD file members with this identifying suffix. File saving
is optional.

ENVELOPE: Summary
Framework Logic
The ENVELOPE macro has certain requirements for input. When the
macro receives the proper inputs, it follows specific file saving
constraints and produces a standard graphical output. Also, you have
the option of using Gross Rock Volume modeling as opposed to top and
base structure grid inputs.
Minimal Input Requirements

The workflow macro is sensitive to what information you supply. The
minimal input required for a successful execution is a top structure grid
and an OWC or GOC/GWC that has an elevation value less than the
ZMAX of the top structure grid.
All other logical defaults will produce the volumetric evaluation with
all relevant report pictures. If minimal input requirements are not met,
the run will abort to the end of execution and give the appropriate
warning messages indicating why.
Some instances where requirements are not met are listed below, along
with the associated consequences.
If only one contact is supplied as a grid or a numerical elevation
input, then only that phase of the reservoir will be analyzed.
If no top structure is supplied, no envelope analysis is performed
If any of the structural or secondary parameter grids are a
mismatch for the exact AOI or grid interval of the top structure
grid, then they will be resampled so that they do match. At the end
of execution, the user is warned and told which grids had
corrections made.
If the ZMIN of the OWC or GOC elevation numbers or grids is
greater than the ZMAX of the top structure grid, or if the OWC is
higher than the GOC, the run is aborted to the end of execution and
you are given a message in the processing window near the end of
the processing stream.

ENVELOPE: Summary
File Saving
Files that are saved to the selected MFD are complete and
all-encompassing. All grids and fault files, plus primary user input files,
are saved with the requested suffix at the end of the macro hard-coded
names. An index of these names and their technical description is in
this document.
If you have performed complex volumetric evaluations of reservoir
envelopes, such as those handled by this workflow, you will be able to
interactively reproduce all of the graphics and volumetric results that
the workflow produces from the saved files.
The parameters used in the macro execution and any warning messages
generated are also saved to the chosen MFD with the same suffix as
other files. Only the files that are pertinent to the level of complexity of
the hydrocarbon envelopes that were built are saved. If the case
analyzed is stratigraphically simple, then fewer files will be saved to
document its creation.
Overall, every effort has been made to document this workflow so that
saved graphical and file output could supply a future user with all of the
information needed to reproduce previous results. The source files for
execution could supply a future production geologist with a starting
point for updating a reservoir model with more recent wells and
petrophysical data.
Gross Rock Volume Modeling

As an option, the macro can also be run against your Gross Rock
Volume isochore grid models. You are prompted for these after the
structural top and base input parameters. If you supply the top and base
information and the grids for the gross rock volume isopachs of either
phase, then the macro will use the isopachs and will not process the top
base analysis. Gross Rock Volume modeling overrides the top/base
structural approach.
You can not analyze one phase using gross rock volume input while
analyzing the other using top/base information. Separate runs of the
macro must be made if you want to use different modes of input. The
workflow can only guarantee integrity on envelope models it creates.
You are responsible for the accuracy of the isochores that you supply.

ENVELOPE: Summary
Graphical Outputs
The pictures produced by the workflow are intended to be of a high
enough quality so that they could be presented at low-level
management reviews. Color tables are supplied that optimize both
hardcopy and screen display media. The montage reports for the oil
and/or gas phase analysis are acceptable as documents that represent
your efforts. All of the member pictures of the report montages are time
and date stamped in an index map on the top right-hand corner.
A maximum of ten pictures are written to the output ZGF created by
the workflow. There is a possibility of five pictures for each phase of
the reservoir analyzed. The five descriptive titles are:
1. GROSS ROCK VOLUME OIL ZONE
This is the supplied or work-flow-created grid model of the gross
rock volume for the oil window. The same picture title with the
word OIL replaced by GAS is representative of the gas phase
analysis. The map is color filled with a color bar and has a time
date stamp. The supplied project title is central to the top offset
margin. A scale bar is on the bottom left margin area and
descriptive title information appears on the bottom right margin
area.
Any subcrops of the hydrocarbon envelope with the base of the
reservoir appear on the map, at a minimum, as a yellow dashed
line. Any truncations by a phase above the GOC appear, at a
minimum, as a red dashed line.
If you specify to use unconformities, the yellow and red dashed
lines are hidden on the picture by a solid brown line that is merged
with other faults in the reservoir. To see the truncation by the oil
contact on the basemap, clear fault traces from the display list in
Z-MAP Plus and redisplay the picture. The red and yellow dashed
vertex unconformities appear. If you decide not to use
unconformities, the red and yellow dashed lines appear if they
occur. However, the contours do not terminate angularly against
them, because the unconformities in the wedge zones are ignored.

ENVELOPE: Summary
If you describe well data to the workflow, solid red, circular well
symbols are posted with the well names displayed above them. All
map features, including text, are resized internally in the macro to
optimize display quality.
2. NET ROCK VOLUME OIL ZONE
This map has all the features that are described above, but the
surface model contoured is that of NET HYDROCARBON PORE
VOLUME. This grid is the product of all modeling procedures and
produces the model that is evaluated by the volumetrics task.
NHPV = GVR x NGx POR x So/g x FVFo/g
Table 2: Key to Formula

NHPV Net Hydrocarbon Pore Volume
GRV Gross Rock Volume
POR Porosity
So/g Saturation of oil/gas
N/G Net to Gross Ratio
FVFo/g Formation Volume Factor for oil/gas
This map shows the results of several different modeling

procedures.
If Quantized Contours is performed by the workflow, the map
shows the results. If unconformities are involved, they also are
shown. If either procedure introduces artifacts or errors, they
are evident in the map.
If you have secondary rock parameter grids that distribute grid
node values discontinually, the effects of this are evident in the
contour form of this map. An example of a discontinuous grid
would be a porosity-gridded surface model created with the
random closest point algorithm in Z-MAP Plus.
If you turn off the Quantized Contour workflow and get a zero
contour that covers all of the non-net areas of the reservoir, it
shows in this picture. This contour map is your visual quality
check for the model being evaluated. If a GAS zone is
evaluated, a second picture with the word GAS instead of OIL
in the title is also created.

ENVELOPE: Summary
3. REPORTED VOLUMES OIL ZONE PRIMARY POLYGONS

There is no contour map on this picture. Instead, it has the color fill
polygons that are in the primary polygon file that was assigned to
the macro. If no primary polygons were selected, then the map is
color back-filled with a base color fill.
The total projected surface area for the Net Hydrocarbon Pore
Volume grid is centrally located in each of the polygons or in the
center of the map if no polygons are supplied. This area is above
contour level 0.0 and appears in a light blue text string. It is
reported as a decimal number with the requested number of
decimal places. The unit of the number is appended after the
numerical result. Below that is a red number that is the total
hydrocarbon (GAS/OIL) for the area analyzed. Requested decimal
places and units are reported the same as in the area report
numbers.
The numbers on the picture reflect the conversion of map units to
requested area/volume units. If the macro was instructed to save
the output files, these numbers are stored in the volumetric report
files for the particular phase analyzed.
This picture is always produced for each phase of the reservoir
analyzed. No primary polygons are necessary, because the entire
AOI is assumed to be the primary polygon in the absence of a
supplied file.
4. REPORTED VOLUMES OIL ZONE SECONDARY POLYGONS
This picture has exactly the same format and report content as the
previous one, except that the polygons and results are for the
secondary polygons supplied to the workflow. A separate run of
the Volumetrics task produces these results, which are totally
independent of the previous primary polygon calculations. This
picture is only produced if the secondary polygon file is supplied.

ENVELOPE: Summary
5. REPORT MONTAGE EVALUATION OIL WINDOW

The montage consists of the four pictures previously described.
The pictures are combined (to scale) as one large picture, or
montage. The montage has double borders and a title at the top that
indicates the reservoir phase represented. If no secondary
polygons are selected for the analysis, the montage has a blank
space in the lower right quadrantin the space usually occupied
by the REPORTED VOLUMES OIL ZONE picture.
All the pictures stored in the ZGF are in standard Z-MAP Plus
format, so you use the graphics editor to edit any picture element.
If you want to use the data editor to edit the pictures, however, note
that the data in the pictures is created with temporary copies of the
files created in the workflow. Therefore, the editor is unable to
attach specific grid names to contours in the pictures. If you save
the file output from the workflow by creating scratch pictures, you
can achieve the edits you want in a straightforward manner.

ENVELOPE: Summary
Other Volumetric Evaluations

The following examples show a few ways you can customize your
approach to the workflow to achieve other zonal volumetric
evaluations.
1. Evaluate the transition zone phase of the reservoir. For example,
complete these tasks when you use the macro:
Create a top of a transition zone gridded surface model. Use this
in the macro and call it the GOC. The resulting report montage
has the desired volumes.
Change the titles on the various pictures to show they are for the
transition zone. The pictures and files for the gas zone are all
false. You can then carefully discard the false results from
archival information.
2. Evaluate only the Gross Rock Volumewith no HPV analysis.
To achieve this result, specify all the secondary rock parameters as
a value of 1.00 when you run the macro. All reported volumes are
BULK ROCK VOLUME for each reservoir phase.
3. Evaluate hydrocarbons in a structure of unknown spill point.
Suppose you do not know what the OWC or GWC is in
elevation. This may occur if you have a top and base structure
map that is part of a much larger reservoir system. In this
situation, assume all of the gross rock volume is filled with the
phase of hydrocarbon for which you are running the analysis.
Before you run the macro, determine a value for the
OWC/GWC by performing grid statistics on the base structure
grid. The reported ZMIN value is the MAXIMUM value the
contact can have before it starts to baselap the base structure
surface. For safety, subtract one or two units from the ZMIN
elevation and use the result as the effective OWC/GWC. The
reported volumetrics is for a completely filled piece of a
reservoir trap.

ENVELOPE: Summary
4. Work with exploration play fairway.

These approaches are similar to those you might use to analyze
a single production trap. Suppose you have a fairway with
multiple traps and therefore, multiple spill points. In this
situation, you can create OWC/GWC, GOC grids that change
elevation in the polygonal areas.
You can create these polygons, using the data editor in
Z-MAP Plus, by writing the polygons to individual files. Next,
use grid blanking to set node values in the polygonal areas to
the values that are correct for each trap. You can use the same
approach to produce correct results for reservoir systems that
have many fault blocks, which each have a different contact
defined. In this case, the polygon boundaries are common with
the fault traces.
5. Work with tilting hydrocarbon contacts.
You can accommodate tilting hydrocarbon contacts if you build
surface models that represent the nature of the tilting contacts.
The idea is to truncate the OWC by the GOC. Therefore, if the
oil leg has pinchout on the gas zone, make sure the modeled
input contact grids cross at the appropriate area location to
show the termination.
To build the contacts themselves, a reasonably fast workflow is
to use surface trend gridding (three terms) to get the tilt plane
form of the surface into a grid, then run
SURFCORRECT.ZCLMAC to merge this surface to the well
picks for the contacts. Use the DEFAULT GRIDDING
technique with a trend in the strike direction of the tilt plane for
first-look results. The macros framework logic takes care of all
the geometric considerations involved in building the oil and
gas envelopes for volumetric evaluation.

ENVELOPE: Parameters

ZGF to write final graphics to?
Description The directory path and name for the new ZGF that stores the final
pictures the macro creates. Pictures are created only for the
reservoir phases that are analyzed.
Accepting the Default Value

If the default value is accepted, ENVELOPE.ZGF is created in the
runtime directory for Z-MAP Plus or the ZCL session being executed. If
the ZGF specified already exists, the macro terminates abnormally.
Macro Parameter STRING
String Parameter
This is specified as a STRING type parameter because there is the danger
of a failed execution of the macro corrupting an old ZGF. The ZGF
created is of significant size and must always be a new ZGF.
Data Type C*40

Default Value ENVELOPE.ZGF
R2003.12.0 ENVELOPE: Parameters 127

TOP STRUCTURE GRID?

Description The name of the input grid file that represents the top structure
elevation of the reservoir formation or unit you are analyzing for
volumetrics. This file must be in an MFD attached to Z-MAP Plus.
To use your own gross hydrocarbon rock volume isochore grid
models as input to the macro, use the default setting.
Macro Parameter TGRD
Data Type C*24
Default Value FILENAME NOT SPECIFIED
o
NAME OF THE MFD FOR TOP STRUCTURE GRID?
Description MFD that contains the top structure grid you want to use as input.
Macro Parameter MFDTGRD
Data Type I
Range 0-5
Default Value 0
BASE STRUCTURE GRID?

Description Name of the input grid file that represents the base structure
elevation of the reservoir formation or unit being analyzed for
volumetrics. The grid file must be in an MFD attached to
Z-MAP Plus. To use your own gross hydrocarbon rock volume
isochore grid models as input to the macro, use the default setting.
Macro Parameter BGRD
Data Type C*24
oNAME OF THE MFD FOR BASE STRUCTURE GRID?

Description MFD that contains the base structure grid you want to use as input.
Macro Parameter MFDBGRD
Data Type I
Range 0-5
Default Value 0

FAULT FILE TO USE WITH STRUCTURE GRIDS?

Description Vertical fault file associated with the top and base formation or unit
elevation grid models.
Data Type C*24
o
MFD NAME FOR FAULT FILE?
Description MFD that contains the FAULTS file you want to use as input.
Data Type I
Range 0-5
Default Value 0
NAME OF GAS/OIL or WATER CONTACT GRID?

Description You can use either gridded surface models or a numerical elevation
number to represent the GOC/GWC elevation surface. If you want
to use a grid, this is where it must be specified. The gridded surface
model must extend past the points at which it would cross either the
base or top elevation grids. If you intend to use your own gross
hydrocarbon rock volume isochore grid models, then ignore this
parameter and let it default.
Macro Parameter GOCGRD
Data Type C*24
oMFD NAME FOR CONTACT GRID?

Description MFD that contains the contact grid file you want to use as input.
Macro Parameter MFDGOC
Data Type I
Range 0-5
Default Value 0

NAME OF OIL/WATER CONTACT GRID?

Description As with the GOC/GWC, you can use either gridded surface models
or a numerical elevation number to represent the OWC elevation
surface. If you want to use a grid, this is where it must be specified.
The gridded surface model must extend past the points at which it
would cross either the base or top elevation grids. If you intend to
use your own gross hydrocarbon rock volume isochore grid models,
then this parameter should be ignored and left to default.
Macro Parameter OWCGRD
Data Type C*24
o
MFD NAME FOR CONTACT GRID?
Description MFD that contains the contact grid file you want to use as input.
Macro Parameter MFDOWC
Data Type I
Range 0-5
Default Value 0
CONSTANT GAS/OIL CONTACT VALUE?

Description If you do not use a gridded surface model to represent the
GWC/GOC elevation surface, you can enter the TVDSS elevation
number for the contact here. (Note: Oil and Gas contact
descriptions can be a mixture of grid or numerical input.)
Macro Parameter GOCVAL
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0
CONSTANT OIL/WATER CONTACT VALUE?

Description If you do not use a gridded surface model to represent the OWC
elevation surface, you can enter the TVDSS elevation number for
the contact here.
Macro Parameter OWCVAL
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0

OPTIONAL USER BUILT OIL GRV ISOCHORE?

Description Name of an Oil GRV Isochore grid model you have built outside of
the macro workflow If you specify this parameter, the macro
does not create an internal Gross Hydrocarbon Rock Volume
Isochore. You are entirely responsible for the accuracy of the
isochore model and the volumetric results reported.
Multi-Reservoir Phase Description Modes

Do not try to mix multi-reservoir phase description modes. Either use
tops and bases plus contact descriptions for the hydrocarbon zone or
zones, or use the external isochore input mode. When the gas part of the
reservoir is described as an external isochore and the oil part is defined
with tops, base, and contacts, the macro terminates abnormally. If you
need to use both types of execution modes, run the workflow once for gas
and again for oil.
Macro Parameter ISOO

Data Type C*24
o
MFD FOR THE OIL ISOCHORE
Description MFD that contains the oil isochore file you want to use as input.
Macro Parameter MFDISOO
Data Type I
Range 0-5
Default Value 0

OPTIONAL FAULTS FOR OIL GRV ISOCHORE?

Description Fault file associated with the Oil Gross Rock Volume Isochore
Unlike the case where the macro uses base and top grid models to
define the evaluation isochore, the faults supplied here for the gas
and oil zone user-built isochores can be different files.
Macro Parameter ISFO
Data Type C*24
o
MFD FOR THE OIL ISOCHORE FAULTS
Description MFD that contains the oil isochore faults file you want to use as
input.
Macro Parameter MFDISFO
Data Type I
Range 0-5
Default Value 0
OPTIONAL USER BUILT GAS GRV ISOCHORE?

Description Name of a Gas GRV Isochore grid model you built outside of the
macro workflow If you specify this parameter, the macro does
not create an internal Gross Hydrocarbon Rock Volume Isochore.
You are entirely responsible for the accuracy of the isochore model
and the volumetric results reported.
Macro Parameter ISOG
Data Type C*24
oMFD FOR THE GAS ISOCHORE

Description MFD that contains the gas isochore file you want to use as input.
Macro Parameter MFDISOG
Data Type I
Range 0-5
Default Value 0

OPTIONAL FAULTS FOR GAS GRV ISOCHORE?

Description Fault file associated with the Gas Gross Rock Volume Isochore
Unlike having the macro use base and top grid models to define the
evaluation isochore, you can specify different files to add gas and
oil zone user-built isochores.
Macro Parameter ISFG
Data Type C*24
o
MFD FOR THE GAS ISOCHORE FAULTS?
Description MFD that contains the gas isochore faults file you want to use as
input.
Macro Parameter MFDISFG
Data Type I
Range 0-5
Default Value 0

NAME OF POROSITY GRID?

Description The ENVELOPE macro enables you to define secondary rock
parameter distributions in the reservoir system as either gridded
surface models or as numerical constants. If you use a gridded
porosity surface model to define the 2D distribution of porosity
over the oil and gas window, use this parameter to specify the name
of the porosity grid. You can use a mixture of constants and grids
for the secondary parameter input values you specify for the HPV
equation.
Node Values
Node values must be in fractional decimal form (for example, 21% =
0.21). To use different grids to represent the 2D distribution of this
parameter for each hydrocarbon phase, you must execute two separate
runs of the macro (one for each phase). Each grid you supply as input to
the macro is force resampled to the AOI and grid interval of the Top
Structure or to the Oil/Gas isochore grid you specify as input.
Macro Parameter PORGRD

Data Type C*24
o
MFD NAME FOR POROSITY GRID?
Description The MFD that contains the input porosity grid (PORGRD).
Macro Parameter MFDPOR
Data Type I
Range 0-5
Default Value 0

NAME OF NET/GROSS RATIO GRID?

Description To use a gridded net to gross surface model for defining the 2D
distribution of N/G over the oil and gas window, use this parameter
to specify the name of the N/G grid. You can use a mixture of
constants and grids for the secondary parameter input values you
specify for the HPV equation.
Node Values
Node values must be in fractional decimal form (for example, 21% =
0.21). To use different grids to represent the 2D distribution of this
parameter for each hydrocarbon phase, you must execute two separate
runs of the macro (one for each phase). Each grid you supply as input to
the macro is force resampled to the AOI and grid interval of the Top
Structure or to the Oil/Gas isochore grid you specify as input.
Description
Macro Parameter NTGGRD
Data Type C*24
o
MFD NAME FOR N/G RATIO GRID?
Description The MFD that contains the input N/G ratio grid (NTGGRD).
Macro Parameter MFDNTG
Data Type I
Range 0-5
Default Value 0

NAME OF GAS SATURATION GRID?

Description To use a gridded gas saturation surface model for defining the 2D
distribution of Sg over the gas window, use this parameter to specify
the name of the Sg grid. You can use a mixture of constants and
grids for the secondary parameter input values you specify for the
HPV equation.
Node Values
Node values must be in fractional decimal form (for example, 21% = 0.21).
Macro Parameter GSATGRD

Data Type C*24
o
MFD FOR GAS SATURATION GRID?
Description The MFD that contains the input gas saturation grid (GSATGRD).
Macro Parameter MFDGSAT
Data Type I
Range 0-5
Default Value 0

NAME OF OIL SATURATION GRID?

Description To use a gridded oil saturation surface model for defining the 2D
distribution of So over the oil window, use this parameter to specify
the name of the So grid. You can use a mixture of constants and
grids for the secondary parameter input values you specify for the
HPV equation.
Node Values
Macro Parameter OSATGRD

Data Type C*24
o
MFD FOR OIL SATURATION GRID?
Description The MFD that contains the input oil saturation grid (OSATGRD).
Macro Parameter MFDOSAT
Data Type I
Range 0-5
Default Value 0

NAME OF OIL FVF GRID?

Description To use a gridded Formation Volume Factor surface model for
defining the 2D distribution of FVF oil over the oil window, use this
parameter to specify the name of the oil FVF grid. (Note: This type
of surface is not commonly gridded as a 2D attribute.) You can use
a mixture of constants and grids for the secondary parameter input
values you specify for the HPV equation.
Node Values and Recovery Factors

If you want to incorporate a Recovery Factor, this is the obvious attribute
for factoring it in.
Macro Parameter FVFOGRD

Data Type C*24
o
MFD FOR OIL FVF GRID?
Description The MFD that contains the input oil FVF grid (FVFOGRD).
Macro Parameter MFDFVF
Data Type I
Range 0-5
Default Value 0

NAME OF GAS FVF GRID?

Description To use a gridded Formation Volume Factor surface model for
defining the 2D distribution of FVF gas over the gas window, use
this parameter to specify the name of the gas FVF grid. (Note: This
type of surface is not commonly gridded as a 2D attribute.) You can
use a mixture of constants and grids for the secondary parameter
input values you specify for the HPV equation.
Node Values and Recovery Factors

If you want to incorporate a Recovery Factor, this is the obvious attribute
for factoring it in.
Macro Parameter FVFGGRD

Data Type C*24
o
MFD FOR GAS FVF GRID?
Description The MFD that contains the input gas FVF grid (FVFGGRD).
Macro Parameter MFDFVFG
Data Type I
Range 0-5
Default Value 0

CHOOSE PRIMARY POLYGONS FOR VOLUMETRICS?

Description A vertex file that contains polygons that are used in the volumetric
integration of the Net Hydrocarbon Pore Volume grid that is
conditioned or built in the ENVELOPE operation. The polygons
are used to break up the envelopes for the different hydrocarbon
phases into areas of separate and discrete integration.
Separate scaled and labeled Area and Volume numbers are reported
to a file and posted to a map for each one of the polygons. The
maximum number of polygons allowed in the file is 40. The format
for the file records is a simple X, Y, SEG ID format of the VERT
type file in Z-MAP Plus. Each polygon is colorfilled on the
volumetrics report picture for each phase. If any of the polygons
overlap, the colorfill overlaps as well, and duplicate volumes are
reported. No intersecting polygon logic is used.
If this file is not specified and the default value is used, the
Volumetrics run is still executed and the picture is created.
However, the evaluation area for the integration is the entire AOI of
the macro-derived Net HPV grid by default. The numbers, with
their appropriate labels, are posted in a size-scaled manner in the
middle of the report picture, AOI.
Macro Parameter PRMPOLY
Data Type C*24
o
THE MFD FOR THE PRIMARY POLYGONS?
Description The MFD that contains the input primary polygon file
(PRMPOLY).
Macro Parameter MFDPMPS
Data Type I
Range 0-5
Default Value 0

CHOOSE SECONDARY POLYGONS FOR VOLUMETRICS?

Description A second set of polygons allowed for a separate run of volumetrics
for each reservoir phase. The file size and definition the same as for
primary polygons. However, a separate report picture with a
different color scheme for the polygon fill is created. The numbers
posted on the picture and saved to file, if requested, are totally
unique for each polygon in the file. If you do not specify this file
name and allow the default name to be used, the second volumetrics
run is bypassed and the second separate report picture is not
created. Only three maps appear on the final report montage for
each phase that is analyzed.
Macro Parameter SECPOLY
Data Type C*24
o
THE MFD FOR THE SECONDARY POLYGONS
Description The MFD that contains the input secondary polygon file
(SECPOLY).
Macro Parameter MFDSCPS
Data Type I
Range 0-5
Default Value 0
CONSTANT NET/GROSS RATIO VALUE?

Description A numerical value used to condition the Gross Hydrocarbon Rock
Volume Isochore to give the Net HPV result for each phase if no
grid is specified to represent the N/G ratio in the reservoir for oil
and gas. The value entered must be in decimal form and the
precision carried in the entry is that of a real number of 8 significant
digits. If different N/G constants are required for the evaluation of
each phase, the macro should be run twice, once for each phase
with the appropriate constants.
Macro Parameter NTGVAL
Data Type R
Range 0.0-1.0
Default Value 0.88

CONSTANT AVERAGE POROSITY VALUE?

grid is specified to represent the porosity distribution in the
reservoir for oil and gas. The value entered must be in decimal form
and the precision carried in the entry is that of a real number of 8
significant digits. If different Porosity constants are required for the
evaluation of each phase, the macro should be run twice, once for
each phase with the appropriate constants.
Macro Parameter PORVAL
Data Type R
Range 0.0-1.0
Default Value 0.21
CONSTANT GAS SATURATION VALUE

grid is specified to represent the Gas Saturation distribution in the
reservoir. The value entered must be in decimal form and the
digits.
Macro Parameter GSATVAL
Data Type R
Range 0.0-1.0
Default Value 0.75

CONSTANT OIL SATURATION VALUE

grid is specified to represent the Oil Saturation distribution in the
digits.
Macro Parameter OSATVAL
Data Type R
Range 0.0-1.0
Default Value 0.68
OIL FORMATION VOLUME FACTOR?

grid is specified to represent the Oil FVF distribution in the
digits. The Recovery Factor for the Reservoir can also be built into
this scaling factor.
Macro Parameter FVFO
Data Type R
Default Value 0.37
GAS FORMATION VOLUME FACTOR?

grid is specified to represent the Gas FVF distribution in the
digits. The Recovery Factor for the Reservoir can also be built into
this scaling factor.
Macro Parameter FVFG
Data Type R
Default Value 0.75

GRV CONTOUR INTERVAL DETERMINATION?

Description Use this parameter to perform one of these actions:
Set the macro to calculate a suitable contour interval to display the
Gross Rock Volume maps of each phase, or
Contour by using contour intervals that you supply.
Of the four maps made and incorporated into the report montage
picture for each reservoir phase analyzed, two are isochore
displays. The top left on the montage is the Gross Rock Volume
Contour map, and the bottom left is the Net Rock Volume map.
This last isochore is the one integrated by the volumetrics module.
Production geologists usually have a preferred interval for
contouring these maps with either oil or gas phases. The Net
Hydrocarbon Pore Volume maps use the automated approach in all
cases.
Macro Parameter AUTO
Options
AUTOMATIC = The GRV contour interval is automatically calculated
USE BELOW = You input data to calculate the GRV contour interval.
Data Type C*12

Default Value AUTOMATIC
CONTOUR INTERVAL FOR THE OIL ISOCHORE?

Description If the response to the previous parameter (AUTO) is USE BELOW,
then this number is the contour interval used for the Oil Gross Rock
Volume Isochore.
Macro Parameter CNTO
Data Type R
Default Value 1.5
CONTOUR INTERVAL FOR THE GAS ISOCHORE?

Description If the response to the previous parameter (AUTO) is USE BELOW,
then this number is the contour interval used for the Gas Gross
Rock Volume Isochore.
Macro Parameter CNTG
Data Type R
Default Value 2.0

USE HC CONTACT DISCONTINUITIES?

Description This allows you to choose whether or not to use HC Contact
Discontinuities. For a full explanation of this feature, see
Discontinuity Use on page 115.
Macro Parameter DISC
Options
YES = Use HC contact discontinuities
NO = Do not use HC contact discontinuities.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
DISCONTINUITY GENERALIZATION TOLERANCE?

Description This allows you to choose a value for the discontinuity
generalization tolerance. See Discontinuity Generalization
Tolerance on page 116. for a full explanation.
Macro Parameter GENC
Options
NONE = Do not use a discontinuity generalization tolerance.
DEFAULT = Use the default discontinuity tolerance.
USER = You must input a value for discontinuity tolerance.
Data Type C*8

Default Value NONE

USER DISCONTINUITY TOLERANCE:

Description The discontinuity tolerance is a number entered in map x, y units
(meters or feet). If the DISCONTINUITY GENERALIZATION
TOLERANCE value is set to DEFAULT, the program calculates
the parameter value based on the AOI of the combined faults and
discontinuities, if they are used. If the DISCONTINUITY
GENERALIZATION TOLERANCE value is set to USER, this
parameter value is the number used by the line generalization task.
Generalization tolerance works in the following way: Three
consecutive points in a line segment of the fault file are compared.
Imagine that a line is drawn to connect the two end points. If the
middle point falls further away from the connecting line than the
specified GENF value, the middle point is preserved. If the middle
point is within the distance specified by the GENF value, the point
is discarded.
In the map outputs the macro creates, close examination around
faults and discontinuities reveals whether the lines are
over-generalized. This is exemplified by lines that fall on the wrong
side of grid nodes and the appearance of bulls eye contour patterns
close to discontinuities.
The main goal of using generalization is to reduce execution time
for the volumetrics operation. If you see errors due to
over-generalization in the Net Hydrocarbon Pore Volume Isochore
contours, reduce the GENF parameter value until the errors
disappear.
If the File Save option is used in the first execution of the macro, the
generalized files are saved along with the combined original fault
and discontinuity lines. You can interactively run line
generalization to fine-tune the GENF value. For large grids and
fault files, the default value typically produces a fair to good
first-part result. For small grid files (150X150 nodes) and small
fault patterns with inextensive discontinuity lines, you can
eliminate generalization.
Macro Parameter GENF
Data Type R
Default Value 2.0

SAVE THE OUTPUT FILES?

All significant output grids, data, fault, and vertex files can be saved
by the macro to a scratch MFD or an MFD attached to Z-MAP Plus
or the ZCL stream running. When the save option is used, the
macro is in control of the prefix naming convention of all files.
Macro Parameter SAVE
Options
NO = Do not save the output files.
YES = Save the output files.
Data Type C*4

Default Value NO
INTEGER 6 CHARACTER SUFFIX ON SAVE FILES?

Description If SAVE=YES an integer ID number, up to six digits in length, is
attached as a suffix to the previously determined, saved file names.
Macro Parameter SUFFIX
Data Type I
Range 000000 to 999999
Default Value 111111
OUTMFD
Description The MFD to use for storing the output files.
Macro Parameter OUTMFD
Data Type I
Range 0-5
Default Value 0

DO YOU WANT QUANTIZED CONTOURS?

Description This allows you to choose whether or not quantized contouring is
used. For a detailed description of this feature, see Quantized
Contours on page 116.
Macro Parameter QUANT
Options
YES = Use quantized contours.
NO = Do not use quantized contours.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
NUMBER OF DECIMAL PLACES POSTED ON PICTURE?

Description In the volumetric report pictures produced by the macro, the
numerical results for projected surface area and volume are posted
on the pictures at polygon centroidal locations. This parameter
controls how many significant numbers appear after the decimal
place in the posting of these numerical results. The results are
rounded up to the last requested decimal position.
Macro Parameter NDEC
Data Type I
Default Value 3
AREA SCALAR FOR VOLUMETRICS?

Description This is the area scalar used in the integration of hydrocarbon
projected surface areas from the Net Hydrocarbon Pore Volume
grid produced by the ENVELOPE operation. The number entered is
used as a scalar to convert area map units to desired reported
projected area units of the hydrocarbon phase being analyzed (for
example, m^2 x 2.471054E-4 = ACRE). (For a list of the most
commonly used volume and area conversion constants, see the
Volumetrics topic in the CARM section of the Z-MAP Plus
Reference Manual.)
Macro Parameter AREA
Data Type R
Default Value 2.47105E-4

UNITS OF AREA?
Description This entry is a label. It is appended to all of the numbers reported
on the maps for the projected surface area of your hydrocarbon
volumetric results for each phase analyzed. It appears on the maps
just as specified here.
Macro Parameter AREU
Data Type C*8
Default Value ACRES
VOLUME SCALAR FOR OOIP?

Description This is the volume scalar that is used in the integration of
hydrocarbon volumes from the Oil Net Hydrocarbon Pore Volume
grid produced by the macro. The number entered is used as a scalar
to convert map volume units (i.e., area units X depth units) to the
desired reported volumetric units for the hydrocarbon phase being
analyzed (e.g., m^3 x 6.2898 = BARREL).
Macro Parameter VSOR
Data Type R
UNITS OF OIL VOLUME?

on the maps for the volume of the oil phase of the reservoir. It
appears on the maps just as it is typed here.
Macro Parameter VUOR
Data Type C*8
Default Value MBBLS

VOLUME OF SCALAR FOR OGIP?

Description This is the volume scalar that is used in the integration of
hydrocarbon volumes from the Gas Net Hydrocarbon Pore Volume
grid produced by the macro. The number entered is used as a scalar
to convert map volume units (i.e., area units X depth units) to the
desired reported volumetric units for the hydrocarbon phase being
analyzed (e.g., m^3 x 3.531466E-5 = million ft^3).
Macro Parameter VSGR
Data Type R
UNITS OF GAS VOLUME?

on the maps for the volume of the gas phase of the reservoir. It
appears on the maps just as it is specified here.
Macro Parameter VUGR
Data Type C*8
Default Value MCF

Data file for posting on maps?

Description On all of the four maps the macro can create in a phase evaluation,
well data locations are displayed from this input MFD DATA file.
The well location and well name are posted on the two isochore
displays. Only the well location is posted on any of the volume
report maps. If you do not specify this file, no postings occur. The
fields required from an input file are x, y, and a field to use as the
well name. Deviated well files are not selectable and cannot be
posted by the ENVELOPE operation.
Macro Parameter MWELLD
Data Type C*24
o
MFD number for input
Description The MFD that contains the input file for posting (MWELLD).
Macro Parameter MFDINF
Data Type I
Range 0-5
Default Value 0
Input X-FIELD from data file

Description If MWELLD is specified in Z-MAP Plus, a selection dialog box
appears with all the X-FIELDS of the data file listed. You must
select the appropriate field to use.
Macro Parameter INFLA
Data Type I
Default Value none
Input Y-FIELD from data file

appears with all the Y-FIELDS of the data file listed. You must
select the appropriate field to use.
Macro Parameter INFLB
Data Type I
Default Value none

Input WELL NAME field from data file

appears with all field types of the data file listed. You must specify
an appropriate field to post as the well name.
Data Type I
CHOICE OF ABSOLUTE MAP SCALE?

Description This is a map design parameter that determines at what absolute
scale the output maps, including montage reports, are made. Any
one of the absolute scales listed below is a correct response.
Macro Parameter MPSCAL
Options 2
1 = 1:200
2 = 1:500
3 = 1:1,000
4 = 1:2,500
5 = 1:4,000
6 = 1:5,000
7 = 1:10,000
8 = 1:20,000
9 = 1:25,000
10 = 1:50,000
11 = 1:75,000
12 = 1:100,000
Data Type C*12

Default Value 1:5,000

DATA GROUND UNITS?

Description This is a map design parameter that assigns what the map units will
be for the coordinate system of the grids, faults, and data.
Macro Parameter MPUNIT
Options
METERS = The data appears in meters.
FEET = The data appears in feet.
Data Type C*8

Default Value METERS
TITLE on top of the map?

Description This title is the only one you have control of. It is placed
prominently, centered in the top offset margin of each map
produced by the macro. It is advisable to use the reservoir or
prospect name as an entry.
Macro Parameter ISOTITB
Data Type C*30
Default Value Z-MAP Plus OIL AND GAS RESERVOIR

EVALUATE-CONGRID
Macro Name EVALUATE-CONGRID
Menu Option Modeling Constant Grid
Purpose This macro builds a constant grid from user defined input.

name of the output grid file
the constant value to insert in the output grid nodes
the minimum and maximum x and y values for the output gridding
area
the x, y gridding increment
Results A constant grid built with the input value.

Enter the Output Grid Name
Macro Parameter GRID
Data Type C *24
oMFD
Number for the Grid
Description The MFD to use for storing the output grid file.
Macro Parameter MFD
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 EVALUATE-CONGRID 154

EVALUATE-CONGRID: Parameters
Value of the Constant Grid

Description The value of all the grid nodes in the output constant grid.
Macro Parameter VALUE
Data Type R
Default Value 0
*Minimum X Value
Description Minimum x coordinate of the output gridding area.
Macro Parameter XMIN
Data Type R
*Maximum X Value
Description Maximum x coordinate of the output gridding area.
Macro Parameter XMAX
Data Type R
*Minimum Y Value
Description Minimum y coordinate of the output gridding area.
Macro Parameter YMIN
Data Type R
*Maximum Y Value
Description Maximum y coordinate of the output gridding area.
Macro Parameter YMAX
Data Type R
R2003.12.0 EVALUATE-CONGRID: Parameters 155

EVALUATE-CONGRID: Parameters
Grid Increment
Description The value you enter applies to both the x and y increments.
Macro Parameter INC
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0
ZNON or Null Data Value

Description Null data value for the output grid.
Data Type R
Default Value 1.E+30
ZCL PROCESSES
DATA BLOCK EVALUATE
SINGLE GRID OPS DELETE FILE
R2003.12.0 EVALUATE-CONGRID: Parameters 156

EVALUATE-POLYN
Macro Name EVALUATE-POLYN

Menu Option Modeling Polynomial Grid
Purpose This macro evaluates a polynomial function over a user defined area
and stores the results as a new grid. Polynomial trends of up to the 2nd
order can be handled by the macro. That means a maximum 9 term
polynomial function in which the highest order of term in the function
is x2 or y2. The macro produces a grid with the node values being the
values calculated by the polynomial. You can control the AOI of the
grid, as well as the x and y grid increments. You can also input the
coefficient for each of the corresponding terms in the polynomial.
Use EVALUATE-POLYN to Create a Polynomial Trend Grid

Start with reasonable coefficients for a polynomial surface expressed in terms
of surface location x and y. Use EVALUATE-POLYN to create a polynomial
trend grid.
For instance, the most simple geological trend is a monocline (a flat dipping
surface). In terms of x,y, the monocline surface can be expressed as a first
order polynomial with four terms. Accordingly, you can describe the
polynomial as 1st order and can supply the appropriate four coefficients for
those four terms. The macro creates a grid of that polynomial trend with the
AOI and grid increment you supply.
Remember that the x and y in the grid need not be map coordinates. They
could be any other two field values, such as porosity and V shale (from log
analysis); the node value (z) could be permeability.
More complex polynomials can be evaluated by the ZCL EVALUATE

process that is used in this macro. However, the macro is limited to 2nd
order because it is impractical to incorporate more terms for interactive
prompt input. If you want to create a grid of higher order, you can
create a ZCL script for a 3rd or higher order polynomial.

name of the output grid you are creating
MFD on which to store the output grid
grid parameters (x and y min and max)
whether you describe the grid by giving increments or by
specifying rows and columns
ZNON value for the output file
degree of the polynomial and the value of the coefficients
R2003.12.0 EVALUATE-POLYN 157

EVALUATE-POLYN
The following boxes illustrate the first and second polynomials:
Example 1st Degree Polynomial Example 2nd Degree Polynomial

Degree of Polynomial = 1 Degree of Polynomial = 2
Equation = A + B[X] + C[Y] +D[XY] Equation: A = B[X] + C[Y] + D[XY] =
Enter A polynomial [constant] term = 10 E[X**2] + F[Y**2] + G[(X**2)Y] +
H[(Y**2)X] + I[(X**2)(Y**2)]
Enter B [X] term coefficient = 2
Enter A polynomial [constant] term = 10
Enter C [Y] term coefficient = 4
Enter B [X] term coefficient = 2
Enter D [XY] term coefficient = 6
Enter C [Y] term coefficient = 4
Where:
Enter D [XY] term coefficient = 6
A is a Constant, B D are Coefficients,
and Enter E [X**2] term coefficient = 8
X and Y are the x,y coordinates Enter F [Y**2] term coefficient = 10
Minimum X & Y = 0 Enter G [(X**2)Y] term coefficient = 12
Maximum X & Y = 10 Enter H [(Y**2)X] term coefficient = 14
Grid Increment = 1 Enter I [(Y**2)(X**2)] term coefficient= 16
Check with Grid Statistics: Where:
Minimum Surface Value = 10.00 A is a Constant, B I are Coefficients, and
Maximum Surface Value = 670.00 X and Y are the x,y coordinates
Minimum X & Y = 0
Maximum X & Y = 10
Grid Increment = 1
Check with Grid Statistics:
Minimum Surface Value = 10.00
Maximum Surface Value = 188470.00
Results A grid with the requested AOI and grid increment and node values that
are resolved by the polynomial expansion using the supplied constant
and coefficients.
R2003.12.0 EVALUATE-POLYN 158

EVALUATE-POLYN: Parameters

Enter the Output Grid Name
Description This is a new grid for storing the output of the polynomial
evaluation.
Data Type C*24
Default Value TEST GRID
MFD Name For The Grid

Macro Parameter MFD
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
*Minimum X Value
Description Minimum x coordinate of the output grid AOI.
Data Type R
*Maximum X Value
Description Maximum x coordinate of the output grid AOI.
Data Type R
*Minimum Y Value
Description Minimum y coordinate of the output grid AOI.
Data Type R
R2003.12.0 EVALUATE-POLYN: Parameters 159

*Maximum Y Value
Description Maximum y coordinate of the output grid AOI.
Data Type R
Specify Grid Density

Description Method of determining grid increment of the new grid. This is done
by specifying either the number of rows and columns or the grid
increment as a coordinate distance. If the number of rows and
columns are input, the increments are derived using the AOI limits.
Macro Parameter METHOD
Options
INCREMENTS = User supplies grid increment.
ROWS&COLS = User supplies number of rows and columns.
Data Type C*12

Default Value INCREMENTS
*Grid Increment
Description This is the coordinate distance to use for the grid increment of the
new grid. The resulting x and y grid increments are both this value.
Macro Parameter INC
Data Type R
Number of Rows in Grid Array

Description Number of rows of grid nodes in the output grid. Required when
METHOD = ROWS&COLS.
Macro Parameter ROWS
Data Type I

Number of Columns in Grid Array

Description Number of columns of grid nodes in the output grid. Required when
METHOD = ROWS&COLS.
Macro Parameter COLS
Data Type I
ZNON or Null Data Value

Description Null data value for the output grid node if evaluated as null.
Data Type R
What to Enter
Description This prompt supplies a popup menu in Z-MAP Plus containing help
information about values needed for each degree of the polynomial.
Changing the selection in this popup has no effect on input values

for the macro.
Macro Parameter HELP1
Data Type C*64
Default Value PARAMETERS FOR DEGREE = 0 OR DEGREE = 1

Term Expansions 0, 1, 2 Degree Equations

information on values needed for each degree of the polynomial.
*
.
HELP ON EXPANSION
--------------------------------------------------
Expansions for 0, 1,2 Degrees of freedom are:
degree -0: A
degree -1: A + B[X] + C[Y] + D[XY]
degree -2: A + B[X] + C[Y] + D[XY] + E[X**2] +
F[Y**2] + G[(X**2)Y] + H[(Y**2)X] +
I[(x**2)(Y**2)]
--------------------------------------------------
COEFFICIENT TERM
--------------------------------------------------
A CONSTANT
B [X]
C [Y]
D [XY]
E [X**2]
F [Y**2]
G [(X**2)Y]
H [(Y**2)X]
I [(X**2)(Y**2)]

for the macro.
Data Type C*64
Default Value HELP ON EXPANSION
Degree of Polynomial
Description Indicate the highest degree of the polynomial. For example, if X2 is
the highest term in the polynomial, then DEGS=2. If only a flat
(constant) grid is derived, then DEGS=0.
Macro Parameter DEGS
Data Type I
Range 0 through 3
Default Value 0

Enter A Polynomial [Constant] Term

Description Real number which is the constant term for the desired polynomial
expansion.
Macro Parameter CONSTANT
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0
Enter B [X] Term Coefficient

Description Real number that is the coefficient for the X term in the polynomial
expansion.
Macro Parameter XCOF
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0
Enter C [Y] Term Coefficient

Description Real number that is the coefficient for the Y term in the polynomial
expansion.
Macro Parameter YCOF
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0
Enter D [XY] Term Coefficient

Description Real number that is the coefficient for the XY term in the
polynomial expansion.
Macro Parameter XYCF
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0

What to Enter on this Panel

information about values needed for each degree of the polynomial.

for the macro.
Data Type C*64
Default Value PARAMETERS FOR DEGREE = 0 OR DEGREE = 2
Term Expansions 0, 1, 2 Degree Equations

information on values needed for each degree of the polynomial
(see an example on page 162).
for the macro.
Data Type C*64
Default Value HELP ON EXPANSION

Enter E [(X**2)] Term Coefficient

Description Real number that is the coefficient for the X2 term in the
Macro Parameter X2CF
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0
Enter F [(Y**2)] Term Coefficient

Description Real number that is the coefficient for the Y2 term in the
Macro Parameter Y2CF
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0
Enter G [(X**2)Y] Term Coefficient

Description Real number that is the coefficient for the X2Y term in the
Macro Parameter X2YC
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0
Enter H [(Y**2)X] Term Coefficient

Description Real number that is the coefficient for the Y2X term in the
Macro Parameter Y2XC
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0

Enter I [(Y**2)(X**2)] Coefficient

Description Real number that is the coefficient for the Y2X2 term in the
Macro Parameter X2Y2
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0
ZCL PROCESSES
DATA BLOCK EVALUATE
BRANCH DATA BLOCK UTILITY

EXPORT-CPS-FILE
Macro Name EXPORT-CPS-FILE
Menu Option File Save As CPS-1 File
Purpose This macro exports a member file from an MFD to a CPS SAVE file.
You have the option of exporting an original or extended file.
Description You must input a member file of the type GRID, DATA, VERT, FALT,
or CNTR.
Results A CPS SAVE file on the requested file number.

Input File Name
Description Name of the file.
Data Type C*24
Range All attached GRID, DATA, VERT, FALT, and CNTR files.
o
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Default Value Searches all attached MFDs
Enter the Name of the CPS Save File

Description Name of the CPS SAVE File.
Macro Parameter CPSFILE
Data Type C*80
R2003.12.0 EXPORT-CPS-FILE 167

EXPORT-CPS-FILE: Parameters
Save File Number on the File

Description Specify the output SAVE file number on the disk file for the CPS
data. If SAVENUM = 1, then a new file is created; otherwise, an old
file is opened and appended to.
Macro Parameter SAVENUM
Data Type I
Range 1 through 100
Default Value 1
Format Type of the Output File

Description Specify the type of format to use. While XYZ is the default, a better
default for a grid file is EXTENDED.
Macro Parameter FRMTTYPE
Options
EXTENDED = Store the minimum and maximum X, Y and Z values, grid
increments and the number of rows and columns with the
grid file.
ORIGINAL = Store only the number of rows and columns with the grid
file.
XY = Output the data in an X, Y format, i.e., contour files.
XYZ = Output the data in X,Y, Z format, i.e., fault and vertex files.
XYZABW = Output the data in an XYZ, DZ/DX, DZ/DY, Z WT format.
XYZABCDW = Output the data in an X, Y, Z, DZ/DX, DZ/DY, DZ2/DXDY,
X WT, Y WT
Data Type C*12

Default Value XYZ meant for a data file
ZCL PROCESSES
EXPORTCPSFILE
R2003.12.0 EXPORT-CPS-FILE: Parameters 168

EXPORT-ZGF-FILE
Macro Name EXPORT-ZGF-FILE

Menu Option File Save As ZGF Flat File
Purpose This macro converts a graphics file (ZGF) to a flat ASCII file.
Description You must input a ZGF.
Results A flat (ASCII) graphics file.

Enter the ZGF Name
Description Name of the input ZGF graphics file.
Data Type C*80
Enter the Flat File Name

Description Name of the neutral graphics file for the flat file version of the
entire ZGF.
Data Type C*80
R2003.12.0 EXPORT-ZGF-FILE 169

EXPORT-ZGF-FILE: Parameters
Do You Want a Printed Report

Description Specify if a status report is to be produced. This report is output to
the processing window and gives you a message as each picture
name is transferred to the flat file.
Options
YES = Status report produced.
NO = No status report
produced.
Data Type C*4
Default Value YES
ZCL PROCESSES
EXPORT ZGF FILE
R2003.12.0 EXPORT-ZGF-FILE: Parameters 170

FASTCONTOURMAP
Macro Name FASTCONTOURMAP
Menu Option Features Contouring Fast Contour
Purpose This macro builds a grid and then generates a contour map from the
selected z field on your data file.
Description You are asked to supply the following input values:

well dataset
z field on the well dataset
a fault dataset (optional)
grid interval (optional)
contouring interval (optional)
ZGF name and picture name
Results A contour map of the grid created from the z field.
This Macro Uses Point Data

Use FASTMAPFROMGRID.ZCLMAC to make a fast map using gridded
data.

*Name of Data File
Description Name of the input control point file.
Macro Parameter DATA
Data Type C*24
oMFD for the Data File

Description The MFD that contains the input control point file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 FASTCONTOURMAP 171

FASTCONTOURMAP: Parameters
Number of Field in Data File to Grid/Contour

Description Specify the field on the control point file to grid and contour.
Data Type I
Default Value ZCL default first Z Value field
Name of Fault File (Optional)

Data Type C*24
Default Value: ZCL default
o
MFD for the Fault File
Description The MFD that contains the input fault file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Grid Interval
Description Desired grid increment.
Note: Seismic data runs very slowly with a small grid interval
Data Type R
Contour Interval
Description Interval between successive contours. Used when NCONTOUR is
less than or equal to zero.
Data Type R
Default Value 50.0
R2003.12.0 FASTCONTOURMAP: Parameters 172

FASTCONTOURMAP: Parameters
*The Graphics File Name for the Map

Description Name of the graphics file (ZGF) and picture ready to receive
graphics. If the map is projected, the PROJECTION setup
commands must be executed before the picture is opened. The
latitude and longitude parameters are required for projected maps
and are ignored otherwise.
Macro Parameter ZGF
Data Type C*80
Is the Graphics File New or Old

Description Specify whether the graphics file is old or new.
Macro Parameter OLDZGF
Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value OLD
The Picture Name

Description Name of the picture file to be created.
Macro Parameter PIC
Data Type C*80
ZCL PROCESSES
POINT GRIDDING PICTURE
BORDER LABEL N/E
CONTOUR DELETE FILE
R2003.12.0 FASTCONTOURMAP: Parameters 173

FASTMAPFROMGRID
Macro Name FASTMAPFROMGRID
Menu Option Features Contouring Fast Contour
Purpose This macro builds a contour map using a grid file. A map border and
border labels are also added to the map.

a grid dataset
contouring interval (optional)
graphics file and picture names
Results A contour map of the grid.

*Name of Grid to Contour
Description Name of the grid to contour.
Data Type C*24
o
Description The MFD that contains the input grid.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 FASTMAPFROMGRID 174

FASTMAPFROMGRID: Parameters
Name of Fault File (Optional)

Description Name of the fault file.You should specify this parameter if the input
grid was built using faults.
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the Input Fault File
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Contour Interval
Description Interval between successive contours. Specified in grid attribute
units.
Data Type R
Default Value 50.0
The Graphics File Name for the Map

graphics. If the map is projected, the PROJECTION setup
Latitude and Longitude parameters are required for projected maps
and are ignored otherwise.
Macro Parameter ZGF
Data Type C*80
R2003.12.0 FASTMAPFROMGRID: Parameters 175

FASTMAPFROMGRID: Parameters
Is the Graphics File New or Old

Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value NEW
The Picture Name

Macro Parameter PIC
Data Type C*80
Default Value DEFAULT PICTURE
ZCL PROCESSES
CONTOUR LABEL N/E
PICTURE BORDER
R2003.12.0 FASTMAPFROMGRID: Parameters 176

FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS
Macro Name FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS

Menu Option Operations Faults Calculate Fault Fields
Purpose You can use this macro to edit center-line fault files. When center-line
fault files are output from certain macros, they require editing before
you process them further in Point Gridding Plus. Once you have edited
the fields in a center-line fault file, you can use the enhanced fault
processing available in Point Gridding Plus.
The three field types used by Point Gridding Plus are:
vertical separation
heave
fault dip angle
When center-line fault traces emerge from the FAULT-SHRINKER
macro, the unedited fields usually do not have consistently good
vertical separation and heave values. In editing the center-line fault files
we have a good idea what the vertical separation values should be, but a
poor understanding of what the heaves should look like. Since these
heaves are used in Point Gridding Plus to produce the geometry of the
expanded fault polygon traces, they are the focus of the field value
editing.
Fault Dip Angle Field

Point Gridding Plus does not presently use the fault angle in the center-line
fault file. However, fault dip angle usually varies in a smooth and predictable
fashion, and we can concentrate our efforts on editing this field value. Then
we use FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS to recalculate the heave field values.
Description You must input a center-line fault file. The file must have vertical
separation, heave, and fault dip angle fields.
You select either the vertical separation or heave field to be backfilled.
This macro overwrites the values of the field you select with new values
based on the input values of the other two fields.
FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS uses simple right angle trigonometry in the
calculations. If one of the fields being used in the calculations has a
ZNON value, the ZNON is propagated to the new output field.
Results A fault file with a calculated third field value. The calculated value is
derived from the known values of the other two (out of three) fields:
vertical separation, heave, and fault dip angle fields.
R2003.12.0 FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS 177

FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS: Workflow
A typical workflow for preparing a center-line fault file for use in Point
Gridding Plus appears below.
Generate a pseudo-seismic file from grid nodes

using the GRID-TO-SEISMIC macro.
Convert hand-interpreted fault polygons to

center-line fault traces using the FAULT-SHRINKER
Post the fault traces derived from

FAULT-SHRINKER on a map. Visually check heave
and vertical separation values by using the
FAULT-PROFILING macro.
Backfill the fault angle field in the center-line fault file

using the FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS macro.
Examine the new fault angle fields by using the

FAULT-PROFILING macro. Using the Z-MAP Plus
Edit Edit/Create Data task, edit the fault angle
and vertical separation values.
Run the FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS macro again.

This brings the heave field values in line with the
edited vertical separation and fault angle fields.
Recheck the resulting heaves by running the

FAULT-PROFILING macro again on the new heave
values. Re-run Point Gridding Plus to obtain better
expanded fault geometries.
Workflow for Preparing a Center-line Fault File for Use in Point Gridding Plus
R2003.12.0 FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS: Workflow 178

FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS: Parameters

Select Input Center Line Fault File
Description This is the input file for which you want a new field value to be
calculated.
Macro Parameter FAULTIN
Data Type C*24
o
Description The MFD that contains the input fault file you want to use.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Choose the Correct X Field

Description Select the x field in the input fault file you want to use.
Data Type I
Range All X (EASTING) fields in the input file
Default Value ZCL default first field of the appropriate type
Choose the Correct Y field

Description Select the y field in the input fault file you want to use.
Data Type I
Range All Y (NORTHING) fields in the input file
Choose the Correct SEG I.D. Field

Description Select the SEG I.D. field in the input fault file you want to use.
Macro Parameter SEGID
Data Type I
Range All SEG I.D. fields in the input file
R2003.12.0 FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS: Parameters 179

Choose the Correct Vertical Separation Field

Description Vertical separation field in the input fault file.
Macro Parameter VSEP
Data Type I
Range All DELTA Z-THROW fields in the input file
Choose the Correct Fault Angle Field

Description Fault dip angle field in the input fault file. This field can be either in
radians or decimal degrees.
Note: FAULT-SHRINKER results are in decimal degrees.
Macro Parameter ANGL
Data Type I
Range All DIP ANGLE fields in the input file
Choose the Correct Heave field

Description Fault heave field in the input fault file.
Macro Parameter HEAV
Data Type I
Range All HEAVE fields in the input file
What Field Would You Like To Solve For

Description Specify the field whose value you want to calculate.
Options
BACKFILL ANGLE
BACKFILL HEAVE
BACKFILL THROW
Data Type C*16

Default Value BACKFILL ANGLE

Values in the Angle Field Are In

Description Specify the units in which fault dip angle is currently measured. If
METHOD (above) is BACKFILL ANGLE then this parameter is
ignored and the angle field is written out in decimal degrees.
Macro Parameter ANGLE
Options
DECIMAL DEGREES
RADIANS
Data Type C*16

Default Value DECIMAL DEGREES
Name of the Output Back-Filled Fault File

Description Name of the output file to which the new field values are to be
written.
Macro Parameter FLTOUT
Data Type C*24
Default Value FAULTS ANGLE FILLED
MFD to Write the Fault File to

Description The MFD that contains the output fault file.
Macro Parameter FLTOMFD
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
DELETE FILE FILE UTILITY
BRANCH DUAL DATA OPS
SINGLE DATA OPS

FAULT-BALANCER
Macro Name FAULT-BALANCER
Menu Option Operations Faults Balancer
Purpose This macro:

locates bifurcations in a centerline fault file
removes small segments of the crossing faults that are not needed
extends (snaps) fault traces that almost touch another fault so that
the two faults meet
adds vertices to each fault at the bifurcation points
balances vertical separation at the bifurcations
reports the Segment I.D. of faults that appear to have incorrect
patterns of vertical separation
You would normally use this macro before running Point Gridding Plus
and after running the FAULT-SHRINKER macro.
Description You are asked to specify:

name of the input fault file and its associated MFD
the vertical separation (throw) field on the input fault file
extent of the output report
tolerance distance to be used in determining whether one fault
touches another
maximum distance to extrapolate vertical separation (throw) along
the fault
name of the output balanced centerline fault
MFD for the output balanced centerline fault
Results Output from the macro includes a centerline fault file with
centerline fault traces snapped and clipped at bifurcation or
compensation points
the vertical separation along splitting faults balanced at the fault
trace intersection
You may need to perform minor touch up to the vertical separation
values calculated in this macro before running Point Gridding Plus.
R2003.12.0 FAULT-BALANCER 182

FAULT-BALANCER: Parameters

*Select Input Fault File (Center-Line)
Data Type C*24
o
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Fault File Throw Field

Description Vertical separation (Throw) field in the input fault file.
Macro Parameter FLTVSFLD
Data Type I
Range All vertical separation fields in the input fault file
Report Information During Execution

Description Specify the extent of the processing analysis report.
Macro Parameter REPORT
Options
NONE = No report, except error messages.
FULL = Full report.
Data Type C*4

Default Value FULL
R2003.12.0 FAULT-BALANCER: Parameters 183

Distance for Fault Closures

Description Specify the digitization precision tolerance. A fault whose end is
within this distance of another fault trace is considered a branch of
that fault trace, and is clipped or snapped accordingly. A fault trace
shorter than this distance is discarded.
Macro Parameter TOLERANC
Data Type R
Range > 0.0
Default Value ZCL default 1/256 of diagonal of bounding rectangle of fault data
Max Distance to Extrap. Throw Along Fault

Description Specify the distance at which vertical separation, extrapolated
along a fault trace loses significance.
Weight Of A Vertical Separation

The weight of a vertical separation is considered to decrease
exponentially along the fault: W = W.
Macro Parameter DISTANCE

Data Type R
Range > 0.0
Default Value ZCL default 1/16 of diagonal of bounding rectangle of fault data
Output Balanced Center-Line Fault

Description Name of the output fault file.
Data Type C*24

MFD for Output Faults

Description The MFD to use for storing the output fault file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
FAULT BALANCE

FAULT-CONTOURS
Macro Name FAULT-CONTOURS
Menu Option Macros Quick Look Contour Map (from Grid, Faults)
Purpose This macro allows you to put color-filled contours and a color bar on
your map and change the colors of your contours. The macro uses the
Profile Contouring algorithm with the FAULT option instead of the
PROFILE option. Therefore, the grids can be created using algorithms
other than Point Gridding Plus. You may also clip either inside or
outside of a polygon.
Description You are required to input:

a grid dataset
a fault dataset
You also have the option to input:
a polygon dataset to restrict contouring (if a polygon file is used,
you are asked whether to clip inside or outside the polygon)
minimum and contour maximum
line color information
Results A contour map using the above information.
R2003.12.0 FAULT-CONTOURS 186

FAULT-CONTOURS: Parameters

*Input Grid Name
Data Type C*24
o
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Name of the Fault File

Description Name of the input discontinuity fault file for contour generation.
Data Type C*24
oMFD
for the Input Fault File
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 FAULT-CONTOURS: Parameters 187

Description Specify how smooth the contour line should be. All contours are
made up of a series of connected straight lines. The longer these
lines, the rougher (coarser) the contour looks.
Options
interval
interval.
grid interval.
interval.
grid interval.
Data Type C*12


Description Specify the number of contour levels.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 50

Description Lowest contour level to be drawn. This is always the first contour
that is drawn.
Data Type R
Default Value ZCL default calculated from input data


Description Highest contour level to be drawn. This is always the last contour
that is drawn.
Data Type R

Data Type R
Rate at Which to Label Contours

Data Type I
Default Value 1
Size of the Labels on Contours

Description Height of the character in the contour label, in plotter units (in or
cm).
Data Type R
Contour Label Color Index Number

Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 9

Rate at Which Contours are Bold

contour, etc.
Data Type I
Default Value 0
Rate at Which Contours are Hachured

Data Type I
Default Value 0
Rate at Which Contours are Dashed

Description Rate for drawing dashed contours.
Data Type I
Default Value 0

Description Specify the method chosen to color contours and hence control the
meaning of the LINERATE parameter.
Options
STARTCLR color. LINERATE, HILTCOLR and
STARTCLR are described next.
Data Type C*12



in this color.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 3

Description Color index to begin highlighting contours.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 4
Rate at Which to Change Line Color

Description The contour color is changed at this rate.
If LINCLRTP = HIGHLIGHT, then every LINERATE-th contour is
colored in the STARTCLR color.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1

Description Specify whether or not the area between contours is color-filled.
Options
COLORFILL = Colorfill between the contours.
Data Type C*12



Description Specify whether or not contour lines are used to generate colorfill
polygons.
Options
YES = Use the contours to help generate the colorfill.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES

Description Indicate whether to draw the contour lines.
Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value POST

Description Specify the location of the color bar.
Options
NONE = No color bar
Data Type C*8

Default Value NONE


Description Specify the starting color index.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 56

Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1

Options
YE = Colorfill below the lowest contour.
S
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES

Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES

Name of the POLYGON File

Description Name of the input vertex file containing polygons. Contours are
clipped to the input polygon(s) for display.
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the Input Polygon File
Description The MFD that contains the input vertex (polygon) file.
Data Type I

when clipping file is specified.
Options
Data Type C*8


Data Type I
Default Value 1


BLNKDIST.
Data Type R
Draw the Profile Lines on the Picture

Description Indicate whether or not to draw profile lines on the picture. The
fault profile selected at the beginning of the macro is drawn as a
solid line, using the color index specified for PROFCOLR.
Macro Parameter PLOTFALT
Do not Answer YES to this Parameter Unless You Have Selected

Fault Profiles
If fault profiles are not selected and YES is specified here, the job
Options
YES = Profile lines are drawn on the picture.
NO = Profile lines are not drawn on the picture.
Default Value YES
Color for the Profile Lines

Description Color index for drawing profile lines.
Macro Parameter FALTCOLR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 14

Draw the Polygon on the Picture

Description Indicate whether or not to draw polygon lines on the picture. These
polygons are used to clip the colorfill and the contours.
Macro Parameter PLOTPOLY
Do not Answer YES to this Parameter unless you have selected

Polygon Files
If polygon files are not selected and YES is specified here, the job
Options
YES = Polygon lines are drawn on the picture.
NO = Polygon lines are not drawn on the picture.
Data Type C*4

Default Value NO
Color for the Polygon

Description Color index for drawing polygon lines.
Macro Parameter POLYCOLR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 16
ZCL PROCESSES
CONTOUR NEW BRANCH
POST DATA NEW

FAULT-DIP-SYMBOL
Macro Name FAULT-DIP-SYMBOL
Menu Option Operations Faults Dip Symbol Generator
Purpose This macro assists in symbolization of fault polygons produced by the

fault expansion phase of the Point Gridding Plus post-processing
module. This macro produces polylines. If drawn with hachures, these
lines mark the down-dip sides of certain fault polygons. The fault dip
polygons that receive the down-dip symbols are derived by expanding
fault centerlines using the associated fault geometry data. You can have
the macro draw the lines on the attached picture.

an input FALT file with centerline faults that has a Vertical
Separation (Throw) field and either a Dip Angle field or a Fault
Gap (Heave) field
the name of the output file for the symbolization polylines
whether depth units increase downward (Positive Depth) or
upward (Negative Depth)
whether Dip Angle is measured in degrees or radians
R2003.12.0 FAULT-DIP-SYMBOL 197

FAULT-DIP-SYMBOL: Results
Results A vertex (VERT) file containing polylines to mark the down-dip sides
of expanded faults. Optionally, these faults can be displayed in a
picture.
Polylines and Hachures Posted Using FAULT-DIP-SYMBOL.PICMAC
R2003.12.0 FAULT-DIP-SYMBOL: Results 198

FAULT-DIP-SYMBOL: Parameters

Input Centerline Fault File for Dip Symbols
Description The name of the input centerline fault file.
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the Input Center-line Fault File
Description The MFD that contains the input centerline fault file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Output VERT File for Dip Symbol Traces

Description Name of the output vertex file containing polylines to be posted
with hachures for down-dip symbolization.
Macro Parameter SYMBOLS
Data Type C*24
MFD for Output VERT File

Description MFD to use for storing the output vertex file.
Macro Parameter MFDSYMBL
Data Type C*24
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 FAULT-DIP-SYMBOL: Parameters 199

Sense of Increasing Depth

Description Indicate whether depth numbers increase downward or upward.
Macro Parameter DEPUNITS
Options
POSITIVE DEPTH = Numbers get larger the deeper you go.
NEGATIVE DEPTH = Numbers get smaller the deeper you go.
Data Type C*16

Default Value POSITIVE DEPTH
Units of Dip Angle

Description Dip Angle units can be measured in degrees, radians, or grads
Macro Parameter DIPUNIT
Options
RADIANS
DEGREES
GRADS
Data Type C*8

Default Value DEGREES
Level of Progress Reports

Description Specify how many intermediate reports are printed during module
execution.
Options
NONE = No report is generated.
PARTIAL = Messages printed at the start of major operations.
FULL = Intermediate messages printed during various processing
operations.
Data Type C*8

Default Value PATIAL

Draw the Faults with Dip on the Picture

Description Specify whether the faults with dip symbol are to be drawn on the
picture or not.
Macro Parameter DRAW
Options
YES = Label the sections.
NO = Do not label the sections.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
Color of the Faults

Description Color index for drawing primary lines.
Macro Parameter COLOR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 20
Length between Hachures

Description Length of the gap in hachure pattern, in plotter units (in or cm).
Macro Parameter HLNTH
Data Type R
Height of Hachure Line

Description Height of the hachure pattern for drawing primary lines, in plotter
units (in or cm).
Macro Parameter HSIZE
Data Type R
ZCL PROCESSES
DELETE FILE FLT D SYMB C
POST DATA NEW

FAULT-MIGRATION
Macro Name FAULT-MIGRATION
Menu Option Operations Faults Migrator
Purpose This macro migrates a set of centerline traces from their current map
position to the position they would have on a structure surface either
above or below the structure surface to which the faults belong. You
must input a fault file containing centerline faults with dip and vertical
separation. The isochore thickness (thickness between the horizon to
which the faults belong and the horizon to which the faults are to be
migrated) may be encoded on the input fault file or may be input
directly as a constant value. You can specify rates of change of dip and
vertical separation (throw) to model the migration of listric faults.
The thickness field in the input fault file is normally created by
interpolating values from an unfaulted isochore grid that represents
thickness between the surface for which faults exist and the surface to
which the faults are migrated.
After migration, some minor editing is usually required to fix separated
bifurcations and to remove or add faults that die out or startup on the
target structure surface. FAULT BALANCER.ZCLMAC can help
accomplish these aims.
Description You are asked to specify the following input value:

a required fault file, its associated MFD, and field parameters
whether larger or smaller values are deeper
constant dip value if there is no dip field
constant thickness value if there is no z field for isochore thickness
the change in dip angle and vertical separation (throw) for depth
unit
the minimum acceptable length of fault traces
the minimum acceptable vertical separation (throw) value
the output centerline fault file and its associated MFD
R2003.12.0 FAULT-MIGRATION 202

FAULT-MIGRATION: Results
Results A set of migrated centerline traces. Faults with small vertical separation
at the ends are shortened automatically.
Before You Use the Output File for Other Fault Processing Macros
You must eliminate the isochore thickness value from the file before using the
output file for other fault processing utilities.
Original Fault
Two Migrated Faults
R2003.12.0 FAULT-MIGRATION: Results 203

FAULT-MIGRATION: Parameters

*Select Input Fault File (Poly/Centerline)
Description Name of the input centerline fault file. This file must contain a
vertical separation (throw) field, and optionally contain dip angle
and thickness fields.
Data Type C*24
Range All attached FALT and VERT files
o
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Fault File Throw Field

Description The vertical separation (throw) field on the input fault file.
Macro Parameter FLTTFLD
Data Type I
Range All DELTA Z-THROW fields
Default Value ZCL default first vertical separation field
Fault File Dip-Field

Description The dip angle field on the input fault file.
Note: Values within this field should be between 0.0 to 90 degrees
(No negative value allowed)
Macro Parameter FLTAFLD
Data Type I
Range All Dip Angle fields
Default Value ZCL default first Dip Angle field
R2003.12.0 FAULT-MIGRATION: Parameters 204

Fault File Z Field (Formation Thickness)

Description The z field (formation thickness) on the input fault file.
Macro Parameter FLTZFLD
Data Type I
Range All Z VALUE fields
Default Value ZCL default first Z Value field
Are Deeper Values Larger or Smaller

Description Specify whether depth is measured in positive or negative units.
Options
Data Type C*16

Default Value POSITIVE DEPTH
Display Profiles on Up or Down Thrown Side

Description Specify the direction to migrate the fault traces.
Options
UP = Migrate the fault traces to a higher horizon.
DOWN = Migrate the fault traces to a lower horizon.
Data Type C*4

Default Value UP
Constant Dip Value if No Dip Field

Description Override value of the dip angle field. If DIPANGLE = 0, then the
value in the dip angle field on the input centerline fault file is used.
Macro Parameter DIPANGLE
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0

Constant Thickness if No Z Field

Description Override value for the thickness field. If THICKNES = 0, then the
value in the thickness field on the input centerline fault file is used.
Macro Parameter THICKNES
Data Type R
Change in Dip Angle for Unit of Depth

Description Change in dip angle per unit of increasing depth. This parameter is
used for listric faults.
Macro Parameter DELTADIP
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0
Change in Throw for Unit of Depth

Description Change in vertical separation (throw) per unit of increasing depth.
Macro Parameter DELTATHR
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0
Minimum Acceptable Length of Fault Traces

Description Minimum acceptable length for the existing fault traces. Shorter
fault traces are treated as unimportant and therefore are not written
to the output fault file.
Macro Parameter LENMIN
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0

Minimum Acceptable Throw Value

Description Minimum acceptable absolute vertical separation (throw) value of
the ends of the resulting fault traces. Smaller vertical separations
(throws) are treated as unimportant and are set to zero. Fault traces
with the absolute vertical separation (throw) values at the ends that
are less than THROWMIN have these ends cut before the traces are
written to the output file. Consequently, the resulting fault traces
have vertical separation (throw) values equal to zero at their ends,
but are shorter.
Macro Parameter THROWMIN
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0
Output Centerline Fault File

Description Name of the output centerline fault file.
Data Type C*24
MFD for Centerline Faults

Description MFD to contain the output centerline fault file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
FAULT MIGRATION

FAULT-PROFILING
Macro Name FAULT-PROFILING
Menu Option Operations Faults Profiler
Purpose This process creates a fault file and a vertex file which graphically
describe an attribute distribution along a centerline fault. This attribute
could be throw, heave or fault angle. The output, if displayed on a map
with the original centerline faults, provides a visual representation of
the chosen attribute field in the fault file. The output can be thought of
as a cross-section profile of the attribute laid on its side. The input fault
traces are the baseline for the cross section and represent a value of
zero for the attribute on the section. Positive deviations from the
centerline faults (positive throws, for instance) appear by default on the
upthrown side of the fault, while negatives appear on the downthrown
side. The output display from this process can be used for the following
purposes:
Identify reversals in the direction of throw along a fault.
Detect high variations in throw along the fault.
Evaluate how well the fault balances at bifurcations.
Using closed polygons, you can colorfill the area between the input
faults and the profile faults that result from this process. The closed
polygons consist of the input faults tied with the profile faults. You can
save both the polygon and the map view profile fault file.
Description You are asked for the:

required fault file and its field parameters
map scaling profile method
maximum profile height
depth in positive or negative units
side of trace on which the profile should appear
output fault and polygon profile file names
color and posting information for polygons and lines
Results A fault file and a vertex file which graphically describe an attribute
distribution along a centerline fault.
R2003.12.0 FAULT-PROFILING 208

FAULT-PROFILING: Parameters

*Select Fault File (Center Line w/Throw)
Description The name of the input centerline fault file. This file must contain a
vertical separation (throw) field, and can also contain dip angle and
thickness fields.
Data Type C*24
Range All attached DATA, VERT and FALT files
o
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
X Field to Use for Baseline Profile

Description Select the x field in the input fault file you want to use for the
baseline profile.
Data Type I
Range All X (EASTING) fields in the input fault file
Y Field to Use for Baseline Profile

Description Select the y field in the input fault file you want to use for the
baseline profile.
Data Type I
Range All Y (NORTHING) fields in the input fault file
R2003.12.0 FAULT-PROFILING: Parameters 209

SEG I.D. Field for Baseline Profile

Description Select the SEG I.D. field in the input fault file you want to use for
the baseline profile.
Macro Parameter SEGF
Data Type I
Range All SEG I.D. fields in the input fault file
Field Value that is to be Profiled

Description Select the field in the input fault file you want to use for the profile.
Macro Parameter FALTTFLD
Data Type I
Range All fields on the input fault file
Method for Map Scaling Profile

Description Method for defining the profile map scale.
Macro Parameter DEFMETH
Options
DEFAULT = Use the ZCL default
SPECIFY = User value specified by PHGHT
Data Type C*8

Default Value DEFAULT
Specify Maximum Profile Height

Description The maximum height of the profile. Used when DEFMETH =
SPECIFY
Macro Parameter PHGHT
Data Type R
Default Value 100.0

Depth in Positive or Negative Units

Description Specify whether depth is measured in positive or negative units.
Options
Data Type C*16

Default Value NEGATIVE DEPTH
Side of Traces Profiles Should Appear On

Description Specify where you want the profiles to appear in relation to the
center line trace.
Options
UP = Profiles should appear on the up-thrown side of the center line fault
traces.
DOWN = Profiles should appear on the down-thrown side of the center line
fault traces.
Data Type C*4

Default Value UP
Write the Output Files to MFDs

Description Indicate whether you want output files stored on MFDs.
Macro Parameter KEEP
Options
YES = Store output files on MFDs.
NO = Do not store output files on MFDs.
Data Type C*4

Default Value NO
*Output Fault File (w/Throws in Map View)

Description Name of the output fault file. This file contains the fault vertical
separation (throws) as map view profiles.
Data Type C*24

MFD for the Output Faults

Description The MFD to use for storing the output centerline fault file.
Macro Parameter MFDFLOUT
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
*Output Profile Polygon File

Description Name of output vertex file. This file contains the fault vertical
separation (throw) profiles as closed map view polygons which may
be colorfilled or displayed as dashed lines to enhance the final map.
Data Type C*24
MFD for the Output Polygons

Description The MFD to use for storing the output vertex file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Add the Profile to the Current Picture

Description Specify whether you want the profile added to the current picture.
Macro Parameter GRAPH
Options
YES = Add the profile to the current picture.
NO = Do not add the profile to the current picture.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES

Color to Use for Polygon

Description Specify the color index for the polygon.
Macro Parameter CPOLY
Data Type I
Default Value 27
Color to Use for Polygon Line

Description Specify the color index for drawing the polygon line.
Macro Parameter LPOLY
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 28
Post the Center Line Fault Traces

Description Specify whether to add center line fault traces to the current picture.
Macro Parameter ADDCL
Options
YES = Add the fault traces to the current picture.
NO = Do not add the fault traces to the current picture.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
Color for Centerline Traces

Description Specify the color index for drawing the center line traces.
Macro Parameter CCLNS
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 29
ZCL PROCESSES
COLOR POLYGONS DATA BLOCK
DATA BLOCK PRINT DATA BLOCK UTILITY
DATA STATISTICS DELETE FILE
FAULT PROFILING FILE UTILITY
POST DATA NEW BRANCH

FAULT-SHRINKER
Macro Name FAULT-SHRINKER
Menu Option Operations Faults Shrinker
Purpose This macro automatically converts faults with gaps to centerline faults.
If a seismic data file is also input, then the process calculates vertical
separations (throw), and heave and dip angle values at those points
where the seismic line crosses the newly created centerline faults. If the
faults are already centerline faults, the macro calculates vertical
separation at seismic crossings, with heave returned as zero and dip as
ninety. The centerline faults with vertical separation that are output by
this macro are standard inputs to Point Gridding Plus.
If a fault and a seismic line meet at a very acute angle, you may not
wish to use that seismic line to calculate vertical separation. The size of
acceptable angles is determined by the Code for Minimum
Seismic/Fault Angle parameter.
When seismic data is not available, fault vertical separation can
sometimes be calculated using geologic rules of thumb. In this situation
you can specify parameters such as the average fault dip angle and the
dip direction that the module uses to estimate fault vertical separation.
Note that only the x, y, and ID fields are copied from the input fault file
to the output fault file. The macro creates all other fields, including:
vertical separation (throw), dip, and heave.
R2003.12.0 FAULT-SHRINKER 214

FAULT-SHRINKER: Description

a required fault file (polygons or centerline)
a seismic data file (optional)
the z field for calculating vertical separation (throw)
number of points for calculating vertical separation (throw)
tolerance for calculating centerlines
maximum heave of any fault polygon
distance for fault polygon closure
minimum heave of any fault centerline
whether or not the fault is convex, concave, or neither
whether to use the orientation of the fault to find down dip
dip angle (optional)
dip direction (optional)
whether or not to analyze the consistency of the vertical separation
(throw)/dip/heave data
type of report output
tolerance number for fault seismic crossings
names of all output files and MFDs
Results This macro always outputs a centerline fault file. This file contains fault
vertical separation, fault polygon gap, and fault polygon dip angle
fields. The original fault polygons can be reconstructed from the
centerlines and the fault gap data stored at every vertex of each
centerline fault.
If seismic data is input, a vertex exists along each centerline fault where
the seismic line crosses the fault, and a vertical separation value is
stored in the corresponding field.
If general fault dip direction and dip angle, or other rules, are used to
compute vertical separation, every vertex on the centerline file has a
vertical separation value, a fault gap value, and a fault dip angle value.
However, if fault geometry information is derived only from seismic
information, then most output vertices have void marker values for
vertical separation, and all vertices have void marker values for fault
dip angle.
R2003.12.0 FAULT-SHRINKER: Description 215

FAULT-SHRINKER: Results (continued)
Point Gridding Plus interpolates values of vertical separation at fault

vertices that have void marker values. You can request a centerline fault
file with missing values filled in as would be done in Point Gridding
Plus. This file can be listed or plotted for quality control purposes.
In addition, Point Gridding Plus automatically expands fault centerlines
into fault polygons. To verify that this macro is producing good
centerline values, you can request output of an expanded fault polygon
file. This file can be compared graphically with the input fault polygon
file.
At your request, the Fault Shrinker analyzes output faults for possible
errors such as faults with reversal of vertical separation along the fault.
In this case the fault analysis is printed to the screen.

*Input Fault File
Description Name of the input fault file. This may be a polygon or centerline
fault file.
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for Input Centerline Fault File
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 FAULT-SHRINKER: Results (continued) 216

FAULT-SHRINKER: Parameters
Input Seismic Data File

Description Name of the input seismic data formatted with X, Y, Z, and a line
ID field. The line ID field can contain line numbers, line names or
SegIDs.
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the Input Seismic File
Description The MFD that contains the input seismic data file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Seismic File Z-Field to Calculate Throw With

Description The z field in the seismic data file.
Macro Parameter ZFLD
Data Type I
Range All Z VALUE fields
Tolerance to Calculate Center-Lines

Description Raster tolerance used in finding fault centerlines. Should be about
1/100 of fault range in x or y.
Data Type R
Default Value 100
R2003.12.0 FAULT-SHRINKER: Parameters 217

Number Larger than Maximum Heave

Description Maximum heave of any input fault polygon. This is an estimate
which must be larger than the true maximum heave. This parameter
is used to improve the speed of this module.
Macro Parameter HEAVEMAX
Data Type R
Length to Test Fault Polygon Closure

Description Tolerance used to determine whether an input fault polygon is
closed or open. Normally set to a small fraction of the range of the
input fault data in x or y.
Macro Parameter CLOSURE
Data Type R
Minimum Heave of any Fault Center-Line

Description Minimum heave to assign to an input fault centerline trace for
which heave cannot be calculated. Should be 0.0 if all the input
faults are true polygons with non-zero interiors. Otherwise it should
be less than the distance between adjacent data points.
Macro Parameter WIDTHMIN
Data Type R
Side of Fault Assumed Down Dip When No Throw

Description Specify whether the convexity of a fault trace should be used to
help determine which side is down dip. Used only when seismic
data is not available.
Macro Parameter CONVEXTY
Options
CONCAVE = Down dip on concave side of fault trace.
CONVEX = Down dip on convex side of fault trace.
NONE = Do not use this method.
Data Type C*8

Default Value NONE

Use Fault Orientation in Finding Down Dip

Description Specify whether the orientation of a fault relative to a general
direction of dip should be used to help determine which side of a
fault trace is down dip. Used only when seismic data is not
available.
Macro Parameter PRFDIREC
Options
YES = Use this method.
NO = Do not use this method.
Data Type C*4

Default Value NO
Optional Constant Dip Angle (in Degrees)

Description Assigned constant dip angle for all faults, in degrees. Used when
PRFDIREC = YES or CONVEXTY = CONVEX or CONCAVE.
Macro Parameter DIPANGLE
Data Type R
Range 0.0 through 90.0 degrees
Default Value 45.0
Optional Preferred Dip Direction

Description Preferred dip direction. Required when PRFDIREC = YES.
Macro Parameter DIPDIREC
Data Type R
Range 360.0 through 360.0 degrees

Analyze and Report Throw, Dip, Heave Reversals

Description Specify whether vertical separation (throw), dip and heave values
assigned to each fault trace are analyzed for geologic consistency.
Faults that display reversal of vertical separation (throw) are listed
on the monitor.
Macro Parameter ANALYSIS
Options
NO ANALYSIS = Perform no analysis.
ANALYSIS = Perform analysis and write results to the screen
Data Type C*12

Default Value ANALYSIS
Points on Line Used To Calculate Throw

Description Specify how z values along a seismic line are used to compute
vertical separation (throw) across a fault.
Macro Parameter EXTRAPLT
Options
CLOSEST 2PTS = Compute the difference between closest points on
opposite sides of the fault.
CLOSEST 4PTS = Use the nearest two data points on both sides of the fault.
Data Type C*12

Default Value CLOSEST 4 PTS
Amount of Information to Report

Description Specify how many intermediate reports are printed during macro
execution.
Options
NONE = No report
PARTIAL = Messages printed at the start of major operations.
FULL = Intermediate messages printed during various processing
operations.
Data Type C*8

Default Value PARTIAL

Tolerance Number for Fault Seismic Crossings

Description Tolerance used to detect seismic lines crossing faults at extremely
acute angles. The default value of 2.0 rejects crossings at angles
less than 30 degrees. The larger the value for RATIO, the smaller
the angle used to reject crossings. Keep in mind that RATIO is the
cosecant of the angle between a seismic line and a fault centerline.
For example, a value of 1.03 = 76 degrees; 1.41 = 45 degrees, 2 =
30 degrees; 42.9 = 20 degrees, 5.8 = 10 degrees.
Macro Parameter RATIO
Data Type R
Default Value 2.0
Name Output Center-Line Fault File

Description Name of the output centerline fault file.
Data Type C*24
MFD for Output Center-Line Fault File

Description The MFD to use for storing the output centerline fault file.
Macro Parameter MFDFLOUT
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Name Output Center-Line Fault File w/Throws

Description Name of the output centerline fault file in which ZNONs in the
vertical separation (throw) and/or dip fields have been replaced by
linearly interpolated values. In order to output this file, the input
fault file must have vertical separation (throw), dip angle, and heave
fields.
Macro Parameter INTFTOUT
Data Type C*24

MFD for Output Center-Line Faults w/ Throws

Description The MFD to use for storing the output centerline fault filein
which ZNONs in the vertical separation (throw) and / or dip fields
have been replaced by linearly interpolated values.
Macro Parameter MFDINTFT
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Name Output Expanded Fault File

Description Name of the output expanded fault file. In order to output this file,
the input centerline fault file must contain both a vertical separation
(throw) and a dip angle field. This file can be used for error
checking when compared to the input fault file.
Macro Parameter EXPFTOUT
Data Type C*24
MFD for Output Expanded Fault File

Description The MFD to use for storing the output expanded fault file.
Macro Parameter MFDEXPFT
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
FAULT SHRINKER

FAULT-LISTING
Macro Name FIELD-LISTING
Menu Option Macros Utilities Data File Field Listing
Purpose This macro lists the field descriptors for the selected dataset.
Description You can input a well, seismic, fault, contour, text or vertex dataset.
Results A listing of statistics on the dataset and a listing of the fields on the
dataset.
For example:
FALT FILE: ANTICLINE FAULTS
CREATED: 19 MAY 92
AT: 17:23
NUMBER OF FIELDS = 3
NUMBER OF WORDS PER RECORD = 3
NUMBER OF DATA RECORDS = 297
MINIMUM X-COORD = 36991.00
MAXIMUM X-COORD = 138884.0
MINIMUM Y-COORD = 33020.00
MAXIMUM Y-COORD = 184600.0
DEFAULT FIRST NUMBER

FIELD NAME DATA TYPE FORMAT WORD OF WORDS ZNON
X-FIELD X (EASTING) G17.8 1 1
0.1000000E+31
Y-FIELD Y (NORTHING) G17.8 2 1
0.1000000E+31
SEG I.D. SEG I.D. G10.3 3 1
0.1000000E+31
R2003.12.0 FAULT-LISTING 223

FAULT-LISTING: Parameters
PROMPT and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

*Enter the File to Display
Description Specify the dataset to input.
Data Type C*24
Range All attached DATA, FALT, VERT, CNTR, TEXT, or DWEL
files
o
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Diskfile Name (Blank lists to screen)

Description To save the field listing to a disk file, specify a file name. If you
leave this field blank, the field listing appears in the Z-MAP Plus
System Window.
Macro Parameter DISKOUT
Data Type String
Default Value Print to the Z-MAP Plus System Window
ZCL PROCESSES
FILE INFO
R2003.12.0 FAULT-LISTING: Parameters 224

FILL-BORDER
Macro Name FILL-BORDER
Menu Option Macros Graphics Color-filled Border
Purpose This macro allows you to fill the map area of interest, offsets, or both,
with a selected color. You may execute the macro once to fill in the area
of interest with one color, then execute the macro a second time to fill
in the offsets of the map in another color. If you are running
Z-MAP Plus, you can display the colors in the graphics screen by
selecting View Full Display in the Z-MAP Plus window.
Description You have the following options:

inside
outside
both
Results Colorfills the area of interest and/or the offsets of the map displayed in
the current picture.
R2003.12.0 FILL-BORDER 225

FILL-BORDER: Parameters

*Select the Fill Type
Description Type of color coverage desired either inside or outside the border.
Options
INSIDE = Color inside the map AOI.
OUTSIDE = Color outside the map AOI, in the map offsets.
INSIDE + OUTSIDE = Color the entire map area.
Data Type C*16

Enter the Color Index for the Fill Color

Description Color index to use for colorfilling map polygon.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 17
ZCL PROCESSES
BORDER FILL
R2003.12.0 FILL-BORDER: Parameters 226

FISHNET-PLOT
Macro Name FISHNET-PLOT
Menu Option Features Contouring 3D Fishnet Plot
Purpose Use this macro to generate an isometric plot.
Description You must specify:

name of the graphics file
name of the new picture
name of the input grid file
Results An isometric plot, also known as a perspective map, that reveals surface
detail that may not be apparent in the conventional contour map.

Enter the Graphics File (ZGF) Name
Description Name of the graphics file (ZGF) that contains the fishnet picture.
Description ZGFNAME
Data Type C*80

Description Specify whether the graphics file (ZGF) is old or new.
Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value OLD
Enter the New Picture Name

Macro Parameter PICNAME
Data Type C*80
R2003.12.0 FISHNET-PLOT 227

FISHNET-PLOT: Parameters
Left Margin Space

Description Specify the size of the left margin, in plotter units (in or cm).
Macro Parameter LEFT
Data Type R
Right Margin Space

Description Specify the size of the right margin, in plotter units (in or cm).
Macro Parameter RIGHT
Data Type R
Top Margin Space

Description Specify the size of the top margin in plotter units (in or cm).
Macro Parameter TOP
Data Type R
Bottom Margin Space

Description Specify the size of the bottom margin in plotter units (in or cm).
Macro Parameter BOTTOM
Data Type R
*Enter the Input Grid

Data Type C*24
R2003.12.0 FISHNET-PLOT: Parameters 228

o
Macro Parameter MFD
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Plot a Mesh in Null Areas

Description Specify whether to plot the mesh in null (ZNON) areas.
Macro Parameter NULL
Options
DISPLAY = Display a mesh in ZNON areas.
DO NOT DISPLAY = Do not display a mesh in ZNON areas.
Data Type C*16

Default Value DISPLAY
Substitute Value for ZNON

Description Substitute value to plot at ZNONs, if NULL = DISPLAY. To have a
flat grid lattice drawn over null grid values, you must enter a
substitute value for ZNON. If the default is taken, the minimum
grid value is used for the ZNON replacement.
Macro Parameter NULLSUB
Data Type R
Default Value ZNON
Plot a Skirt at the Bottom of the Plot

Description Specify if a skirt is to be drawn at the base of the picture.
Macro Parameter SKIRT
Options
DISPLAY = Display a skirt.
DO NOT DISPLAY = Do not display a skirt.
Data Type C*16

Default Value DISPLAY

Value of the Skirt

Description Level of the skirt if one is being drawn.
Macro Parameter SKIRTSUB
Data Type R
Default Value ZCL default ZMIN of the grid
Direction of the Mesh Lines

Description Direction(s) in which to draw fishnet.
Options
X ONLY = Draw fishnet in the x direction only.
Y ONLY = Draw fishnet in the y direction only.
X AND Y = Draw the fishnet in both directions.
NEITHER = Do not draw the fishnet.
Data Type C*8

Default Value X AND Y
Plot Which Surface(s)

Description Draw upper, lower, or both surfaces.
Macro Parameter SURFACE
Options
UPPER ONLY = Draw the upper surface only. The surface is only seen from
above the grids with hidden line removed.
LOWER ONLY = Draw the lower surface only. The surface is only seen from
below the grids with hidden lines removed.
BOTH = Draw both surfaces. The surface is viewed from above and
below the grids or with hidden lines removed.
Data Type C*12

Default Value UPPER ONLY
Color of the Mesh Lines

Description Color index of the mesh lines.
Macro Parameter LINCLR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 14

Color of the Border Labels

Description Color index of the border labels.
Macro Parameter LABCLR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 11
Color of the Axis Lines

Description Color index of the axis lines.
Macro Parameter AXISCLR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 10
Window the Plot

Description Specifies whether to display all or only part of a grid.
Macro Parameter WINDOW
Options
WINDOW = Display a specified part of the grid.
DO NOT WINDOW = Display the whole grid.
Data Type C*16

Default Value DO NOT WINDOW
Starting Column
Description First column to plot. Used when WINDOW = WINDOW.
Macro Parameter STARTCOL
Data Type I
Default Value 1 first column of the grid
Ending Column
Description Last column to plot. Used when WINDOW = WINDOW.
Macro Parameter ENDCOL
Data Type I
Default Value ZCL default last column of the grid

Starting Row
Description First row to plot. Used when WINDOW = WINDOW.
Macro Parameter STARTROW
Data Type I
Default Value 1 top row of the grid
Ending Row
Description Last row to plot. Used when WINDOW = WINDOW.
Macro Parameter ENDROW
Data Type I
Default Value ZCL default last row of the grid
Azimuthal Angle of the Plot

Description Horizontal angle measured clockwise from the y axis, in degrees.
Macro Parameter AZIMUTH
Data Type R
Range 0.0 through 360.0
Elevation Angle of the Plot

Description Angle above or below the reference point.
Macro Parameter ANGLE
Data Type R
Range 0.0 through 360.0
X Reference Point
Description The x value for the reference point.
Macro Parameter XREF
Data Type R
Default Value ZCL default 1/2(XMAX XMIN) of the input grid

Y Reference Point
Description The y value for the reference point.
Macro Parameter YREF
Data Type R
Default Value ZCL default 1/2(YMAX YMIN) of the input grid
Z Reference Point
Description The z value for the reference point.
Macro Parameter ZREF
Data Type R
Default Value ZCL default 1/2(ZMAX ZMIN) of the input grid
Distance to View the Surface

Description Viewing location is this distance from the point (XREF, YREF,
ZREF).
Macro Parameter RANGE
Data Type R
Default Value ZCL default 8 * largest grid dimension
Label the Plot How

Description Specify how to label the axes.
Macro Parameter LABELS
Options
NO LABELS = Do not label the axes.
Z ONLY = Label just the z axis.
X AND Y = Label just the x and y z axes.
ALL THREE = Label all three axes.
Data Type C*12

Default Value ALL THREE

Label Format for the X-Axis

Description Specify the format to use when labeling the x axis.
Macro Parameter XLABLFMT
Options
DECIMAL = Use decimal notation.
SCIENTIFIC = Use scientific notation.
INTEGER = Use integer notation.
Data Type C*12

Default Value DECIMAL
Number of Digits Right of Decimal

Description Number of places to the right of the decimal when XLABLFMT =
DECIMAL or SCIENTIFIC.
Macro Parameter XDECIMAL
Data Type I
Default Value ZCL default based on data
Number of Intermediate Tick Marks

Description Number of tick marks between labels on the x axis.
Macro Parameter XTICKS
Data Type I
Starting Label for the X-Axis

Description Starting x label value, in engineering units.
Macro Parameter XLBLSTRT
Data Type R
Increment Between Labels

Description Increment between labels on the x axis, in engineering units.
Macro Parameter XLBLINC
Data Type R

Ending Label for the X-Axis

Description Ending x label value, in engineering units.
Macro Parameter XLBLEND
Data Type R
Size of the X-Axis Labels

Description Height of the x labels, in engineering units.
Macro Parameter XLBLHGHT
Data Type R
Scale on the X-Axis

Description Scale factor in the x direction relative to y and z.
Macro Parameter XSCALE
Data Type R
Default Value 1.0
Label Format for the Y-Axis

Description Format to use when labeling the y axis.
Macro Parameter YLABLFMT
Options
Data Type C*12


Description Number of places to the right of the decimal when YLABLFMT =
Macro Parameter YDECIMAL
Data Type I


Description Number of tick marks between labels on the y axis.
Macro Parameter YTICKS
Data Type I
Starting Label for the Y-Axis

Description Starting y label value, in engineering units.
Macro Parameter YLBLSTRT
Data Type R

Description Increment between labels on the y axis, in engineering units.
Macro Parameter YLBLINC
Data Type R
Ending Label for the Y-Axis

Description Ending y label value, in engineering units.
Macro Parameter YLBLEND
Data Type R
Size of the Y-Axis Labels

Description Height of the y labels, in engineering units.
Macro Parameter YLBLHGHT
Data Type R
Default Value .ZCL default

Scale on the Y-Axis

Description Scale factor in the y direction relative to x and z.
Macro Parameter YSCALE
Data Type R
Default Value 1.0
Label Format for the Z-Axis

Description Format to use when labeling the z axis.
Macro Parameter ZLABLFMT
Options
Data Type C*12


Description Number of places to the right of the decimal when ZLABLFMT =
Macro Parameter ZDECIMAL
Data Type I

Description Number of tick marks between labels on the z axis.
Macro Parameter ZTICKS
Data Type I
Starting Label for the Z-Axis

Description Starting z label value, in engineering units.
Macro Parameter ZLBLSTRT
Data Type R


Description Increment between labels on the z axis in engineering units.
Macro Parameter ZLBLINC
Data Type R
Ending Label for the Z-Axis

Description Ending z label value, in engineering units.
Macro Parameter ZLBLEND
Data Type R
Size of the Z-Axis Labels

Description Height of the z labels, in engineering units.
Macro Parameter ZLBLHGHT
Data Type R
Default Value .ZCL default
Scale on the Z-Axis

Description Scale factor in the z direction relative to x and y.
Macro Parameter ZSCALE
Data Type R
ZCL PROCESSES
ISOMETRIC PICTURE BORDER
ISOMETRIC PLOT DATA BLOCK
DATA BLOCK UTILITY BRANCH
GRID STATISTICS

GEOSORT
Macro Name GEOSORT
Menu Option Macros Geophysics Geographical Sorting
Purpose This macro puts segments of the same line back into geographic order.
The input for the GEOSORT macro is a line file where the segments of
the same line are not sequential on the file. This macro is primarily
used for seismic data.

a dataset containing lines to be sorted (required fields include SEG
I.D., X (Easting), Y (Northing), and Line Name)
a tolerance value that is used to identify disjointed endpoints for
the same line
an output file name
Results An output dataset with lines sorted correctly.

Enter the File to Sort Geographically
Description Name of the input file. File must contain x, y, Segment I.D. and
Line Name fields.
Data Type C*24
oMFD for the Input File

Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 GEOSORT 239

GEOSORT: Parameters
Tolerance for Duplicate Points

Description Maximum distance to connect lines. When the endpoints of two
segments (adjacent on the file) are within TOLERANC of each
other, the first point of the second segment is removed and the
segments are given the same Segment I.D.
Macro Parameter TOLER
Data Type R
Default Value 1.0
Number of Fields for the Sort (13)

Description Number of fields to be sorted.
Macro Parameter NFIELDS
Data Type I
Default Value 1
Sort Field 1
Description First of up to three fields on which to sort. Should be the Line Name
field.
Macro Parameter SORTFLD1
Data Type I
Sort Field 2
Description Second of up to three fields on which to sort. Should be the SegID
field.
Data Type I
Sort Field 3
Description Third of up to three fields on which to sort. Should be the new
sequence field (not yet created by this macro).
Data Type I
R2003.12.0 GEOSORT: Parameters 240

GEOSORT: Parameters
Enter the Resulting File

Data Type C*24
MFD for Output File

Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
GEOGRAPHIC CONNCT GEOGRAPHIC SORT
DELETE FILE SORT
R2003.12.0 GEOSORT: Parameters 241

GRIDANDMAPX
Macro Name GRIDANDMAPX
Menu Option Macros Quick Look Contour Map(from Data)
Purpose This macro builds a contour map by gridding a z field on a data file and
contouring the resultant grid. It also adds a border, border labels and
posts the well points. All defaults are used in posting and labeling and
coarse contour density is used for speed.

a well dataset
a z field on the well dataset
a grid increment (optional)
the contouring interval (optional)
Results A contour map of the grid created from the z field.

*ZGF Name
graphics. If the map is to be projected, the PROJECTION setup
Latitude and Longitude parameters are required for projected maps
and ignored otherwise.
Macro Parameter ZGF
Data Type C*80
R2003.12.0 GRIDANDMAPX 242

GRIDANDMAPX: Parameters
New or Old ZGF

Options
Data Type C*3

Default Value NEW
Picture Name
Description Name of the picture file to be opened or created.
Macro Parameter PIC
Data Type C*80
Default Value: DEFAULT PICTURE
Well Data to Post

Description Name of the input control point file.
Macro Parameter WELLS
Data Type C*24
Range Searches all input data files
o
MFD for the Input Well Data
Description The MFD that contains the input control point file.
Macro Parameter MFD1
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 GRIDANDMAPX: Parameters 243

Field to Post in the Well Data

Description Field in the control point file to post.
Macro Parameter WELLFILD
Data Type I
Range All Z Value fields in the input file
Fault File for Contouring

Data Type C*24
o
Macro Parameter MFDFAL
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Grid Interval
Description Desired grid increment.
Note: A small grid increment for seismic data will run slowly.
Data Type Real

Contour Interval
Macro Parameter INTERVAL
Data Type R
Default Value 1.0
ZCL PROCESSES
POINT GRIDDING POST DATA
PICTURE CONTOUR
BORDER LABEL N/E

GRID-LT-EQ-GT
Macro Name GRID-LT-EQ-GT
Menu Option Modeling Boolean Grid
Purpose This macro is most useful to output a Boolean grid of 0.0s and 1.0s to
indicate where a formation lies at each node, for example, below, equal
to, or above the Oil Water Contact level.
Description This macro reads an input grid and produces an output grid where each
node in the input grid is replaced by a flag value that indicates whether
the input Z value is Less Than, Equal To, or Greater Than a designated
Z level value.
GRID-LT-EQ-GT uses the following input values:
grid file
Z level and equality tolerance setting
Flag values
Results Creates an output grid with flags marking each designated node point
as Greater Than, Equal To, or Less Than the given Z level.

*Select Input Grid File
Description Enter the input grid to be flagged
Data Type C*24
Range All grid files that reside in the chosen directory path
Default Value REQUIRED
Data Input File

Description MFD for the input grid
Data Type Integer
Range
Default Value GRID
R2003.12.0 GRID-LT-EQ-GT 246

GRID-LT-EQ-GT: Parameters
Output Grid File

Description Output flag grid name
Data Type C*24
Range
Default Value GRID
Output Data File

Description MFD for output grid
Data Type Integer
Range 0 through 5
Default Value 1
Z Level Designation
Description Z level compared with grid values
Macro Parameter ZLEVEL
Data Type Real
Range
Default Value None
Z Level Tolerance
Description Tolerance for equality to Z level
Macro Parameter ZTOLER
Data Type Real
Range 0 and above
Default Value 0
R2003.12.0 GRID-LT-EQ-GT: Parameters 247

GRID-LT-EQ-GT: Parameters
Equality Flag
Description Flag value for equality to Z level
Macro Parameter EQFLAG
Data Type Real
Range
Default Value 0
Less Than Flag

Description Flag for grid value below Z level
Macro Parameter LTFLAG
Data Type Real
Range
Default Value 0
Greater Than Flag

Description Flag for grid value greater than Z level
Macro Parameter GTFLAG
Data Type Real
Range
Default Value 1
ZCL PROCESSES
R2003.12.0 GRID-LT-EQ-GT: Parameters 248

GRID-TO-SEISMIC
Macro Name GRID-TO-SEISMIC

Grid-to-Seismic Lines Converter
Purpose This macro converts the rows and columns of a grid to seismic lines
and concatenates them together in one output seismic file (dataset).
You can specify whether to output:
N-S lines (columns)
W-E lines (rows)
both N-S lines and W-E lines
Description Using this process, you may create a seismic file for use in conjunction
with the Fault Shrinker macro.
You are asked to specify the following values:
name of the output seismic file and where to store it.
which lines are to be converted
Results A seismic dataset that contains the x and y values for each grid node
location, with a shotpoint number that is derived from the y value and a
line name derived from the x value.
Proper Sequential Line Name and Shotpoint Record

To generate a file that contains proper sequential line name and shotpoint
number records, you must implement the Data Enumeration macro twice on
the same file, entering the key field first for Line Name and second for
Shotpoint Number. Since this macro creates only Segment I.D. fields, you
next need to export the final file and import it reading in one of the Segment
I.D. fields as the line name and the other as the Shotpoint Number.
For example:
X (EASTING) Y (NORTHING) SHOT POINT LINE NAME Z VALUE
0.28920E+07 0.23600E+07 0.23600E+07 0.28920E+07 1999.2
0.28920E+07 0.23620E+07 0.23620E+07 0.28920E+07 2048.6
0.28920E+07 0.23640E+07 0.23640E+07 0.28920E+07 2121.3
0.28920E+07 0.23660E+07 0.23660E+07 0.28920E+07 2201.1
0.28920E+07 0.23680E+07 0.23680E+07 0.28920E+07 2278.5
0.28920E+07 0.23700E+07 0.23700E+07 0.28920E+07 2350.6
0.28920E+07 0.23720E+07 0.23720E+07 0.28920E+07 2424.1
R2003.12.0 GRID-TO-SEISMIC 249

GRID-TO-SEISMIC : Parameters

*Enter the Name of the Grid File
Data Type C*24
o
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
*Name of the Output Seismic File

Description Name of the merged output data file.
Macro Parameter SEISOUT
Data Type C*24
MFD of Output Seismic File

Description The MFD to use for storing the output seismic file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 GRID-TO-SEISMIC : Parameters 250

GRID-TO-SEISMIC: Parameters
Which Lines (N-S, W-E, BOTH)

Description Specify which lines are to be converted into seismic lines.
Macro Parameter WHICH
Options
N-S = Columns
W-E = Rows
N-S and W-E = Rows and columns
Data Type C*12

Default Value N-S
ZCL PROCESSES
SPAWN GRID TO DATA
SORT EXPORT
IMPORT MERGE
DELETE FILE BRANCH
R2003.12.0 GRID-TO-SEISMIC: Parameters 251

HAND-CONTOUR
Macro Name HAND-CONTOUR
Menu Option Macros Geophysics Seismic Hand-contour Assist
Purpose This macro assists you in contouring interpreted 2D seismic data by

hand. You can not use 3D seismic data with this macro. The macro
linearly interpolates along seismic lines and outputs the interpolated
values for the selected horizon to a file. You may then post these values
on your basemap or use them as a basis for hand contouring.
Input File - Required Sort Order

The input file must be sorted by line name or line number and shotpoint
number before this macro can be executed.
Fault and other discontinuities are honored.

The purpose of the discontinuity field is to show where a horizon
begins and where a horizon ends. Interpolated values at the calculated
contour crossing points are marked with discontinuity field values of 0.
High and low inflection points along the line are marked with
user-selected discontinuity values. The discontinuity values are added
to the existing discontinuity field or if there is no discontinuity field,
one is appended to the input file.
For posting on a map, the output discontinuity field values need to be
copied into a new symbol type field. The 0.0 values assigned for
contour crossings need to be biased to some other number for symbol
code posting. This can be done with the Range Edit, Single Data
Operations and Merge tasks.

an input data file
a z field
a discontinuity field
Results A dataset that contains the interpolated values for a single horizon.
R2003.12.0 HAND-CONTOUR 252

HAND-CONTOUR: Parameters

*Name of the Input Data File
Description Name of the input seismic point file.
Data Type C*24
o
Description The MFD for the input seismic file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Z-Field to Use for Calculations

Description Field in the control point file to use for calculations.
Data Type I
Range All Z Value fields
R2003.12.0 HAND-CONTOUR: Parameters 253

Discontinuity Field to Use

Description Field name (number) of the discontinuity field to use. This is an
optional field. However, if you do not have a discontinuity field, the
following message appears:
NO FIELDS FOR THIS PARAMETER FOUND ON FILE /...
You Must Acknowledge the Error Message Before Resuming

Work
In Z-MAP Plus, you must click OK to enter any further parameters.
Macro Parameter DISCFLD

Data Type I
Range All fields of type 55, DISCONTINUITY CODE
Maximum Contour Value

Description Upper contour limit above which no contour point is generated.
Macro Parameter UPBOUND
Data Type R

Description Lower contour limit below which no contour point is generated.
Macro Parameter LOWBOUND
Data Type R
Contour Interval Between Contour Values

Data Type R
Default Value 10.00

Symbol Number for Local Minimums

Description Symbol number that appears in the discontinuity field to indicate
that this point is a local minimum.
Macro Parameter MINSYMB
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 7
Symbol Number for Local Maximums

Description Symbol number that appears in the discontinuity field to indicate
that this point is a local maximum.
Macro Parameter MAXSYMB
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 8
Output Data File Name

Description Output seismic data file name.
Data Type C*24
Master File for the Output File

Description The MFD to use for storing the output seismic data file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5

Retain Endpoints in the Output File

Description Specify if endpoints are to be retained in the output file.
Macro Parameter RETAIN
Options
YES = Include endpoints.
NO = Do not include endpoints.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
ZCL PROCESSES
HAND CONTOUR PNTS

IMPORT-CPS-FILE
Macro Name IMPORT-CPS-FILE
Menu Option File Import CPS1 File to MFD/OW
Purpose This macro imports a CPS SAVE file into a master file (MFD). If the
file is an extended file, the information in the header is read and used. If
it is not an extended file, you are asked to enter the header information.
Description Specify these input values:

a CPS SAVE file
name of the output file
Results A CPS SAVE file on the requested file number.

Enter the name of the CPS SAVE File
Description Name of the CPS SAVE file.
Data Type C*80
"Save" File Number on the File

Description Specify the output SAVE file number on the disk file for the CPS
data.
Macro Parameter SAVENUM
Data Type I
Range 1 through 100
Default Value 1
R2003.12.0 IMPORT-CPS-FILE 257

IMPORT-CPS-FILE: Parameters
Output File Name

Description Name of the output file imported from the CPS SAVE File. The
only type of files that are output are a grid or a data file.
Data Type C*24

Description MFD to use for storing the output file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
ZNON or Null Value for the File

Description The null data value for the output file.
Data Type R
Minimum X Value (If Grid)

Description Minimum x coordinate for the output grid. Required when the
CPS SAVE file is in original format.
Data Type R
R2003.12.0 IMPORT-CPS-FILE: Parameters 258

Maximum X Value (If Grid)

Description Maximum x coordinate for the output grid. Required when the
Data Type R
Minimum Y Value (If Grid)

Description Minimum y coordinate for the output grid. Required when the
Data Type R
Maximum Y Value (If Grid)

Description Maximum y coordinate for the output grid. Required when the
Data Type R
Specify How to Determine Grid Size

Description Specify whether increments or rows and columns are used as input.
Used when the grid CPS SAVE file is in original format.
Macro Parameter SPECIFY
Options
INCREMENTS = Increments are specified.
ROWS&COLUMNS = Number of rows and columns is provided.
Data Type C*12
Default Value INCREMENTS

Number of Rows (if applicable)

Description Number of rows for the output grid. Used when SPECIFY =
ROWS&COLUMNS and the CPS SAVE file is in original format.
Macro Parameter NUMROWS
Data Type I
Default Value 1
Number of Columns (if applicable)

Description Number of columns for the output grid. Used when SPECIFY =
ROWS&COLUMNS and the CPS SAVE file is in original format.
Macro Parameter NUMCOLS
Data Type I
Default Value 1
X-Increment (if applicable)

Description The x increment for the output grid. Used when SPECIFY =
INCREMENTS and the CPS SAVE file is in original format.
Macro Parameter XINC
Data Type R
Default Value 1.0
Y-Increment (if applicable)

Description The y increment for the output grid. Used when SPECIFY =
INCREMENTS and the CPS SAVE file is in original format.
Macro Parameter YINC
Data Type R
Default Value 1.0

First Field Name (If Not a Grid)

Description Name of the first field being created. If blanked, the name defaults
to the field type generated from the CPS SAVE file header.
Macro Parameter FLDNAMS
Data Type C*20
Default Value ZCL default based on CPS SAVE file
First Print Format (If Not a Grid)

Description Print format for the first field being created.
Macro Parameter FORMATS
Print Formats Must be Appropriate for the Data Type

The print formats for the first through tenth fields must be correct for the
data being output. For information on print format, see Appendix D in
your ZCL Operators Manual, or the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual.
Data Type C*8

Default Value G15.7
First ZNON (Null) Value (if not a grid)

Description Null data value for the first field being created.
Macro Parameter ZNONS
Data Type R
Second Field Name (if necessary)

Description Name of the second field being created. If blanked, the name
defaults to the field type generated from the CPS SAVE file header.
Macro Parameter FLDNAMS
Data Type C*20

Second Print Format (if necessary)

Description Print format for the second field being created.
Macro Parameter FORMAT2
Data Type C*8
Default Value G15.7
Second ZNON (Null) Value (if necessary)

Description Null data value for the second field being created.
Macro Parameter ZNON2
Data Type R
Third Field Name (if necessary)

Description Name of the third field being created. If blanked, the name defaults
Macro Parameter FLDNAM3
Data Type C*20
Third Print Format (if necessary)

Description Print format for the third field being created.
Data Type C*8
Default Value G15.7
Third ZNON (Null) Value (if necessary)

Description Null data value for the third field being created.
Data Type R

Fourth Field Name (if necessary)

Description Name of the fourth field being created. If blanked, the name
Data Type C*20
Fourth Print Format (if necessary)

Description Print format for the fourth field being created.
Data Type C*8
Default Value G15.7
Fourth ZNON (Null) Value (if necessary)

Description Null data value for the fourth field being created.
Data Type R
Fifth Field Name (if necessary)

Description Name of the fifth field being created. If blanked, the name defaults
Data Type C*20
Fifth Print Format (if necessary)

Description Print format for the fifth field being created.
Data Type C*8
Default Value G15.7

Fifth ZNON (Null) Value (if necessary)

Description Null data value for the fifth field being created.
Data Type R
Sixth Field Name (if necessary)

Description Name of the sixth field being created. If blanked, the name defaults
Data Type C*20
Sixth Print Format (if necessary)

Description Print format for the sixth field being created.
Data Type C*8
Default Value G15.7
Sixth ZNON (Null) Value (if necessary)

Description Null data value for the sixth field being created.
Data Type R
Seventh Field Name (if necessary)

Description Name of the seventh field being created. If blanked, the name
Data Type C*20

Seventh Print Format (if necessary)

Description Print format for the seventh field being created.
Data Type C*8
Default Value G15.7
Seventh ZNON (Null) Value (if necessary)

Description Null data value for the seventh field being created.
Data Type R
Eighth Field Name (if necessary)

Description Name of the eighth field being created. If blanked, the name
Data Type C*20
Eighth Print Format (if necessary)

Description Print format for the eighth field being created.
Data Type C*8
Default Value G15.7
Eighth ZNON (Null) Value (if necessary)

Description Null data value for the eighth field being created.
Data Type R

Ninth Field Name (if necessary)

Description Name of the ninth field being created. If blanked, the name defaults
Data Type C*20
Ninth Print Format (if necessary)

Description Print format for the ninth field being created.
Data Type C*8
Default Value G15.7
Ninth ZNON (Null) Value (if necessary)

Description Null data value for the ninth field being created.
Data Type R
Tenth Field Name (if necessary)

Description Name of the tenth field being created. If blanked, the name defaults
Data Type C*20
Tenth Print Format (if necessary)

Description Print format for the tenth field being created.
Data Type C*8
Default Value G15.7

Tenth ZNON (Null) Value (if necessary)

Description Null data value for the tenth field being created.
Data Type R
ZCL PROCESSES
IMPORT CPS FILE

IMPORT-GRID
Macro Name IMPORT-GRID
Menu Option File Import Grid File to MFD/OW
Purpose The purpose of this macro is to prompt you for information to build a
format group. The resulting format group can be used to import the grid
dataset. The format group is saved in a separate dictionary file. This
dictionary file is created by the macro and overwrites another file
sharing the same file name. The grid dataset is contained in a separate
diskfile.
Description You are prompted to specify these input values:

file name of the input grid dataset
external file name and group name for the format group
File and Field Descriptor Parameters
name of the GRID file to be created
For more about File and Field Description parameters, see Appendix D
of the ZCL Operators Manual, or the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual.
Results A GRID file in an MFD.
* Name of the Grid Dataset File

Description Name of the external diskfile file for the grid dataset.
Data Type C*80
Output Dictionary File Name

Description Name of the external file to save the format group that results from
this macro.
Macro Parameter DICTNARY
Data Type C*80
R2003.12.0 IMPORT-GRID 268

IMPORT-GRID: Parameters
Enter the Format Group Name

Description Name of the format group to be used.
Macro Parameter GROUP
Data Type C*40
Number of Nodes Per Line

Description How many grid nodes on each physical record of the file for the
grid dataset.
Macro Parameter NUMNODES
Data Type I
Field Width Occupied by Each Node

Description Total space each grid value occupies including the decimal point
and places to the right and left of it.
Macro Parameter FLDWIDTH
Data Type I
Default Value 15
ZNON Value of the Grid Dataset

Description Number representing missing grid values.
Data Type R
Default Value 1.0E30
Alphanumeric ZNON Indicator of Grid

Description An alphanumeric character string used to indicate a missing grid
value.
Macro Parameter ZSTRING
Data Type C*12
Default Value BLANK
R2003.12.0 IMPORT-GRID: Parameters 269

Decimal Point Location of Grid Value

Description Number of digits to the right of the decimal point.
Data Type I
Default Value 0
Starting Position of Physical Record

Description Starting column for the first grid value of each physical record.
Macro Parameter STARTPOS
Data Type I
Default Value 1
Number of Rows in Grid Dataset

Description Number of rows in the grid.
Macro Parameter NUMROW
Data Type I
Number of Columns in Grid Dataset

Description Number of columns in the grid.
Macro Parameter NUMCOL
Data Type I
Minimum X-Coordinate of the Grid Dataset

Description Minimum x coordinate in the grid.
Data Type R

Maximum X-Coordinate of the Grid Dataset

Description Maximum x coordinate in the grid.
Data Type R
Minimum Y-Coordinate of the Grid Dataset

Description Minimum y coordinate in the grid.
Data Type R
Maximum Y-Coordinate of the Grid Dataset

Description Maximum y coordinate in the grid.
Data Type R
Reach: Distance from Grid Cell

Description Maximum distance from each grid node that the data is obtained
when computing its grid value.
Macro Parameter REACH
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0
Distance Beyond X-Grid Boundary

Description Distance in x direction beyond the edge of the grid that data could
lie and be used to build the grid.
Macro Parameter XEXPAND
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0

Distance Beyond Y-Grid Boundary

Description Distance in y direction beyond the edge of the grid that data could
lie and be used to build the grid.
Macro Parameter YEXPAND
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0
Name of the Output Grid File

Data Type C*24
MFD for the Output Grid File

Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
IMPORT WRITE TEXT

IMPORT-ZGF-FILE
Macro Name IMPORT-ZGF-FILE
Menu Option File Import Disk File to ZGF
Purpose This macro converts a flat graphics file into a ZGF that is usable in
Z-MAP Plus or other Landmark programs.
Description Specify these input values:

the flat graphics file to import
the full path name for the new ZGF
Results A usable ZGF.
Enter the "FLAT" File Name

Description Name of the flat file.
Data Type C*80
Enter the Name of the New ZGF

Description Name of the neutral graphics file for the pictures.
Data Type C*80
R2003.12.0 IMPORT-ZGF-FILE 273

IMPORT-ZGF-FILE: Parameters
Do You Want a Printed Report

Description Specify if a status report is to be produced.
Options
YES = Status report produced
NO = No status report produced
Data Type C*4
Default Value YES
ZCL PROCESSES
IMPORT ZGF FILE
R2003.12.0 IMPORT-ZGF-FILE: Parameters 274

INTERPOLATION
Macro Name INTERPOLATION
Menu Option Macros Geophysics Shotpoint Interpolation
Purpose This macro allows you to interpolate along a seismic line, repopulating
the line at the indicated shotpoint limit. All necessary interpolation in x,
y, and z directions is performed before the output record is written.

a seismic dataset
the desired shotpoint interval
Results This macro outputs a seismic dataset with the new shotpoint interval.
The first and last shotpoint for each line are kept. The intermediate
shotpoint numbers that are kept are determined by the first shotpoint in
the line plus whatever you specify as the shotpoint increment. Hence,
with an increment of 10, you do not necessarily get every shotpoint
divisible by 10. If this is your goal, use Operations
Line Resampling in Z-MAP Plus.
Enter the File to be Interpolated

Description Name of the input seismic data file that is reinterpolated.
Data Type C*24

Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 INTERPOLATION 275

INTERPOLATION: Parameters
Enter the Output File Name

Description Name of the output data file that contains the interpolated and
repopulated seismic data.
Data Type C*24

Description The MFD to use for storing the output data file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Shotpoint Increment for Output

Description Desired shotpoint increment for the output file.
Macro Parameter INCRMENT
Data Type R
Default Value 10.0
ZCL PROCESSES
SEIS INTERP THIN
R2003.12.0 INTERPOLATION: Parameters 276

LABL-FOUR-CRNS
Macro Name LABL-FOUR-CRNS
Menu Option Macros Graphics Four Corner Map Labeling
Purpose This macro labels each of the four corners of a map with either latitude/
longitude labels or northing/easting labels depending upon the map
type.

a graphics file
a picture name
the type of labels
the size, location and format for the labels
Results The corners of the map are labeled according to your specifications.
*Enter the ZGF to Label

Description Name of the graphics file for the picture to be labeled. The graphics
file must already exist.
Macro Parameter ZGF
Data Type C*80
*Enter the Picture to Label

Description Name of the picture to be labeled. The picture must already exist on
the graphics file defined by ZGF.
Description PICTURE
Data Type C*80
R2003.12.0 LABL-FOUR-CRNS 277

LABL-FOUR-CRNS: Parameters
Type of Labels
Description Indicate whether latitude/longitude, northing/easting, or both types
of labels are to be used.
Macro Parameter LTYPE
Options
LATITUDE-LONGITUDE
NORTHING-EASTING
BOTH
Data Type C*20
Default Value NORTHING-EASTING
Size of N/E Labels

Description Height of characters for northing/easting labels, in plotter units (in
or cm).
Macro Parameter NESIZE
Data Type R
Location of N/E Labels

Description Specify on which side of the map to draw northing/easting labels.
Macro Parameter NESIDES
Options
LEFT+BOTTOM = Labels along the bottom and left side
LEFT+TOP = Labels along the top and left side
RIGHT+TOP = Labels along the top and right side
RIGHT+BOTTOM = Labels along the bottom and right side
ALL SIDES = Labels on all sides
Data Type C*12
Default Value ALL SIDES
R2003.12.0 LABL-FOUR-CRNS: Parameters 278

Format of N/E Labels

Description Specify the format of the northing/easting labels
Macro Parameter NEFORM
Options
COMMAS = Integer with commas
NO COMMAS = Integer without commas
SCIENTIFIC = Scientific Notation
Data Type C*12
Default Value COMMAS
Size of L/L Labels

Description Height of characters for latitude/longitude labels, in plotter units (in
or cm).
Macro Parameter LLSIZE
Data Type R
Location of L/L Labels

Description Specify on which side of the map to draw latitude/longitude labels.
Macro Parameter LLSIDES
Options
LEFT+BOTTOM = Labels along the bottom and left side
LEFT+TOP = Labels along the top and left side
RIGHT+BOTTOM = Labels along the top and right side
RIGHT+TOP = Labels along the bottom and right side
ALL SIDES = Labels on all sides
Data Type C*12
Default Value ALL SIDES

Format of L/L Labels

Description Specify the format of the label.
Macro Parameter LLFORM
Options
DEG+MIN
DEG+MIN+SEC
Data Type C*12
Default Value DEG+MIN
Offset the labels

Description Indicates if the labels are offset slightly so they are not exactly on
the corners of the map.
Macro Parameter LLOFSET
Options
YES = Labels are offset.
NO = Labels are not offset.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
ZCL PROCESSES
DATA BLOCK PICTURE STATS
DATA BLOCK PRINT BRANCH
DATA BLOCK UTILITY LABEL LAT/LONG
LABEL N/E PROJECTION
PICTURE

LEASE-DRAWING
Macro Name LEASE-DRAWING
Menu Option Features Polygons Lease Polygon Drawing
Purpose This macro allows you to post and label lease polygons. In addition to
labeling each polygon with lease identification information, the macro
gives you the ability to show lease attributes through:
line shading
hachuring
text
color
Description You are required to specify:

a text dataset that contains lease identification information. This
dataset must contain one or more text fields and the Area
Identification field. It may also contain an Area Symbol code field,
one or more color code fields and multiple z fields.
a vertex dataset that contains the lease identification information.
This dataset must contain X (Easting), Y (Northing), SEG I.D.,
and Area Identification fields.
Area ID for Vertex and Text Must Have the Same Data Type
The Area Identification field for both the text dataset and the vertex dataset
must be of the same data type and have the same field width.
When labeling leases, you are asked to specify:

up to four fields from the lease identification file to use in labeling
each lease
the size of each line of text
Text strings are stacked in the order in which they are selected with
labels automatically center justified. When center justification is not
possible, then labels are right or left justified.
If labels are too large, the macro posts only the last selected label using
a unique two character code that is automatically generated. The text
file entries that cannot be posted are automatically output to a file that
contains the two character identification codes and their meanings.
For more information about this macro, see the following pages.
R2003.12.0 LEASE-DRAWING 281

LEASE-DRAWING: Description (continued)
The following ZCL parameter defaults are hard coded into the macro.
Table 1: Hard Coded Defaults
Parameter Description Default
DIVIDE This parameter specifies the axis to X AXIS

use for subdividing lease polygons
when showing shared lease
attributes.
EDGEWDTH This is the width of the lease edge 0.1
shading or lease hachures.
HALFEDGE This parameter fits shaded edges to YES
smaller polygons by halving the
edge width.
EDGESRCE This is the source for the edge COLOR
width color. FIELD
EDGECLR This is the color of the hachure 5
lines or color of the edge shading.
Results Leases posted with the specified attributes are output to the current
basemap.
R2003.12.0 LEASE-DRAWING: Description (continued) 282

LEASE-DRAWING: Technical Notes
Technical Notes
This topic contains technical notes on how to prepare files for Lease
Drawing. It consists of information about preparing Lease Polygon and
Text I.D. files, activating Shared Lease Attributes, as well as some lease
posting hints and a table of the ZCL defaults that have been hardcoded
into the macro.
Preparing Lease Polygon (Vertex) Files

With the exception of the Color Field, the Lease Polygon file must
contain these elements:
X (Easting) or Longitude field
Y (Northing) or Latitude field
Seg I.D. field
Area Identification field
Color field (optional)
Segment I.D. Field

The segment I.D. field is a unique number that remains unchanged for
each individual polygon of a lease.
Area Identification Field

This is a number or a set of characters that is used as the Lease
Identifier. It remains unchanged until the lease changes.
Color Code Field

Optionally, you may add a color field to your file. This field controls
the color used for polygon borders, with one color assigned to each
segment I.D. If a color field is not present or if you choose to ignore
this field, the default color of 1 is used for all polygon borders.
R2003.12.0 LEASE-DRAWING: Technical Notes 283

An example of a Lease Polygon file that contains a color field is shown

below.
SEG
X (EASTING) Y (NORTHING) I.D.AREA ID COLOR
469433.84 19321468. 0.Z323144 12

468334.78 19321444. 0.Z323144 12
468337.47 19322770. 0.Z323144 12
469458.16 19322764. 0.Z323144 12
469433.84 19321468. 0.Z323144 12
457326.53 19326502. 1.Z25819 15
456162.47 19326480. 1.Z25819 15
451662.38 19326504. 1.Z25819 15
451580.72 19321196. 1.Z25819 15
456082.34 19321170. 1.Z25819 15
457266.88 19321196. 1.Z25819 15
458365.97 19321218. 1.Z25819 15
458423.59 19326528. 1.Z25819 15
457326.53 19326502. 1.Z25819 15
460587.62 19322598. 2.Z25819A 25
Preparing Lease Identification (Text) Files

The Lease Identification File is composed of:
one or more text fields (required)
area identification field (required)
area symbol code field (optional)
segment I.D. field (optional)
color code field (optional)
z field (optional)
These fields are discussed on the following pages.
Text Fields (Required)

Text fields contain the character data needed to label a lease polygon.
Although there may be additional fields on the file, you can only post
up to four fields. Typical text fields include the OWNER and
OPERATOR fields shown in the Lease Identification file below.

Area Identification Field (Required)

The Area Identification field on this file must contain the same
information as the Area Identification field on the Lease Polygon file to
ensure accurate text annotation.
Table 2: Lease Identification File

Area Owner Operator Area Color Gross
I.D. Symbol Acres
352A BOONE COON OIL -2.0 4.0 47.00
350B FINCH ORO OIL -5.0 2.0 80.00
400A FOYT OIL & GAS -4.0 3.0 55.00
400B SIMPSON OIL & GAS -3.0 3.0 12.00
2A65 BOONE COON OIL -2.0 4.0 124.00

Area Symbol Code Field (Optional)

This field controls Hachuring, Shading Lines, Edge Shading and
colorfill. If this field is not present, or if you choose to ignore it, you
can select a constant type of symbolization to use for all polygons.
Table 3: Description of Area Symbol Code Values

Code Option Description
5 Cross Shading No Produces crossing lines across the entire polygon with no
Fill colorfill.
4 Down Shading No Produces lines across the entire polygon at a 45 degree down
Fill slope with no colorfill.
3 Up Shading No Fill Produces lines across the entire polygon at a 45 degree up slope
with no colorfill.
2 Down Hachure No Produces hachures around polygon at a 45 degree down slope
Fill with no colorfill.
1 Up Hachure No Fill Produces hachures around polygon at a 45 degree up slope with
no colorfill.
0 No Hachure No Fill Produces no hachures, no shaded lines, no edge shading or
colorfill in the lease polygon; produces only lease border and
labels.
1 Up Hachure Fill Produces hachures at a 45 degree up slope and colorfills the
polygon.
2 Down Hachure Fill Produces hachures at a 45 degree down slope and colorfills the
polygon.
3 Up Shading Fill Produces lines across the entire polygon at a 45 degree up slope
and colorfills the polygon.
4 Down Shading Fill Produces lines across the entire polygon at a 45 degree down
slope and colorfills the polygon.
5 Cross Shading Fill Produces lines that cross shade the entire polygon and colorfills
the polygon.
6 Fill Only Colorfills the polygon without hachures, shading lines, or edge
shading.
7 Edge Shade No Fill Produces edge shading with no colorfill.
8 Edge Shading Produces edge shading with multiple colorfills to show shared
lease attributes.

Segment I.D. Field (Optional)

This field allows you to place a different label in each polygon in a
multi-polygon lease. The information stored in this field must
correspond to that stored for each polygon in the Lease Polygon File. If
the Segment I.D. field is not present, all polygons in the lease have the
same label.
Color Code Fields (Optional)

The first color field in the file determines the color index for hachures,
shading lines, or edge shading. This field is active with all Area Symbol
codes except 0.
The second color field determines the color index for colorfilling the
entire polygon. This field is active with Area Symbol codes 1 through 6.
The third and all subsequent color fields determine the color index for
the sub-polygons used to show shared leases. Color fields for shared
leases are activated by setting the Area Symbol code to 8.
Z Fields (Optional)
One or more z fields are required if the Area Symbol code is set to 8 on
one or more leases. These z fields control the size of the sub-polygons
used in showing shared lease attributes.

Lease Drawing Hints

Store all vertices for a single lease in adjacent records on the
vertex file.
The field that contains the vertices for the outer boundary of a
lease with a hole in it must precede the field that contains the
vertices that outline the hole.
First trace listed
Second trace listed
Polygons must close exactly. The maximum number of vertices for

a single lease polygon is 500.
You can use the Lease-Drawing macro to fill in any type of
polygon, including fault polygons and geographical regions.
Activating Shared Lease Attributes

For a lease with multiple owners, you can assign a different color to
each owner. When displayed, the lease polygon can then illustrate the
percentage of ownership in the lease. The Sample Shared Lease file that
follows shows a Lease Identification File For Shared Lease Attribute
Annotation.
You can activate Shared Lease Attributes by setting the Area Symbol
code to 8 (Edge Shade Fill.) For each color field, there must be a z field.

Note that in the table below, ZVAL1 is paired with COLOR1 and
ZVAL2 is paired with COLOR2. On a shared lease file, these z values
are used to determine the percentage of each lease filled with a
particular color. In other instances, the z values may represent the
percentages of oil and gas in a lease.
Polygons are subdivided along the x axis with the z values determining
the percentage of the lease per owner.
This percentage is determined by: i ( Zi + Z2...Zi...Zn ) 10
Table 4: Sample Shared Lease File

AREA OWNER OPERATOR AREA COLOR GROSS ZVAL1 COLOR1 ZVAL2 COLOR2
I.D. SYMBOL ACRES
352A BOONE COON OIL 8 4 47.00 25.00 81 75.00 95
350B FINCH ORO OIL 8 2 80.00 50.00 81 50.00 95
400A FOYT OIL & GAS 8 3 55.00 50.00 81 50.00 95
400B SIMPSON OIL & GAS 8 3 12.00 50.00 81 50.00 95
2A65 BOONE COON OIL 8 4 124.0 50.00 81 50.00 95
Enter the Input Lease Polygon File

Description Name of the input vertex file for the lease boundaries.
This file should contain fields of type x, y, Segment I.D. and Area
Identification. It may optionally contain a color code field.
Data Type C*24
oMFD for the Input Lease Polygon File

Description The MFD that contains the vertex file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5

LEASE-DRAWING: Parameters
Enter the Text File to Post in the Leases

Description Name of the input text file for the lease label information.
This file should include text fields for posting on the lease and the
area identification field. It may optionally contain an area symbol
code which controls the annotation of individual leases. It may also
contain one or more fields and multiple z fields to be used with
matching color code field when HACHURE = EDGE SHADE
FILL is selected.
Macro Parameter TEXTIN
Data Type C*24
Range All attached TEXT files
o
MFD for the Input Text File
Description The MFD that contains the text file.
Macro Parameter MFDTEXT
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Number of Labels Posted for Each Lease (14)

Description Number of text fields to be labeled.
Z-MAP Plus Users Must Respond to all Field Selections

For LEASE-DRAWING, four field selections are required. If you only
have two fields you want to label, you must select (None - use no field)
for the remaining fields.
Macro Parameter NUMLABEL

Data Type I
Range 1 through 4
Default Value 1
R2003.12.0 LEASE-DRAWING: Parameters 290

First Label to Post

Description Specify the first field to post.
Macro Parameter NUM1
Data Type I
Default Value ZCL default first Character Text field
Second Label to Post

Description Specify the second field to post.
Data Type I
Default Value ZCL default second Character Text field
Third Label to Post

Description Specify the third field to post.
Data Type I
Default Value ZCL default third Character Text field
Fourth Label to Post

Description Specify the fourth field to post.
Data Type I
Default Value ZCL default fourth Character Text field
Size of the First Label

Description The size, in plotter units (in or cm), of the first label posted.
Macro Parameter SIZE1
Data Type R
Size of the Second Label

Description The size, in plotter units (in or cm), of the second label posted.
Data Type R

Size of the Third Label

Description The size, in plotter units (in or cm), of the third label posted.
Data Type R
Size of the Fourth Label

Description The size, in plotter units (in or cm), of the fourth label posted.
Data Type R
Source of Hachure Information

Description Specify how the lease annotation is to be obtained.
Macro Parameter HACHSRCE
Options
HACHURE FIELD = Use Area Symbol field (type 49) in the text file to
guide hachuring and colorfill.
HACHURE VALUE = Use parameter HACHURE to guide hachuring and
colorfill.
See HACHURE; the Area Symbol field code needed when
HACHSRCE = HACHURE FIELD is listed in parentheses.
Data Type C*16
Default Value HACHURE FIELD
Source of Color Information

Description Specify how colorfill index information should be obtained for all
lease annotation options.
Macro Parameter COLRSRCE
Options
COLOR FIELD = Use the color field on the lease text file.
COLOR VALUE = Use the color index number provided.
Data Type C*12
Default Value COLOR FIELD

Hachure Type (if not from field)

Description Specify how you want to perform hachuring and colorfilling.
Macro Parameter HACHURE
Options
NO HACHURE NO FILL = Lease border and labels only. (Area Symbol
code = 0)
UP HACHURE NO FILL = 45 degrees up to right, colorfill (Area
Symbol code = 1)
DOWN HACHURE NO FILL = 45 degrees down to right, hachure around
lease, no colorfill (Area Symbol code = 2)
UP SHADING NO FILL = 45 degrees up to right, lines across entire
lease, no colorfill (Area Symbol code = 3)
DOWN SHADING NO FILL = 45 degrees down left, lines NO FILL across
entire lease, no colorfill (Area Symbol code
= 4)
CROSS SHADING NO FILL = 45 degrees up and down to right NO FILL
lines across entire lease, no colorfill (Area
Symbol code = 5)
UP HACHURE FILL = 45 degrees up to right, hachure around lease,
with colorfill (Area Symbol code = 1)
DOWN HACHURE FILL = 45 degrees down to right, hachure around
lease, with colorfill (Area Symbol code = 2)
UP SHADING FILL = 45 degrees up to right, lines across entire
DOWN SHADING FILL = 45 degrees down to right, lines across entire
CROSS SHADING FILL = 45 degrees up and down to right lines across
entire lease, with colorfill (Area Symbol
code = 5)
FILL ONLY = Only color fill the lease area (Area Symbol
code = 6)
EDGE SHADE NO FILL = Border edge shading with multiple colorfill
(Area Symbol code = 7)
EDGE SHADE FILL = Border edge shading with multiple colorfill
(Area Symbol code =8)
Data Type C*24

Default Value NO HACHURE NO FILL

Lease Color (if not from field)

Description Color index from the currently active color table. It controls the
color of colorfill or hachure lines.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 9
ZCL PROCESSES
POST LEASE

LINE-GRID-PLUS
Macro Name LINE-GRID-PLUS
Menu Option Modeling Line Gridding Plus
Purpose Offers added functionality for Line Gridding.

This macro derives from the ZCL process LINEGRIDPLUS. Line
Gridding Plus provides all the functionality available in classic Line
Gridding and supports new features present in Point Gridding Plus.
Line Gridding Plus honors your input fault geometry data to create
more accurate horizon models than can be provided by the classic Line
Gridding module. When used in combination with Profile Contouring,
Line Gridding Plus will generate high quality maps of faulted surfaces.
You can use Line Gridding Plus to:

grid seismic line data with or without fault data.
build extremely accurate models of faulted horizons, given fault
geometry data.
model the fault faces cutting a horizon, given fault geometry data.
Description You are prompted to specify the following input values:

a seismic line file.
a Control Grid file if available.
a fault file with or without fault geometry data.
fault geometry data (Throw, Dip Angle, Heave) if available.
grid extrapolation controls.
Results Line Gridding Plus gives you the option to save the following outputs:
Standard Grid file (faulted or un-faulted)
Interpolated fault file
Blanked Grid file
Expanded Fault file
Fault Filled Grid
Fault Profile file
Data Hull Polygon file
Fault-Cut Line file
R2003.12.0 LINE-GRID-PLUS 295

LINE-GRID-PLUS: Parameters

Select Input Seismic Line File
Description Select Input seismic Line file.
Macro Parameter LINEIN
Data Type DATA
Range All Attached DATA files
o
MFD File for Input Seismic Line
Description The master file (MFD) associated with the selected Line file.
Data Type MFDNUM
Range 0 through 5
Default Value 0
X Field on Input File

Description X field on the seismic Line file specified as input.
Macro Parameter LINXFLD
Data Type I
Range All fields of type 1, X (Easting)
Y Field on Input File

Description Y field on the seismic Line file specified as input.
Macro Parameter LINYFLD
Data Type I
Range All fields of type 2, Y (Northing)
R2003.12.0 LINE-GRID-PLUS: Parameters 296

Z Field on Input File

Description Z field on the seismic Line file specified as input.
Macro Parameter LINZFLD
Data Type I
Range All Z Value fields in input file
Select Line ID Field

Description The Line ID field on the seismic line file specified as input.
Macro Parameter LINIDFLD
Data Type FIELD
Range All LINE type fields on file (Line Name, Seismic Line
Number, SEG I.D)
Default Value Line type fields (35+25+22)
Select Input Control Grid

Description Designates the Control Grid file specified as input.
Macro Parameter CONGRID
Data Type C*40
Default Value No Default
oMFD
for Control Grid
Description MFD of the Control Grid file.
Macro Parameter MFDCON
Data Type MFDNUM
Range 0 through 5

Select Input Fault File

Description Select the Input Fault File.
Data Type C*40
Default Value FALT+VERT
o
Description Master file (MFD) that contains the fault file specified as input.
Data Type MFDNUM
Range 0 through 5
Select Fault X Field

Description X field on the Input Fault file
Macro Parameter FLTXFLD
Data Type 1
Range All X (EASTING) fields in the input file
Default Value ZCL default - first field of the appropriate type
Select Fault Y Field

Description Y field on the Input Fault file
Macro Parameter FLTYFLD
Data Type 2
Range All Y (NORTHING) fields in the input file

Select Fault ID Field

Description Segment ID (SegID) field on the Input Fault file
Macro Parameter FLTIDFLD
Data Type 35
Range All SEG I.D. fields in the input file
Select Fault Throw Field

Description Fault throw field on the Input Fault file
Macro Parameter FLTTFLD
Data Type REAL
Range All DELTA Z-THROW fields in the input file
Select Dip Angle Field

Description Fault dip angle field on the Input Fault file
Macro Parameter FLTAFLD
Data Type REAL
Range All DIP ANGLE fields in the input file
Select Fault Heave Field

Description Fault heave field on the Input Fault file.
Macro Parameter FLTHFLD
Data Type REAL
Range All HEAVE fields in the input file

Select Input Fault Polygon File

Description Select input pre-computed Fault Polygon file.
Macro Parameter FLTPOLY
Data Type C*40
o
MFD for Fault Polygon File
Description MFD that contains the Fault Polygon file.
Data Type MFDNUM
Range 0 through 5
Designate Grid Output File

Description Standard grid file name for the output file
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for Grid Output File
Description MFD to use for storing the Grid Output file
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Select the Interpolated Fault File Name

Description Interpolated fault file name
Macro Parameter INTFTOUT
Data Type OUTPUT

o
MFD for Interpolated Fault File
Description MFD that contains the Interpolated fault file
Macro Parameter MFDINTFT
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Select the Blanked Grid File Name

Description Blanked Grid File Name
Macro Parameter BLKGROUT
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for Blanked Grid File
Description MFD that contains the Blanked Grid file
Macro Parameter MFDBLKGR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Select an Expanded Fault File Name

Description Name of the expanded fault file
Macro Parameter EXPFTOUT
Data Type C*24
oMFD Expanded Fault File

Description MFD that contains the Expanded Fault file
Macro Parameter MFDEXPFT
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5

Select Fault-filled Grid

Description File name of the Fault-filled Grid
Macro Parameter FILGROUT
Data Type C*24
o
MFD Fault-filled Grid
Description MFD that contains the Fault-filled Grid file
Macro Parameter MFDFILGR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Select Fault Profile File

Description File name of the Fault Profile file
Macro Parameter PROFOUT
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the Fault Profile File
Description MFD that contains the Fault Profile file
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Select Hull Data File

Description Data Hull polygon file name.
Macro Parameter HULLFILE
Data Type C*24

o
MFD Hull Data File
Description MFD that contains the Hull file
Macro Parameter MFDHULL
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Select Fault-cut Line File

Description File name for the Fault-cut Line file
Macro Parameter LINECUT
Data Type C*24
o
MFD Fault-cut Line File
Description MFD that contains the Fault-cut file
Macro Parameter MFDCUT
Data Type MFDNUM
Range 0 through 5
Select Output Type

Description Choose the format for the output file
Macro Parameter MAKECUTS
Data Type C*16
Options
CUT+SAVE+GRID
CUT+SAVE+NOGRID
CUT+NOSAVE+GRID
ALREADY CUT
Default Value CUT+NOSAVE+GRID

Select the Seperate Distance

Description Distance between point to cut line.
Macro Parameter SEPERATE
Data Type REAL
Default Value NONE
Select the Control Grid Usage

Description Determines which control grid to use.
Macro Parameter CONTROL
Data Type ETEXT
Options
NONE
GRID NON-ZNONS
GRID ZNONS
DEFAULT AOI
Default Value NONE
Select X Grid Increment

Description The X grid increment.
Macro Parameter XINC
Data Type REAL
Select Y Grid Increment

Description The Y grid increment.
Macro Parameter YINC
Data Type REAL

Select X Minimum
Description Minimum x coordinate of the output grid.
Data Type REAL
Select X Maximum
Description Maximum x coordinate of the output grid.
Data Type REAL
Select Y Minimum
Description Minimum y coordinate of the output grid.
Data Type REAL
Select Y Maximum
Description Maximum y coordinate of the output grid.
Data Type REAL

Select Z Value Minimum

Description Set minimum Z value of the output grid.
Macro Parameter ZMIN
Data Type REAL
Select Z Value Maximum

Description Set maximum Z value of the output grid.
Macro Parameter ZMAX
Data Type REAL
Select ZNON or Null Data Value

Description Set Null data value for the output grid.
Data Type REAL
Default Value 1.E+30
Set Radius
Description CONCAVE HULL 1 & 2 Radius.
Macro Parameter RADIUS
Data Type REAL

Set Extrapolation
Description Extrapolation Mode controls whether grid nodes outside the data
perimeter are assigned Z values up to the grid edges or only to a
specified distance from the perimeter. Specify one of these values:
X-DISTANCE Extrapolated values will be calculated away
from the data perimeter as far as the value entered in the
Extrapolation Distance parameter. Using this setting and setting
the Extrapolation Distance parameter to a very large number will
have the same effect as choosing Grid Edges.
GRID-EDGES The Extrapolation Distance parameter will be
ignored and node values will be calculated everywhere in the grid.
Macro Parameter EXTRAPLT
Data Type ETEXT
Options
X-DISTANCE
GRID EDGES
Default Value GRID EDGES
Extrapolation Distance
Description Enter a number representing the distance away from the data
perimeter within which grid node values can be calculated. All grid
nodes beyond this distance are assigned a ZNON value.
Macro Parameter EXTRAP
Data Type REAL
Default Value 2 times the grid increment
Maximum Number of Fault Crossings

Description The maximum number of fault crossings allowed between a data
point and a grid node.
Macro Parameter MAXCROSS
Data Type Integer

Limit Extrapolation
Description Data hull determines which grid nodes will be initialized. Line
Gridding Plus offers 4 different algorithms:
DATA DISTRIBUTION. The data distribution method of
determining the gridding area is the method used in classic Point
Gridding. The gridding area is determined by basic gridding
parameters such as reach, minimum number of control point that
can be used to compute any grid value.
CONVEX HULL. This option will perform gridding wherever
inside the Convex Hull.
CONCAVE HULL 1. This option performs gridding whenever
possible inside the data hull. The data hull is a convex hull reduced
by concavities. The concavities are determined by the radius. The
size of an imaginary ball rolled around the convex hull of the data
determines the depth of the concavities.
CONCAVE HULL 2. This option is similar to Concave Hull 1,
except concavities are slightly deeper for this hull.
Macro Parameter DATAHULL
Data Type ETEXT
Options
DATA DISTRIBUTION
CONVEX HULL
CONCAVE HULL 1
CONCAVE HULL 2
Default Value DATA DISTRIBUTION
Refine
Description Number of Refinements.
Macro Parameter REFINE
Data Type Integer

Type of Flexing
Description Controls which type of flexing is done.
Macro Parameter FLEXTYPE
Data Type ETEXT
Options BIHARMONIC
LAPLACIAN
NONE
Default Value BIHARMONIC
Smoothness Modulus
Description Controls the amount of smoothing versus honouring of data that is
done.
Data Type REAL
Range 0 to 10
Default Value 0.2
Number of Flex Passes

Description The number entered represents the maximum number of flexing
passes. Flexing will stop after it has flexed this many times or when
the cutoff value causes flexing to stop.
Macro Parameter NUMPASS
Data Type Integer
Range 0 to 10
Default Value 10

Control of Passes
Description Controls whether to force Flexing to execute a specified number of
passes or to stop as soon as either Cutoff or Number of Flex passes
is reached.
Macro Parameter FLEXCTRL
Data Type ETEXT
Options
FLEX=NUMPASS
FLEX<=NUMPASS
Default Value FLEX<=NUMPASS
Cutoff
Description Grid will be flexed repeatedly until the amount of change from one
pass to the next is smaller than the cutoff.
Macro Parameter CUTOFF
Data Type REAL
Default Value 0.25
Trend Bias Angle Units

Description Biased gridding requires you to specify a bias direction measured
clockwise away from North.
Macro Parameter DIPUNTIS
Data Type ETEXT
Options
DEGREES
RADIANS
Default Value DEGREES

LINE-GRID-PLUS Prompts
Report Type
Description You have the choice of the extent of the processing analysis report.
Data Type ETEXT
Options
NONE
PARTIAL
FULL
ZCL PROCESSES
LINEGRIDPLUS
R2003.12.0 LINE-GRID-PLUS Prompts 311

LIST-CPS-FILE
Macro Name LIST-CPS-FILE
Menu Option File Info List CPS-1 File
Purpose This macro lists the contents of a CPS SAVE file.
Description You are asked to input a CPS SAVE file.
Results A listing of the contents of the CPS SAVE file.
Enter the name of the CPS SAVE File

Description Name of the CPS SAVE file, including the full directory path name
Data Type C*80
ZCL PROCESSES
LISTCPSFILES
R2003.12.0 LIST-CPS-FILE 312

MAKEMAPGENERAL
Macro Name MAKEMAPGENERAL
Menu Option
Purpose This is not a standalone macro. It is used is used by the ENVELOPE

and SURFCORRECT macros.
Description
Results
R2003.12.0 MAKEMAPGENERAL 313

NADCONCV
Macro Name NADCONCV
Menu Option Features Surveys (Canadian) NAD27-NAD83 Datum Shift
Purpose With the new capability to handle NAD 83 state plane projections,
there is a need to be able to translate NAD 27 latitudes and longitudes
to the new NAD 83 standard. This macro accomplishes that translation.
The translation is available in both directions.
Description Specify the following input values:

input data file for the old latitude and longitude data in the type
fields
individual fields of the latitude and longitude type to be used in the
transfer
direction of the transfer
new field names for the output latitude and longitude fields
name of the output data file and MFD to use for storing it
Results An output data file that has the new latitude and longitude fields
appended to the end of the information in the input data file.
R2003.12.0 NADCONCV 314

NADCONCV: Parameters

*Input Data File
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the Input Data File
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
*Select the Input Latitude Field

Description Select the input latitude field type to be used in the NAD
conversion.
Macro Parameter FIELDLT
Data Type I
Range All Latitude fields
*Select the Input Longitude Field

Description Select the input longitude field type to be used in the NAD
conversion.
Macro Parameter FIELDLG
Data Type I
Range All Longitude fields
R2003.12.0 NADCONCV: Parameters 315

Specify the Direction of Conversion

Description Specify the direction of the conversion. NAD 27 to 83 or 83 to 27.
Macro Parameter DIRCV
Options
27TO83
83TO27
Data Type C*8

Default Value: 27TO83
Name of the Output Latitude Field

Description The field name for the converted output latitude field in which to
place the converted values. This is appended to a copy of all other
data fields in the input data file.
Macro Parameter FLDOULT
Data Type C*20
Default Value: LATITUDE-CONVERTED
Name of the Output Longitude Field

Description The field name for the converted output longitude field in which to
place the converted values. This is appended to a copy of all other
data fields in the input data file.
Macro Parameter FLDOULG
Data Type C*20
Default Value: LONGITUDE-CONVERTED

Description Name of the output data file containing the new fields.
Data Type C*24
Default Value: NAD CONVERTED DATA
MFD for the Output Data File

Description The MFD that contains the output data file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Default Value: 1 first attached MFD

ZNON Replacement Value in Output

Description If a value of the output latitude or longitude field results in a null
value, this number is inserted in the appropriate output field.
Macro Parameter ZNONV
Data Type R
Default Value 1.0E30
ZCL PROCESSES
NADCON

NEW-CONTOUR
Macro Name NEW-CONTOUR
Menu Option Features Contouring Contour
Purpose This macro is the basis for the Contouring Contour command, but
can still be accessed from the $ZTARGET/macros directory. It builds a
contour map, and permits you to select various options for your contour
map. In addition to producing graphics features for posting on your
map, NEW-CONTOUR.ZCLMAC also selects the contouring algorithm
best suited to your data. If profiles are present, NEW-CONTOUR
selects the Profile Contouring Algorithm. If there are opaque faults, the
macro uses the Extended Fault Contouring Algorithm. If neither
opaque faults nor profiles are present, the macro uses the faster
No-Constraint algorithm. With respect to graphics features, you can
choose whether to colorfill your contours, and also whether to include a
color bar on your map.
Description This macro requires that you input a grid. To take full advantage of the
macros capabilities, however, you may want to input much of the
following information:
an optional opaque FAULT set
an optional gradient discontinuity PROFILE dataset
an optional POLYGON dataset to restrict the contouring
a PROFILE dataset from Point Gridding Plus
a POLYGON dataset to restrict contouring
whether to clip inside or outside of polygons (only requested if a
polygon file is input)
minimum and contour maximum
Results A contour map is generated that meets your specifications. You can also
obtain an output contour file if you wish.
R2003.12.0 NEW-CONTOUR 318

NEW-CONTOUR: Parameters

Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the Input Grid File
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Name of the Optional (Opaque) Fault File

Description Enter the name of the input fault file to be used in generating
contours, if any.
Data Type C*24
oMFD
for the Input Fault File
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 NEW-CONTOUR: Parameters 319

Select Gradient Discontinuity Profile File

Description Enter the name of the input profile file. This file contains z values
marking discontinuity in gradient.
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the Input Profiles
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Select Input Contour-Clipping Polygon File

Description Name of the input vertex file that contains the polygons used for
clipping contours in the display.
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the Input Polygon File
Description The MFD that contains the input clipping polygon file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Select Name of Optional Output Contour File

Description Name of the file to which you want contour information written.
Data Type C*24

MFD Name for the Output Contour File

Description The MFD to use for saving the output contour information.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Description Specify how smooth the contour line should be. All contours are
made up of a series of connected straight lines. The longer these
Options
interval
COARSE = Coarse point spacing along curves. Approximately1/2 the
grid interval.
grid interval.
interval.
grid interval.
Data Type C*12


Description Interval between successive contours. If the number of contours to
be drawn is specified, leave this parameter blank.
Data Type R


Description Lowest contour level to be drawn. This is always the first contour
that is drawn.
Data Type R

Description Highest contour level to be drawn. This is always the last contour
that is drawn.
Data Type R

Description Specify the number of contour levels. If the contour interval is
specified, leave this parameter blank. If the contour interval is not
chosen, then either the range between CONMAX and CONMIN or
the entire grid MIN and MAX range is used to derive the number of
contours to be placed on the map.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 50
Color to Use for all Contour Labels

Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 9


Data Type I
Default Value 1
Rate at which Contours are Bold

contour, etc.
Data Type I
Default Value 0

Data Type I
Default Value 0

Data Type I
Default Value 0

Data Type I
Default Value 0


BLNKDIST.
Data Type R

Description Specify the method chosen to color contours and hence control the
meaning of the LINERATE parameter.
Options
STARTCLR color. LINERATE, HILTCOLR and
STARTCLR are described next.
Data Type C*12


Description Specify the starting color index number. The first contour is appears
in this color.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 3


to be colored in the HILTCOLR color with all other contours being
colored in the STARTCLR color. If LINCLRTP and LINERATE
are defaulted, then all contours use the default color index for this
parameter.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 4
Rate at which to Change Line Color

Description The contour color is changed at this rate.
If LINCLRTP = HIGHLIGHT, then every LINERATE-th contour is
to be colored in the HILTCOLR color with all other contours being
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 0

when clipping polygon file is specified.
Options
Data Type C*8


Color for the "Opaque" Fault Lines

Description Specify the color for posting fault lines which are without depth
information.
Data Type I
Range 0 to 255
Default Value 18

Description Specify whether or not the area between contours is to be
color-filled.
Options
Data Type C*12

How much Joining of Color-filled Polygons

Description Specify how much joining of polygons should take place across
grid cells.
Macro Parameter CFILCOMP
Data Type C*8
Options
MINIMAL = Easy-case joining of polygons. Graphics files are smaller as
compared to no joining. Display times improved markedly as a
result of polygon joining.
PARTIAL = More polygons joined than with MINIMAL. Somewhat faster
than MINIMAL.
MAXIMAL = A few more polygons joined as compared to PARTIAL;
graphics files slightly smaller. More compression, but no
significant improvement in display time.


Options
YES = Use the contours to help generate the polygons.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES

Description Specify whether or not to draw the contour lines on the picture.
Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value POST

Description Specify the location of the color bar. Relative positions with regard
to the AOI are automatically positioned in the map offset areas.
Options
NONE = No color bar
Data Type C*8

Default Value NONE


Description Specify the starting color index for the colorfill.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 56

Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1

Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES


Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
ZCL PROCESSES
CONTOUR NEW BRANCH
POST DATA NEW

NIV-DATA
Macro Name NIV-DATA

Normalize Interval Velocity (Data)
Purpose This macro uses a Carter-Good Iterative Depth Algorithm (IDA) to

produce a control point file. The control point file has data fields
describing the top-lapped depth, baselapped depth, and final
normalized interval velocity (NIV) calculation.
Velocity normalization attempts to make interval velocity information

independent of depth. When this is achieved, normalized velocities
have a common depth and age. Given their common depth and age,
differences in velocity should be attributable to changes in lithology
and/or pore pressure.
Description You must provide the following parameters as separate fields on the
input control point (DATA) file:
field number for the isochrone data field (the zones time
thickness)
field number for the datum depth field Z(0) (the depth to the top of
the zone)
field number for the initial estimate for the normalized interval
velocity (NIV)
R2003.12.0 NIV-DATA 330

NIV-DATA: Description (continued)
You must enter:

minimum velocity constraint used to calculate the normalized
interval velocity for a single interval (enter zero for no constraint)
normalization depth
compaction parameter n
This is determined for each interval from crossplots of data from
velocity surveyed wells in the project area. The equation used is:
log ( ZM )
g ( VI ) = ---------------------- + log ( L A P )
n
whereVI = interval velocity ZM = midpoint depth
L = lithology A = age P = pressure
For each interval where seismic times correlate with times in the
wells, plot the algorithm of interval velocity vs. the logarithm of
midpoint depth. Calculate this value for all surveyed wells in the
project area. Fit the points with a line. The slope of the best fit line
is 1/n for the interval.
Normalization depth is an arbitrary number in the range of the depths
being converted. If multiple zones are converted, then the same number
should be used for all zones so similar lithology can be recognized
between zones by comparing normalized interval velocities (NIV).
Results A control point file (DATA) with the following fields:
a new field with resulting top-lapped depth on Z(0)
a new field with resulting base-lapped depth on Z(0)
a new field with the final estimate for normalized interval velocity
R2003.12.0 NIV-DATA: Description (continued) 331

NIV-DATA: Parameters

Choose the Input Data File
Macro Parameter DFILEI
Data Type C*24
Default Value NIV INPUT DATA FILE
o
Description MFD that contains the input data file.
Macro Parameter DIMFD
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Choose the Isochron Data Field

Description The isochron field in the input data file.
Macro Parameter FLDISO
Data Type I
Choose the Depth Data Field

Description The top horizon depth field in the input data file.
Macro Parameter FLDTOP
Data Type I
Choose Normalized Interval Velocity Field

Description The normalized interval velocity field in the input data file.
Macro Parameter FLDNIV
Data Type I
R2003.12.0 NIV-DATA: Parameters 332

Isochron Data Observations

Description Enter the type of data observation.
Macro Parameter TIMEOBS
Options
ONE WAY TIME = Seismic times originally in two way time (milliseconds)
are divided by 2000, giving one way time in
milliseconds.
TWO WAY TIME = Seismic times are originally expressed in milliseconds
as two way time, the time lapsed between the seismic
event and the return of the signal to the surface.
Data Type C*12

Default Value ONE WAY TIME
Units of Isochron and Velocity Observations

Description Enter the units of time measurement.
Macro Parameter TIMEUNT
Options
MILLISECONDS = Units measured in one thousandths of a second.
SECONDS = Units measured in seconds.
Data Type C*12

Default Value MILLISECONDS
Minimum Possible Interval Velocity

Description Minimum value of a set of interval velocities.
Macro Parameter VELMIN
Data Type R
Approximate Normalization Depth for Area

Description Approximate normalization depth for the area of the data.
Macro Parameter DEPNORM
Data Type R

Value for N in (1/N) Factor

Description Inverse compression factor.
Macro Parameter NVALUE
Data Type R
Default Value 1.5
Name the Output Top-lapped Base Field

Description Field name of the top-lapped base depth field in the output data file.
Macro Parameter FLDTLB
Data Type C*24
Default Value TOP-LAPPED BASE Z
Name the Output Base-lapped Base Field

Description Field name of the unlapped base depth field in the output data file.
Macro Parameter FLDBLB
Data Type C*24
Default Value BASE-LAPPED BASE Z
Name the Output Interval Velocity Field

Description Field name of the interval velocity field in the output data file.
Macro Parameter FLDVIO
Data Type C*24
Default Value INTERVAL VELOCITY

Description Name of the output data file.
Macro Parameter DFILEO
Data Type C*24
Default Value NIV OUTPUT DATA FILE

MFD for the Output Data File

Description MFD to use for storing the output data file.
Macro Parameter DOMFD
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
NIVA

NIV-GRIDS
Macro Name NIV-GRIDS

Normalize Interval Velocity (Grid)
Purpose This macro uses a Carter-Good Iterative Depth Algorithm (IDA) to

produce three grids:
top-lapped depth grid
base-lapped depth grid
(calculated) final normalized interval velocity (NIV) grid
The resulting grids are hung from a datum depth grid Z(0).
Description Velocity normalization attempts to make interval velocity information

independent of depth. When this is achieved, normalized velocities
have a common depth and age. Given their common depth and age,
differences in velocity should be attributable to changes in lithology
and/or pore pressure.
You must provide an input file having the following fields:
zones time thickness (isochrone)
depth to the top of the zone
initial estimate for the normalized interval velocity (NIV)
Macro panels ask for the following parameter values:
isochrone GRID
datum depth GRID Z(0) with an optional FALT file
initial NIV estimate GRID Z(0) with an optional FALT file
minimum velocity constraint used to calculate the normalized
interval velocity for a single interval (enter zero for no constraint)
normalization depth
compaction parameter n
This is determined for each interval from crossplots of data from
velocity surveyed wells in the project area. The equation used is:
log ( ZM )
log ( VI ) = ---------------------- + log ( L A P )
n
where:VI = interval velocity
ZM = midpoint depth
L = lithology A = age P = pressure
R2003.12.0 NIV-GRIDS 336

NIV-GRIDS; Description (continued)
Normalization depth is an arbitrary number in the range of the depths

being converted. If multiple zones are converted, then the same number
should be used for all zones so similar lithology can be recognized
between zones by comparing normalized interval velocities (NIV)
For each interval where seismic times correlate with times in the wells,
plot the algorithm of interval velocity vs. the logarithm of midpoint
depth. Calculate this value for all surveyed wells in the project area. Fit
the points with a line. The slope of the best fit line is 1/n for the
interval.
Results The NIV-GRIDS macro produces the following outputs
base-lapped depth GRID on Z(0)
top-lapped depth GRID on Z(0)
final NIV estimate GRID

Choose the Isochron Grid File
Description Name of the input isochron grid file.
Macro Parameter GRDI
Data Type C*24
oMFD
for the Isochron Grid
Description MFD that contains the input isochron grid file.
Macro Parameter MFDGI
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 NIV-GRIDS; Description (continued) 337

NIV-GRIDS: Parameters
Choose the Depth Grid File

Description Name of the input top horizon depth grid file.
Macro Parameter GRDD
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the Depth Grid
Description MFD that contains the input horizon depth grid file.
Macro Parameter MFDGD
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Choose the Fault File for the Depth Grid

Description Name of the input top horizon fault file.
Macro Parameter FLTD
Data Type C*24
o
Description MFD that contains input top horizon fault file.
Macro Parameter MFDFD
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 NIV-GRIDS: Parameters 338

Choose the Normalized Velocity Grid File

Description Name of the input normalized interval velocity grid file.
Macro Parameter NVGRD
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the Normalized Velocity GRID
Description MFD that contains the normalized interval velocity grid file.
Macro Parameter MFDGN
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Choose the Fault File for the NIV Grid

Description Name of the normalized interval velocity fault file.
Macro Parameter NVELFLT
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the NIV Fault File
Description MFD that contains the normalized interval velocity fault file.
Macro Parameter MFDNVELF
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5

Isochron Data Observations

Description Enter the type of data observation.
Macro Parameter TIMEOBS
Options
ONE WAY TIME = Seismic times originally in two way time (milliseconds)
are divided by 2, giving one way time in milliseconds.
TWO WAY TIME = Seismic times are originally expressed in milliseconds
as two way time, the time lapsed between the seismic
event and the return of the signal to the surface.
Data Type C*12

Default Value ONE WAY TIME
Units of Isochron and Velocity Observations

Description Enter the units of time measurement.
Macro Parameter TIMEUNT
Options
MILLISECONDS = Units measured in thousandths of a second.
SECONDS = Units measured in seconds.
Data Type C*12

Default Value MILLISECONDS
Minimum Possible Interval Velocity

Description Minimum value of a set of interval velocities.
Macro Parameter VELMIN
Data Type R
Approximate Normalization Depth for Area

Description Approximate normalization depth for the area of the data.
Macro Parameter DEPNORM
Data Type R

Value for N in (1/N) Factor

Description Inverse compaction factor.
Macro Parameter NVALUE
Data Type R
Default Value 1.5
Output Top-lapped Base Grid

Description Name of the output top-lapped base horizon depth grid file.
Macro Parameter GROLAP
Data Type C*24
Default Value TOPLAPPED BASE DEPTH
MFD for the Top-lapped Base Grid

Description MFD to use for storing the output top-lapped grid file.
Macro Parameter MFDGT
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Output Base-lapped Base Grid

Description Name of the output unlapped base horizon depth grid file.
Macro Parameter GROBAS
Data Type C*24
Default Value BASELAPPED BASE DEPTH
MFD for the Base-lapped Base Grid

Description MFD to use for storing the output unlapped grid file.
Macro Parameter MFDGB
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5

Output True Interval Velocity Grid

Description Name of the output interval velocity grid file.
Macro Parameter GROIV
Data Type C*24
Default Value TRUE INT VELOCITY
MFD for the True Interval Velocity Grid

Description MFD to use for storing the output interval velocity grid file.
Macro Parameter MFDIV
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
NIVA

PATCH-GRID
Macro Name PATCH-GRID
Menu Option Macros Operations Patch-grid Posting
Purpose This macro places a small grid (the patch) into a larger grid. Using the x
and y coordinates in both grids to determine the position for the patch,
the patch grid is resampled and replaces a section of the larger grid.
New Z values from the patch grid replace the original Z-values within
the x, y coordinates. All Z-values from the original larger grid are
removed, including ZNONs.
Output grid AOI and increments are the same as for the input grid.

a small patch grid
a larger grid to put the patch into
the ZNON (null data value) for the output grid
Results An output grid with the patch in place.
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4 4
3 3 3
2 2 2
2 3 4
1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Grid to be patched Patch grid Grid with patch
R2003.12.0 PATCH-GRID 343

PATCH-GRID: Parameters
Enter the Small Patch Grid

Description Name of the input patch grid file.
Macro Parameter PATCH
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the Patch Grid
Description The MFD that contains the input patch grid file.
Macro Parameter MFDPATCH
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
*Enter the Grid to be Patched

Description Name of the input grid file to be patched.
Data Type C*24
oMFD
for the Large Grid
Description The MFD that contains the input grid file to be patched.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 PATCH-GRID: Parameters 344

PATCH-GRID: Parameters
Enter Any Faults to be Used

Data Type C*24
o
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Output Grid Name

Description Name of the output grid.
Data Type C*24
MFD for the Output Grid

Description The MFD to use for storing the output grid.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
ZNON Value for the Output Grid

Description Specify the null data value associated with this grid.
Data Type R
ZCL PROCESSES
PATCH GRID
R2003.12.0 PATCH-GRID: Parameters 345

PENETRATE-GRIDS
Macro Name PENETRATE-GRIDS

Well-penetration Coordinates (Muliple Grids)
Purpose This macro calculates the x,y,z coordinates at which deviated well
tracks penetrate one or more gridded surface horizons.

a deviated well file, which must contain a z field
up to 5 input grids
up to 5 optional fault (FALT) files
the symbol code to be used with each penetration record
The input grid name is used as the surface name in the output data file.
Results Results are stored as a control point file containing eight fields. Five
new fields (X, Y, Z, Symbol Code, Surface Name) and three fields
(SEG I.D., Deviated Well Name and Well Track Name) that are copied
to the output file from the input file. Post the output from this macro
using View X, Y, Z Point Data to plot symbols, horizon names and
horizon penetration depths in their three dimensional relation to the
well track. This is often used in conjunction with Deviated Well
Posting to show cut point position along the well tracks.
R2003.12.0 PENETRATE-GRIDS 346

PENETRATE-GRIDS
Input and output examples follow.

Table 1: Contents of Input Deviated Well (DWEL) File
Field Type Data Type Field Use
DEVIATED WELL NAME Char*80 Identifies well (optional)
or PLATFORM IDENTIFIER
X (EASTING) Real Coordinate of vertex
Y (NORTHING) Real Coordinate of vertex
SEG I.D. Real Each well may have several drill
holes or drill tracks. SEG I.D.
changes when the hole or track
changes. One well name may
correspond to many SEG I.D.
values.
Z VALUE Real This z value must be available.
WELL TRACK NAME Char*80 This changes when the SEG I.D.
changes and is optional.
Table 2: Contents of Output Control Point (DATA) File

Data
Field Type Field Use
Type
X (EASTING) Real Coordinate of horizon crossing
Y (NORTHING) Real Coordinate of horizon crossing
Z VALUE Real Coordinate of horizon crossing
SYMBOL CODE Real User specified symbol for posting in
Z-MAP Plus
HORIZON NAME C*80 Identifies penetrated horizon
SEG I.D. Real Each well may have several drill holes
or drill tracks. SEG I.D. changes when
the hole or track changes. One well
name may correspond to many SEG
I.D. values.
DEVIATED WELL Char*80 Identifies well (optional)
NAME
NOTE: SEG I.D., Well Track Name and Deviated Well Name fields are
copied to the output file from the input file.
R2003.12.0 PENETRATE-GRIDS 347

PENETRATE-GRIDS: Parameters

Input Deviated Well File
Description Name of the input deviated well file.
Data Type C*24
Range All attached DWEL files
o
MFD for the Deviated Well
Description The MFD that contains the input deviated well file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Output Intercept Data File

Description Name of the output control point file.
Data Type C*24
MFD for Output Wells

Description The MFD to use for storing the output control point file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Number of Grids (15)

Description Number of grids to be tested for penetration. You may test up to
five.
Macro Parameter NGRIDS
Data Type I
Range 1 through 5
Default Value 1
R2003.12.0 PENETRATE-GRIDS: Parameters 348

First Input Grid for Penetration Calculation

Description Name of the first input grid file.
Macro Parameter GRIDS
Data Type C*24
o
Description The MFD that contains the first input grid file.
Macro Parameter MFDGRDS
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Fault File for First Grid

Description Name of the input fault file for the first input grid file.
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the First Fault File
Description The MFD that contains the fault file for the first input grid.
Macro Parameter MFDFLTS
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Second Input Grid for Penetration Calculation

Description Name of the second input grid file.
Macro Parameter GRID2
Data Type C*24

o
MFD for the Second Grid
Description The MFD that contains the second input grid file.
Macro Parameter MFDGRD2
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Fault File for Second Grid

Description Name of the input fault file for the second input grid file.
Macro Parameter FAULT2
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the Second Fault File
Description The MFD that contains the fault file for the second input grid file.
Macro Parameter MFDFLT2
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Third Input Grid for Penetration Calculation

Description Name of the third input grid file.
Data Type C*24
oMFD for the Third Grid

Description The MFD that contains the third input grid file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5

Fault File for Third Grid

Description Name of the input fault file for the third grid.
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the Third Fault File
Description The MFD that contains the fault file for the third input grid file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Fourth Input Grid for Penetration Calculation

Description Name of the fourth input grid file.
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the Fourth Grid
Description The MFD that contains the fourth input grid file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Fault File for Fourth Grid

Description Name of the input fault file for the fourth input grid file.
Data Type C*24

o
MFD for the Fourth Fault File
Description The MFD that contains the fault file for the fourth input grid.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Fifth Input Grid for Penetration Calculation

Description Name of the fifth input grid file.
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for Fifth Grid
Description The MFD that contains the fifth input grid file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Fault File for Fifth Grid

Description Name of the input fault file for the fifth input grid.
Data Type C*24
oMFD for the Fifth Fault File

Description The MFD that contains the fault file for the fifth input grid.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5

Symbol for First Grid

Description Enter the symbol code number for the first grid.
Data Type R
Default Value 1.0
Symbol for Second Grid

Description Enter the symbol code number for the second grid.
Macro Parameter SYMBOL2
Data Type R
Default Value 2.0
Symbol for Third Grid

Description Enter the symbol code number for the third grid.
Description SYMBOL3
Data Type R
Default Value 3.0
Symbol for Fourth Grid

Description Enter the symbol code number for the fourth grid.
Data Type R
Default Value 4.0
Symbol for Fifth Grid

Description Enter the symbol code number for the fifth grid.
Data Type R
Default Value 5.0
ZCL PROCESSES
HORIZON PENETRATE

PENETRATE-ONEGRD
Macro Name PENETRATE-ONEGRD

Well-penetration Coordinates (Single Grid)
Purpose This macro calculates the x, y, z coordinates at which deviated well

tracks penetrate one gridded surface horizon.
The input grid name is used as the surface name in the output data file.

a deviated well file. This file must contain a z field
an input grid
symbol code to be used with the penetration record
Results Results are stored as a control point file containing eight fields. Five
new fields (X, Y, Z, Symbol Code, Surface Name) and three fields
(SEG I.D., Deviated Well Name and Well Track Name) that are copied
to the output file from the input file. Post the output from this macro
using View X, Y, Z Point Data to plot symbols, horizon names and
horizon penetration depths in their three dimensional relation to the
well track. This is often used in conjunction with Deviated Well
Posting to show cut point position along the well tracks.
R2003.12.0 PENETRATE-ONEGRD 354

PENETRATE-ONEGRD
Input and output examples follow.
Table 3: Contents of Input Deviated Well (DWEL) File

Data
Type
or PLATFORM IDENTIFIER
X (EASTING) Real Coordinate of vertex
Y (NORTHING) Real Coordinate of vertex
SEG I.D. Real Each well may have several drill
holes or drill tracks. SEG ID changes
when the hole or track changes. One
well name may correspond to many
SEG ID values.
Z VALUE Real This z value must be available.
Table 4: Contents of Output Control Point (DATA) File
Data
Type
X (EASTING) Real Coordinate of horizon crossing
Y (NORTHING) Real Coordinate of horizon crossing
Z VALUE Real Coordinate of horizon crossing
SYMBOL CODE Real User specified symbol for posting in
Z-MAP Plus
HORIZON NAME Char*80 IDENTIFIES penetrated horizon
SEG I.D. Real Each well may have several drill holes
or drill tracks. SEG I.D. changes
when the hole or track changes. One
well name may correspond to many
SEG I.D. values.
NOTE: SEG I.D., Well Track Name and Deviated Well Name fields are
copied to the output file from the input file.
R2003.12.0 PENETRATE-ONEGRD 355

PENETRATE-ONEGRD: Parameters

Input Deviated Well File
Description Name of the input deviated well file.
Data Type C*24
Range All attached DWEL files
o
MFD for the Deviated Well File
Description The MFD that contains the input deviated well file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Output Intercept Data File

Description Name of the output control point file.
Data Type C*24
MFD for Output Wells

Description MFD to use for storing the output control point file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Input Grid for Penetration Calculation

Macro Parameter GRIDS
Data Type C*24
R2003.12.0 PENETRATE-ONEGRD: Parameters 356

PENETRATE-ONEGRD: Parameters
o
Macro Parameter MFDGRDS
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Fault File for Grid

Description Name of the input fault file for the input grid file.
Data Type C*24
o
Description The MFD that contains the fault file for the input grid.
Macro Parameter MFDFLTS
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Symbol for the Grid

Description Enter the symbol code number for the grid.
Data Type R
Default Value 1.0
ZCL PROCESSES
HORIZON PENETRATE
R2003.12.0 PENETRATE-ONEGRD: Parameters 357

PICT-AND-PST-DLS
Macro Name PICT-AND-PST-DLS
Menu Option Features Surveys (Canadian) Create & Post DLS Picture
Purpose This macro creates a picture for plotting Dominion Land Survey (DLS)
information. The area of interest for the picture is specified using
Meridian, Township, Range, and Section numbers for the Northwest
and Southeast corners of the desired area. Township, Section, Quarter
Section and Legal Subdivision lines may be drawn on this map along
with the Township and Section labels. Road allowances may also be
posted on the picture. A border is drawn around the map.

the UTM Zone Number
name of the graphics file
name of the new picture
Allocate the DLS Binary File Before Running this Macro

Before running this macro you must have allocated the DLS Binary File.
Enter:
setenv DLSFILE /directorypath/DLS.bin
setenv NTSFILE /directorypath/ZNTS.DAT
Results A new picture setup using DLS with the requested lines and labels
posted.
R2003.12.0 PICT-AND-PST-DLS 358

PICT-AND-PST-DLS: Parameters

UTM Zone Number (Projection Information)
Description UTM zone reference code. Conditionally required depending on
type of projection used.
Macro Parameter UTMZONE
Data Type I
Range 1 through 60
*Name of the ZGF

Description Name of the graphics file (ZGF) for the output picture.
Data Type C*80
Indicate whether ZGF is New or Old

Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value NEW
Graphics File Header (Only if ZGF is New)

Description Header text for the graphics file (ZGF). Used when the graphics file
is new.
Macro Parameter ZGFHEAD
Data Type C*40
R2003.12.0 PICT-AND-PST-DLS: Parameters 359

*Name of Picture to be Created

Description Name of the picture to be created.
Data Type C*40
Absolute Scale
Description An absolute scale or representative fraction is the ratio between the
distance on a map and the corresponding distance on the surface of
the earth. Used when a projection is active.
Macro Parameter ABSSCALE
Data Type I
Plot Margin for Left Side of Picture

Description Plot margin to the left of the map, in plotter units (in or cm).
Macro Parameter XLMARGIN
Data Type R
Plot Margin for Right Side of Picture

Description Plot margin to the right of the map, in plotter units (in or cm).
Macro Parameter XRMARGIN
Data Type R
Plot Margin for Bottom of Picture

Description Plot margin below the map, in plotter units (in or cm).
Macro Parameter YBMARGIN
Data Type R

Plot Margin for Top of Picture

Description Plot margin above the map, in plotter units (in or cm).
Macro Parameter YTMARGIN
Data Type R
Southeast Corner Meridian Value

Description Meridian number for southeast corner.
Macro Parameter SEMERIDN
Data Type I
Range 1 through 6
Southeast Corner Township Row Value

Description Township row value for southeast corner.
Macro Parameter SETWNSHP
Data Type I
Range 1 through 126
Southeast Corner Range Value

Description Range value for southeast corner.
Macro Parameter SERANGE
Data Type I
Range 1 through 30
Southeast Corner Section Value

Description Section value for southeast corner.
Macro Parameter SESCTION
Data Type I
Range 1 through 36

Northwest Corner Meridian Value

Description Meridian number for northwest corner.
Macro Parameter NWMERIDN
Data Type I
Range 1 through 6
Northwest Corner Township Row Value

Description Township row value for northwest corner.
Macro Parameter NWTWNSHP
Data Type I
Range 1 through 126
Northwest Corner Range Value

Description Range value for northwest corner.
Macro Parameter NWRANGE
Data Type I
Range 1 through 30
Northwest Corner Section Value

Description Section value for northwest corner.
Macro Parameter NWSCTION
Data Type I
Range 1 through 36

Select How to Draw Township Lines

Description Specify the line type of the Township boundaries.
Macro Parameter TOWNLINE
Options
NONE = Do not draw Township lines.
PLAIN = Draw normal Township lines.
DASHED = Draw dashed Township lines.
BOLD = Draw bold Township lines.
Data Type C*8

Default Value DASHED
Select Whether to Display Township Labels

Description Specify whether Township labels are to be drawn.
Macro Parameter TOWNLABL
Options
YES = Label the townships.
NO = Do not label the townships.
Data Type C*3

Default Value YES
Height of the Township Label

Description Height of Township Labels, in plotter units (in or cm).
Macro Parameter TOWNHGHT
Data Type R
Select How to Draw Section Lines

Description Specify the line type of the section borders.
Macro Parameter SECTLINE
Options
NONE = Do not draw section lines.
PLAIN = Draw normal section lines.
DASHED = Draw dashed section lines.
BOLD = Draw bold section lines.
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN

Decide Whether to Display Section Labels

Description Specify whether section labels are to be drawn.
Macro Parameter SECTLABL
Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
Height of the Section Label

Description Height of section labels, in plotter units (in or cm).
Macro Parameter SECTHGHT
Data Type R
Select How to Draw Quarter Section Lines

Description Specify the line type of the quarter section borders.
Macro Parameter QRTRLINE
Options
NONE = Do not draw quarter section lines.
PLAIN = Draw normal quarter section lines.
DASHED = Draw dashed quarter section lines.
BOLD = Draw bold quarter section lines.
Data Type C*8

Default Value NONE
Select How to Draw Legal Sub-division Lines

Description Specify the type of legal sub-division lines to draw on the map.
Macro Parameter SUBDLINE
Options
NONE = Do not draw legal subdivision lines.
PLAIN = Draw normal legal subdivision lines.
DASHED = Draw dashed legal subdivision lines.
BOLD = Draw bold legal subdivision lines.
Data Type C*8

Default Value NONE

Decide Whether to Display Road Allowances

Description Specify whether road allowances are to be labeled.
Macro Parameter ROADALLW
Options
YES = Label road allowances.
NO = Do not label road allowances.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
ZCL PROCESSES
PROJECTION PICTURE
POST DLS BORDER

PICT-AND-PST-NTS
Macro Name PICT-AND-PST-NTS
Menu Option Features Surveys (Canadian) Create & Post NTS Picture
Purpose This macro creates a picture on which you may plot National
Topographic Survey (NTS) information. The area of interest for the
picture is specified using either the North West and South East corners
or the North East and South West corners of an NTS or PNCA survey.
You can request NTS, Map, Series, Block, Unit and Quarter lines and
labels.
You can specify line type and width for each type of line and font and
size for each type of label.
Description You are prompted for:

either the North East and South West corners and the North West
and South East corners of the survey
type of line for NTS, Map, Series, Block, Unit and Quarter borders
line style and width of each type of border
type of labeling for the lines
size and font of the labels
Allocate the DLS Binary File Before Running This Macro

Enter:
Results A new picture setup using NTS with the requested lines and labels
posted.
R2003.12.0 PICT-AND-PST-NTS 366

PICT-AND-PST-NTS: Parameters

Graphics File Name
Description Name of the graphics file (ZGF) that contains the output picture
Data Type C*80
Picture Name
Data Type C*80

Macro Parameter NUZGF
Options
YES = New graphics file
NO = Old graphics file
Data Type C*4

Default Value NEW
UTM Zone
Description UTM zone reference code. Conditionally required depending on
type of projection used.
Data Type I
Range 1 through 60
Default Value 10
R2003.12.0 PICT-AND-PST-NTS: Parameters 367

Absolute Scale
the earth. Used when a projection is active.
Data Type I
Default Value 10000
Corners to Be Used to Specify AOI

Description Specify the corners to be used to define the AOI.
Macro Parameter CRNRS
Options
NWSE = North West and South East corners
NESW = North East and South West corners
Data Type C*4

Range NWSE
Type of NTS Survey

Description Specify NTS survey type.
Macro Parameter SRVEY
Options
NTS = Plot true National Topographic Series
PNGA = Plot Petroleum & Natural Gas Act
Data Type C*4

Range NTS
Post NTS Clipped to DLS

Description Specify how NTS and DLS are to be plotted together
Macro Parameter MCLPNTS
Options
NTS ONLY = Plot only the National Topographic Survey.
NTS CLIP DLS = Plot the National Topographic Series, clipping the
Dominion Land Survey.
Data Type C*12

Default Value NTS ONLY

String for NTS NorthWest Corner

Description System for specifying the NorthWest corner when CRNRS =
NWSE.
Macro Parameter NWNTSAOI
Data Type C*32
String for NTS SouthEast Corner

Description System for specifying the SouthEast corner when CRNRS =
NWSE.
Macro Parameter SENTSAOI
Data Type C*32
String for NTS NorthEast Corner

Description System for specifying the NorthEast corner when CRNRS =
NWSE.
Macro Parameter NENTSAOI
Data Type C*32
String for NTS SouthWest Corner

Description System for specifying the SouthWest corner, where CRNRS =
SWNE.
Macro Parameter SWNTSAOI
Data Type C*32

Level of Lines to Draw

Description Indicate what levels or density of lines to draw.
For example, if MLINLEVL = SERIES, then NTS, Map and Series
lines are drawn.
Macro Parameter MLINLEVL
Options
NTS = NTS line
MAP = Map line
SERIES = Series line
BLOCK = Block line
UNIT = Unit line
QUARTER = Quarter line
Data Type C*8

Default Value BLOCK
Level of Labels to Draw

Description Indicate the level or density of labels to draw. MLABLEVL must be
less than or equal to MLINLEVL in density.
Macro Parameter MLABLEVL
Options
NTS = NTS number
MAP = Map letter
SERIES = Series number
BLOCK = Block letter
UNIT = Unit number
QUARTER = Quarter letter
Data Type C*8

Default Value BLOCK

Level of Labels for Lower Left Corner Label

Description Specify the level or density of labels to draw in the lower left corner
of the map. MLWLLEVL must be less than or equal to
MLABELVL in density.
Macro Parameter MLWLLEVL
Options
NTS = NTS number
MAP = Map letter
UNIT = Unit number
NONE = No label
Data Type C*8

Default Value BLOCK
Type of NTS Lines

Description Specify the type of NTS lines to draw.
Macro Parameter MNTSLINE
Options
PLAIN = Draw normal NTS lines.
DASHED = Draw dashed NTS lines.
BOLD = Draw bold NTS lines.
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN
Label NTS Lines

Description Specify whether or not to label NTS lines.
Macro Parameter MNTSLABL
Options
YES = Label NTS lines.
NO = Do not label NTS lines.
Data Type C*4
Default Value YES

Color Index for NTS Lines

Description Specify color index for NTS lines.
Macro Parameter MNTSCLR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1
Weight of Bold NTS Lines

Description Pen weight of bold NTS lines.
Macro Parameter MNTSWGHT
Data Type I
Range 0 through 8
Default Value 2
Dash Length for Dashed NTS Lines

Description Length of dash for NTS lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used when
MNTSLINE = DASHED.
Macro Parameter MNTSDASH
Data Type R
Gap Length for Dashed NTS Lines

Description Length of gap for NTS lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used when
MNTSLINE = DASHED.
Macro Parameter MNTSGAP
Data Type R

Font for NTS Line Labels

Description Specify the type of label font for NTS line labels.
Macro Parameter MNTSFONT
Options
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN
Height of NTS Line Labels

Description Label height for NTS line labels, in plotter units. Used when
MNTSLABL = YES.
Macro Parameter MNTSHGHT
Data Type R
Default Value ZCL default based on map scale and size of each grid element
Type of Map Lines

Description Specify the type of MAP lines to draw.
Macro Parameter MMAPLINE
Options
PLAIN = Draw normal map lines.
DASHED = Draw dashed map lines.
BOLD = Draw bold map lines.
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN

Label Map Lines

Description Specify whether or not to label MAP lines.
Macro Parameter MMAPLABL
Options
YES = Label map lines.
NO = Do not label map lines.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
Color Index for Map Lines

Description Specify color index for MAP lines.
Macro Parameter MMAPCLR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1
Weight of Bold Map Lines

Description Pen weight of bold MAP lines.
Macro Parameter MMAPWGHT
Data Type I
Range 0 through 8
Default Value 2
Dash Length for Dashed Map Lines

Description Length of dash for MAP lines in plotter units (in or cm). Used when
MMAPLINE = DASHED.
Macro Parameter MMAPDASH
Data Type R

Gap Length for Dashed Map Lines

Description Length of gap for MAP lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used when
MMAPLINE = DASHED.
Macro Parameter MMAPGAP
Data Type R
Font for Map Line Labels

Description Specify the type of label font for map line labels.
Macro Parameter MMAPFONT
Options
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN
Height of Map Line Labels

Description Label height for MAP line labels, in plotter units. Used when
MAPLABEL = YES.
Macro Parameter MMAPHGHT
Data Type R
Type of Series Lines

Description Specify the type of SERIES lines to draw.
Macro Parameter MSRSLINE
Options
NONE = Do not draw series lines.
PLAIN = Draw normal series lines.
DASHED = Draw dashed series lines.
BOLD = Draw bold series lines.
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN

Label Series Lines

Description Specify whether or not to label SERIES lines.
Macro Parameter MSRSLABL
Options
YES = Label the series lines.
NO = Do not label the series lines.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
Color Index for Series Lines

Description Specify color index for SERIES lines.
Macro Parameter MSRSCLR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1
Weight of Bold Series Lines

Description Pen weight of bold SERIES lines.
Macro Parameter MSRSWGHT
Data Type I
Range 1 through 8
Default Value 2
Dash Length for Dashed Series Lines

Description Length of dash for SERIES lines in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MSRLINE = DASHED.
Macro Parameter MSRSDASH
Data Type R
Gap Length for Dashed Series Lines

Description Length of gap for SERIES lines in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MSRLINE = DASHED.
Macro Parameter MSRSGAP
Data Type R

Font for Series Line Labels

Description Specify the type of label font for SERIES line labels.
Macro Parameter MSRSFONT
Options
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN
Height of Series Line Labels

Description Label height for MAP line labels in plotter units. Used when
MSRLABL = YES.
Macro Parameter MSRSHGHT
Data Type R
Type of Block Lines

Description Specify the type of BLOCK lines to draw.
Macro Parameter MBLKLINE
Options
PLAIN = Draw normal block lines.
DASHED = Draw dashed block lines.
BOLD = Draw bold block lines.
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN

Label Block Lines

Description Specify whether or not to label BLOCK lines.
Macro Parameter MBLKLABL
Options
YES = Label block lines.
NO = Do not label block lines.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
Color Index for Block Lines

Description Specify color index for BLOCK lines.
Macro Parameter MBLKCLR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1
Weight of Bold Block Lines

Description Pen weight of bold BLOCK lines.
Macro Parameter MBLKWGHT
Data Type I
Range 0 through 8
Default Value 2
Dash Length for Dashed Block Lines

Description Length of dash for BLOCK lines in plotter units (in or cm).
Used when MBLCLINE = DASHED.
Macro Parameter MBLKDASH
Data Type R
Gap Length for Dashed Block Lines

Description Length of gap for BLOCK lines in plotter units (in or cm).
Used when MBLKLINE = DASHED.
Macro Parameter MBLKGAP
Data Type R

Font for Block Line Labels

Description Specify the type of label font for BLOCK line labels.
Macro Parameter MBLKFONT
Options
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN
Height of Block Line Labels

Description Label height for BLOCK line labels in plotter units.
Used when MBLKLABL = YES.
Macro Parameter MBLKHGHT
Data Type R
Type of Unit Lines

Description Specify the type of UNIT lines to draw.
Macro Parameter MUNTLINE
Options
PLAIN = Draw normal unit lines.
DASHED = Draw dashed unit lines.
BOLD = Draw bold unit lines.
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN

Label Unit Lines

Description Specify whether or not to label UNIT lines.
Macro Parameter MUNTLABL
Options
YES = Label the unit lines.
NO = Do not label the unit lines.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
Color Index for Unit Lines

Description Specify color index for UNIT lines.
Macro Parameter MUNTCLR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1
Weight of Bold Unit Lines

Description Pen weight of bold UNIT lines.
Macro Parameter MUNTWGHT
Data Type I
Range 1 through 8
Default Value 2
Dash Length for Dashed Unit Lines

Description Length of dash for UNIT lines in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MUNLINE = DASHED.
Macro Parameter MUNTDASH
Data Type R
Gap Length for Dashed Unit Lines

Description Length of gap for UNIT lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MUNLINE = DASHED.
Macro Parameter MUNTGAP
Data Type R

Font for Unit Line Labels

Description Specify the type of label font for UNIT line labels.
Macro Parameter MUNTFONT
Options
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN
Height of Unit Line Labels

Description Label height for UNIT line labels, in plotter units. Used when
MUNTLABL = YES.
Macro Parameter MUNTHGHT
Data Type R
Type of Quarter Lines

Description Specify the type of QUARTER lines to draw.
Macro Parameter MQTRLINE
Options
PLAIN = Draw normal quarter lines.
DASHED = Draw dashed quarter lines.
BOLD = Draw bold quarter lines.
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN

Label Quarter Lines

Description Specify whether or not to label QUARTER lines.
Macro Parameter MQTRLABL
Options
YES = Label the quarter lines.
NO = Do not label the quarter lines.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
Color Index for Quarter Lines

Description Specify color index for QUARTER lines.
Macro Parameter MQTRCLR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1
Weight of Bold Quarter Lines

Description Pen weight of bold QUARTER lines.
Macro Parameter MQTRWGHT
Data Type I
Range 0 through 8
Default Value 2
Dash Length for Dashed Quarter Lines

Description Length of dash for QUARTER lines in plotter units (in or cm).
Used when MQTRLINE = DASHED.
Macro Parameter MQTRDASH
Data Type R
Gap Length for Dashed Quarter Lines

Description Length of gap for QUARTER lines, in plotter units (in or cm).
Used when MQTRLINE = DASHED.
Macro Parameter MQTRGAP
Data Type R

Font for Quarter Line Labels

Description Specify the type of label font for QUARTER line labels.
Macro Parameter MQTRFONT
Options
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN
Height of Quarter Line Labels

Description Label height for QUARTER line labels, in plotter units. Used when
QRTRLABEL = YES.
Macro Parameter MQTRHGHT
Data Type R
Label Lower Left Corner

Description Specify whether lower left corner is to be labeled.
Macro Parameter MLWLLABL
Options
YES = Label the lower left corner.
NO = Do not label the lower left corner.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES

Font for Lower Left Labels

Description Specify the type of label font for the lower left corner label.
Macro Parameter MLWLFONT
Options
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN
Height of Lower Left Corner Labels

Description Label height for lower left corner label, in plotter units. Used when
MLWLLABL = YES.
Macro Parameter MLWLHGHT
Data Type R
ZCL PROCESSES
PROJECTION
PICTURE
POST NTS

PICT-NTS-DLS
Macro Name PICT-NTS-DLS
Menu Option Features Surveys (Canadian) Create DLS/NTS Picture
Purpose This macro creates a picture whose AOI is specified using the
Dominion Land Survey (DLS) and/or National Topographic Survey
(NTS) system. You indicate whether each corner is to be defined in
NTS or DLS coordinates and you supply the definition.
If the corner is defined in DLS, you are asked to supply the Township,
Range, and Section numbers for the corner. If the corner is defined in
NTS, you are asked to supply the NTS description for the corner.
Note that only the picture is created; no annotation or lines are drawn.

The North East and South West corners or the North West and
South East corners of the NTS survey
The Meridian, township, range and section of any DLS corner
UTM zone and absolute scale value

Enter:
Results A new picture setup using DLS, NTS, or both.
R2003.12.0 PICT-NTS-DLS 385

PICT-NTS-DLS: Parameters

Graphics File Name
Description Name of the graphics file (ZGF) that contains this picture.
Data Type C*80
Picture Name
Data Type C*80

Macro Parameter NUZGF
Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value NEW
UTM Zone
Description UTM zone reference code.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 60
Default Value 10
R2003.12.0 PICT-NTS-DLS: Parameters 386

Absolute Scale
the earth.
Data Type I
Default Value 10000
Corners to Be Used to Specify AOI

Description Specify the corners to be used to define the AOI. Used when
CRNRS = NWSE.
Macro Parameter CRNRS
Options
NWSE = North West and South East corners
NESW = North East and Southwest corners
Data Type C*4

Default Value NWSE
Survey Type for Northwest Corner (AOI = NWSE)

Description System for specifying the Northwest corner when CRNRS =
NWSE.
Macro Parameter NWCRNR
Options
DLS = Dominion Land Survey
NTS = National Topographic Survey
Data Type C*4

Default Value NTS
Survey Type for Southeast Corner (AOI=NWSE)

Description System for specifying the Southeast corner when CRNRS =
NWSE.
Macro Parameter SECRNR
Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value NTS

Survey Type for Northeast Corner (AOI=NESW)

Description System for specifying the Northeast corner when AOITYPE=
DLS/NTS PROJECTED and CORNERS = NWSE.
Macro Parameter NECRNR
Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value NTS
Type of Survey for Southwest Corner AOI=NESW)

Description System for specifying the Southwest corner when CRNRS =
NWSE.
Macro Parameter SWCRNR
Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value NTS
Type of NTS Survey

Description Specify NTS survey type. Used when NWCRNR, NECRNR,
SWCRNRS = is set to NTS.
Description RNER, or SECORNER is set to NTS.
Macro Parameter SRVEY
Options
NTS = True National Topographic Survey corners.
PNGA = Petroleum & Natural Gas Act corners.
Data Type C*4

Default Value NTS

String for NTS Northwest Corner

Description System for specifying the Northwest corner when and CRNRS =
NWSE.
Macro Parameter NWNTSAOI
Data Type C*32
String for NTS Southeast Corner

Description System for specifying the Southeast corner when CRNRS =
NWSE.
Macro Parameter SENTSAOI
Data Type C*32
String for NTS Northeast Corner

Description System for specifying the Northeast corner when and CRNRS =
SWNE.
Macro Parameter NENTSAOI
Data Type C*32
String for NTS Southwest Corner

Description System for specifying the Southwest corner, where CRNRS =
SWNE.
Macro Parameter SWNTSAOI
Data Type C*32
Meridian for DLS Northwest Corner

Description Meridian number for Northwest corner. Required when CRNRS =
NWSE and NWCRNR = DLS.
Macro Parameter NWMRIDAN
Data Type I
Range 1 through 6

Range for DLS Northwest Corner

Description Range value for Northwest corner. Required when CRNRS =
NWSE and NWCORNER = DLS.
Macro Parameter NWRNGE
Range 1 through 30
Township for DLS Northwest Corner

Description Township row value for Northwest corner. Required when CRNRS
= NWSE and NWCRNR = DLS.
Macro Parameter NWTOWNSH
Data Type I
Range 1 through 126
Section for DLS Northwest Corner

Description Section value for Northwest corner. Required when CRNRS =
NWSE and NWCORNER = DLS.
Macro Parameter NWSECTON
Data Type I
Range 1 through 36
Default Value: ZCL default
Meridian for DLS Southeast Corner

Description Meridian number for Southeast corner. Required when CRNRS =
NWSE and SECORNER = DLS.
Macro Parameter SEMRIDAN
Data Type I
Range 1 through 6

Range for DLS Southeast Corner

Description Range value for Southeast corner. Required when CRNRS =
NWSE and SECORNER = DLS.
Macro Parameter SERNGE
Data Type I
Range 1 through 30
Township for DLS Southeast Corner

Description Township row value for Southeast corner. Required when CRNRS
= NWSE and SECORNER = DLS.
Macro Parameter SETOWNSH
Data Type I
Range 1 through 126
Section for DLS Southeast Corner

Description Section value for Southeast corner. Required when
AOITYPE = DLS/NTS PROJECTED, CRNRS = NWSE and
SECORNER = DLS.
Macro Parameter SESECTON
Data Type I
Range 1 through 36
Meridian for DLS Northeast Corner

Description Meridian number for Northeast corner. Required when
AOITYPE = DLS//NTS PROJECTED, CRNRS = NESW and
NECORNER = DLS.
Macro Parameter NEMRIDAN
Data Type I
Range 1 through 6

Range for DLS Northeast Corner

Description Range value for Northeast corner. Required when
CRNRS = NESW and NECORNER = DLS.
Macro Parameter NERNGE
Range 1 through 30
Township for DLS Northeast Corner

Description Township row value for Northeast corner. Required when
CRNRS = NESW and NECORNER = DLS.
Macro Parameter NETOWNSH
Data Type I
Range 1 through 126
Section for DLS Northeast Corner

Description Section value for Northeast corner. Required when
CRNRS = NESW and NECORNER = DLS
Macro Parameter NESECTON
Data Type I
Range 1 through 36
Meridian for DLS Southwest Corner

Description Meridian number for Southwest corner. Required when
CRNRS = NESW and SWCORNER = DLS.
Macro Parameter SWMRIDAN
Data Type I
Range 1 through 6

Range for DLS Southwest Corner

Description Range value for Southwest corner. Required when
Macro Parameter SWRNGE
Data Type I
Range 1 through 30
Township for DLS Southwest Corner

Description Township row value for Southwest corner. Required when
Macro Parameter SWTOWNSH
Data Type I
Range 1 through 126
Section for DLS Southwest Corner

Description Section value for Southwest corner. Required when CRNRS =
NESW and SWCORNER = DLS.
Macro Parameter SWSECTON
Data Type I
Range 1 through 36
ZCL PROCESSES
PROJECTION
PICTURE

PICTURE-STATS
Macro Name PICTURE-STATS
Menu Option Macros Utilities Picture Statistics
Purpose This macro gives information on a picture.
Description This macro generates a report with area of interest (AOI) and projection
information about the specified picture file.
PICTURE-STATS requires the name of the picture file to be analyzed.
This macro does not supply LGB types. To see a list of the LGB types
present in a picture file, select File Info
File/Picture Information in the Z-MAP Plus window.
Results Creates a printout containing AOI and projection information about the
picture.

*Select Graphics File
Description Select the name of graphics file
Macro Parameter ZFGNAME
Data Type C*80
Range All graphics files that reside in the chosen directory paths
*Select Picture
Description Select the input picture
Macro Parameter PICURE
Data Type C*80
Range All pictures on the selected graphics file
ZCL PROCESSES
R2003.12.0 PICTURE-STATS 394

POLYGON-CLOSE
Macro Name POLYGON-CLOSE
Menu Option Macros Utilities Close Polygons in Vertex File
Purpose This macro closes all polygons in a VERT file. Closed polygons are
output to a new vertex file. After running this macro, check individual
polygons for intersecting or crossing lines.
When Using Polygon Close on a Fault File

To apply this macro to a fault file, you must first convert the fault file to a
vertex file using the File Conversion process (under either Z-MAP Plus
Operations or ZCL). For the macro to work correctly, SEG I.D. must be in
field position three.
Results Closed polygon(s) output to a new vertex file.
R2003.12.0 POLYGON-CLOSE 395

POLYGON-CLOSE: Parameters

*Select Input Polygon File
Description Name of the input polygon file.
Macro Parameter POLYIN
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the Input Vertex File
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Name Output Polygon File

Description Name of the output polygon file.
Macro Parameter POLYOUT
Data Type C*24
MFD for Output Polygon File

Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
DELETE FILE IMPORT
POLYGON CLIP SINGLE DATA OPS
SPAWN
R2003.12.0 POLYGON-CLOSE: Parameters 396

POLYGON-FILL
Macro Name POLYGON-FILL
Menu Option Features Polygons Color-filled Polygons
Purpose This macro takes polygons stored in a vertex file, fills them with a solid
color, and saves the filled polygons in an MFD.
When Posting to a Picture, Use the .PICMAC Version of a Macro

The .PICMAC version writes to the picture currently displayed in the
Z-MAP Plus window and updates the display list. However, if you execute
the .ZCLMAC version in Z-MAP Plus, you must read the picture again to see
the colorfill that results.
Results Color-filled polygons on the current picture.
*Enter the Filename of the Polygon(s)

Description Name of the input vertex file.
Data Type C*24
Range All attached VERT and FALT files
o
MFD of the Input Vertex File
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 POLYGON-FILL 397

POLYGON-FILL: Parameters
Coordinate System for the Polygon File

Description Specify the coordinate system for the polygon vertices.
Macro Parameter COORDSYS
Options
ENGINEERING = Specify vertices in engineering coordinates.
PLOTTER = Specify vertices in plotter coordinates (in or cm).
Data Type C*12

Default Value ENGINEERING
Get Color from Where

Description Specify whether to use an assigned color index or a field in the
polygon file to determine the index used for the colorfill.
Macro Parameter COLRFROM
Options
COLOR FIELD = Use a color field (type 41) from the polygon file to
determine the index used for colorfill.
COLOR NUMBER = Use the color index number specified by INDEX.
Data Type C*12

Range COLOR NUMBER
Enter the Color Index Number (if needed)

Description Specify the color to use for filling all polygons.
Macro Parameter INDEX
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 17
ZCL PROCESSES
COLOR POLYGONS
R2003.12.0 POLYGON-FILL: Parameters 398

POST-DLS
Macro Name POST-DLS
Menu Option Features Surveys (Canadian)

Post Township/Section/Range (DLS)
Purpose This macro posts Dominion Land Survey (DLS) lines on an already
created picture. (You may create a picture with DLS lines using the
PICT-NTS-DLS macro.) On this map the Township, Section, Quarter
Section and DLS lines may be drawn along with the Township and
Section labels. Road allowances may also be posted on the picture.

type of line for Township, Section, Quarter, Section and Legal
Subdivision (DLS) lines
whether road allowances are posted
Allocate the DLS Binary File Before Running This Macro

Type:
Results A DLS grid with the requested lines and labels posted.
R2003.12.0 POST-DLS 399

POST-DLS: Parameters

Select How to Draw Township Lines
Description Specify the line type for the Township borders.
Options
Data Type C*8

Decide Whether to Display Township Labels

Description Specify whether township labels are to be drawn.
Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
Height of the Township Labels

Description Height of the township labels, in plotter units (in or cm).
Data Type R
R2003.12.0 POST-DLS: Parameters 400

Select How to Draw Section Lines

Options
NONE = Do not draw section borders.
PLAIN = Draw normal section borders.
DASHED = Draw dashed section borders.
BOLD = Draw bold section borders.
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN
Decide Whether to Display Section Labels

Description Specify whether to display section labels.
Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES

Data Type R
Select How to Draw Quarter Sec. Lines

Description Specify the line type of the Quarter Section borders.
Options
Data Type C*8

Default Value NONE

Select How to Draw Legal Subdivision Lines

Description Specify the line type for the legal sub-division lines.
Options
Data Type C*8

Default Value NONE
Decide Whether to Display Road Allowances

Description Specify whether Road Allowances are to be labeled.
Options
YES = Label the road allowances.
NO = Do not label the road allowances.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
ZCL PROCESSES
POST DLS

POST-LINE
Macro Name POST-LINE
Menu Option Macros Graphics Post Line
Purpose When posting culture data, you may want to post only one line from a
line type file. This macro allows you to select and post one line, thereby
eliminating the need to post all lines in a line type file and then delete
lines you do not want.
Description This macro extracts a line from a VERT, DATA, or FALT type file
based on its SEG I.D. and posts it on the current picture. You can
control the following for the line you are posting:
line SEG I.D.
line style
line color index
line weight

name of the VERT, DATA or FALT file that contains the line
SEG I.D. field in the input file
SEG I.D. integer value of the line to be posted
line style and line color of line to post
Results The line is extract from the chosen file and posted on the current picture
in the manner requested.
R2003.12.0 POST-LINE 403

POST-LINE: Parameters

Select the File Containing the Line
Description Name of the input file from which the line is to be extracted.
Macro Parameter VERTIN
Data Type C*24
o
Description MFD that contains the input vertex file
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Segment I.D. Field in the Input File

Description SEG I.D. field in the input file for the line to be posted.
Macro Parameter SEGIDF
Data Type I
Enter the Segment I.D. of the Line to Post

Description Number of the SEG I.D. to post.
Macro Parameter WHICHL
Data Type I
Default Value 1
R2003.12.0 POST-LINE: Parameters 404

Select the Line Style to use

Description This parameter determines the line style for the line you are
posting. You can use a solid, single dash, or hachured line.
Macro Parameter LINESTYLE
Options
SOLID
SINGLE DASH
HACHURE
Data Type C*12

Default Value SOLID
Direction of Hachure Marks

Description Hachure placement relative to line posting direction when
LINESTYLE = HACHURE. You can place hachure marks on the
left or right side of the line.
Macro Parameter HATCHDIR
Options
LEFT
RIGHT
Data Type C*8

Default Value LEFT
Length Dashes/Hachures
Description Length of the dashes when LINESTYLE = SINGLE DASH or
when LINESTYLE = HACHURE, length of each hachure tick.
This length is plotter units (in or cm).
Macro Parameter DASHLENGTH
Data Type R

Length Gap between Dashes/Hachures

Description Length of the gaps between dashes when LINESTYLE =
DASHED, or length between hachure ticks on the line when
LINESTYLE = HACHURE, in plotter units (in or cm).
Macro Parameter DASHGAP
Data Type R
Select the Color Index to use

Description The color index used to post the line in the requested style.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 40
Select the Line Weight used 1-8

Description Thickness of the line to be posted. This is in pen widths on a plotter
or pixels on a VDU device.
Macro Parameter WGHT
Data Type I
Range 1 through 8
Default Value 2
ZCL PROCESSES
DELETE FILE SELECT
POST DATA NEW

POST-NTS
Macro Name POST-NTS
Menu Option Features Surveys (Canadian)

Post National Topo. Survey (NTS)
Purpose This macro posts National Topographic Survey (NTS), Map, Series,
Block, Unit and/or Quarter lines and labels on an existing picture. The
macro also enables you to specify line type and width for each type of
line, as well as the font and size for each type of label.

type of line for NTS, Map, Series, Block, Unit and/or Quarter
boundaries
line type and width of each line
size and font of the labels
Results An NTS grid with the requested lines and labels posted.
R2003.12.0 POST-NTS 407

POST-NTS: Parameters
Post NTS Clipped to DLS

Description Specify how NTS and DLS are to be plotted together.
Macro Parameter MCLPNTS
Options
NTS ONLY = Plot only the National Topographic Survey.
NTS CLIP DLS = Plot the National Topographic Survey, clipping the
Dominion Land Survey.
Data Type C*12

Default Value NTS ONLY
Survey Type
Macro Parameter MSURVEY
Options
NTS = Plot true National Topographic Series.
PNGA = Plot Petroleum & Natural Gas Act.
Data Type C*4

Range NTS

Description Level or density of lines to draw. For example, if MLINLEVL =
SERIES, then NTS, Map and Series lines are drawn.
Options
NTS = NTS boundaries
MAP = Map boundaries
SERIES = Series boundaries
BLOCK = Block boundaries
UNIT = Unit boundaries
QUARTER = Quarter boundaries
Data Type C*8

Default Value BLOCK
R2003.12.0 POST-NTS: Parameters 408


Options
NTS = NTS number
MAP = Map letter
UNIT = Unit number
Data Type C*8

Default Value BLOCK

Description Specify the level or density of labels to draw in lower left corner of
the map. MLWLLEVL must be less than or equal to MLABLEVL
in density.
Options
NTS = NTS number
MAP = Map letter
UNIT = Unit number
NONE = No label
Data Type C*8

Default Value BLOCK

Type of NTS Lines

Options
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN
Label NTS Lines

Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES

Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1

Data Type I
Range 1 through 8
Default Value 2


MNTSLINE = DASHED.
Data Type R
Default Value 0.1 in or 0.25 cm Gap Length for Dashed NTS Lines
MNTSLINE = DASHED.
Data Type R

Options
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN

Description Label height for NTS line labels, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when NTSLABEL = YES.
Data Type R

Type of Map Lines

Description Specify the type of map lines to draw.
Options
PLAIN = Draw normal MAP lines.
DASHED = Draw dashed MAP lines.
BOLD = Draw bold MAP lines.
Default Value PLAIN
Label Map Lines

Description Specify whether or not to label Map lines.
Options
YES = Label Map lines.
NO = Do not label Map lines.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES

Description Specify color index for Map lines.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1

Description Pen weight of bold Map lines.
Data Type I
Range 1 through 8
Default Value 2


Description Length of dash for Map lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used when
MMAPLINE = DASHED.
Data Type R

Description Length of gap for Map lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used when
MMAPLINE = DASHED.
Data Type R

Options
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN

Description Label height for Map line labels, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MAPLABEL = YES.
Data Type R


Description Specify the type of Series lines to draw.
Options
PLAIN = Draw normal SERIES lines.
DASHED = Draw dashed SERIES lines.
BOLD = Draw bold SERIES lines.
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN
Label Series Lines

Description Specify whether or not to label Series lines.
Options
YES = Label the SERIES lines.
NO = Do not label the SERIES lines.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES

Description Specify color index for Series lines.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1

Description Pen weight of bold Series lines.
Data Type I
Range 1 through 8
Default Value 2


Description Length of dash for Series lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MSRSLINE = DASHED.
Data Type R

Description Length of gap for Series lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
Data Type R

Description Specify the type of label font for Series line labels.
Options
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN

when MSRSLABL = YES.
Data Type R

Type of Block Lines

Description Specify the type of Block lines to draw.
Options
PLAIN = Draw normal Block lines.
DASHED = Draw dashed Block lines.
BOLD = Draw bold Block lines.
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN
Label Block Lines

Description Specify whether or not to label Block lines.
Options
YES = Label Block lines.
NO = Do not label Block lines.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES

Description Specify color index for Block lines.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1

Description Pen weight of bold Block lines.
Data Type I
Range 1 through 8
Default Value 2


Description Length of dash for Block lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MBLKLINE = DASHED.
Data Type R

Description Length of gap for Block lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MBLCKLINE = DASHED.
Data Type R

Description Specify the type of label font for Block line labels.
Options
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN

Description Label height for Block line labels in, plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MBLCKLABL = YES.
Data Type R

Type of Unit Lines

Description Specify the type of Unit lines to draw.
Options
PLAIN = Draw normal Unit lines.
DASHED = Draw dashed Unit lines.
BOLD = Draw bold Unit lines.
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN
Label Unit Lines

Description Specify whether or not to label Unit lines.
Options
YES = Label Unit lines.
NO = Do not label Unit lines.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES

Description Specify color index for Unit lines.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1

Description Pen weight of bold Unit lines.
Data Type I
Range 1 through 8
Default Value 2


Description Length of dash for Unit lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used when
MUNTLINE = DASHED.
Data Type R

Description Length of gap for Unit lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used when
MUNTLINE = DASHED.
Data Type R

Description Specify the type of label font for Unit line labels.
Options
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN

Description Label height for Unit line labels, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MUNTLABEL = YES.
Data Type R


Description Specify the type of Quarter lines to draw.
Options
PLAIN = Draw normal Quarter lines.
DASHED = Draw dashed Quarter lines.
BOLD = Draw bold Quarter lines.
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN
Label Quarter Lines

Description Specify whether or not to label Quarter lines.
Options
YES = Label Quarter lines.
NO = Do not label Quarter lines.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES

Description Specify color index for Quarter lines.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1

Description Pen weight of bold Quarter lines.
Data Type I
Range 1 through 8
Default Value 2


Description Length of dash for Quarter lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MQTRLINE = DASHED.
Data Type R

Description Length of gap for Quarter lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
Data Type R

Description Specify the type of label font for Quarter line labels.
Options
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN

Description Label height for Quarter line labels, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MQTRLABL = YES.
Data Type R

Label Lower Left Corner

Options
YES = Label lower left corner.
NO = Do not label lower left corner.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES

Options
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN

Description Label height for lower left corner label, in plotter units (in or cm).
Used when MLWLLABL = YES.
Data Type R
ZCL PROCESSES
POST NTS

POST-NTS-DLS
Macro Name POST-NTS-DLS
Menu Option Features Surveys (Canadian) Post DLS & NTS Surveys
Purpose This macro posts National Topographic Survey (NTS), Map, Series,
Block, Unit and/or Quarter lines and labels on an existing picture. The
macro also enables you to specify line type and width for each type of
line, as well as the font and size for each type of label.
This macro also posts Dominion Land Survey (DLS) lines on an
already created picture. (You may create a picture with DLS lines using
the PICT-NTS-DLS macro.) On this map the Township, Section,
Quarter Section and DLS lines may be drawn along with the Township
and Section labels. Road allowances may also be posted on the picture.
The NTS and DLS will be clipped to each other along the British
Columbia and Alberta border.
Warning
The map must have both NTS and DLS areas present or this macro aborts.

type of line for NTS, Map, Series, Block, Unit and/or Quarter
boundaries
line type and width of each NTS line
type of labeling for the NTS lines
size and font of the NTS labels
type of line for Township, Section, Quarter, Section and Legal
Subdivision (DLS) lines
type of labeling for the DLS lines
whether DLS road allowances are posted

Type:
Results DLS and NTS grids with the requested lines and labels posted.
R2003.12.0 POST-NTS-DLS 423

POST-NTS-DLS: Parameters
Survey Type
Macro Parameter MSURVEY
Options
NTS = Plot true National Topographic Series.
PNGA = Plot Petroleum & Natural Gas Act.
Data Type C*4

Range NTS

Description Level or density of lines to draw. For example, if MLINLEVL =
SERIES, then NTS, Map and Series lines are drawn.
Options
NTS = NTS boundaries
MAP = Map boundaries
SERIES = Series boundaries
BLOCK = Block boundaries
UNIT = Unit boundaries
QUARTER = Quarter boundaries
Data Type C*8

Default Value BLOCK
R2003.12.0 POST-NTS-DLS: Parameters 424


Options
NTS = NTS number
MAP = Map letter
UNIT = Unit number
Data Type C*8

Default Value BLOCK

Description Specify the level or density of labels to draw in lower left corner of
the map. MLWLLEVL must be less than or equal to MLABLEVL
in density.
Options
NTS = NTS number
MAP = Map letter
UNIT = Unit number
NONE = No label
Data Type C*8

Default Value BLOCK

Type of NTS Lines

Options
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN
Type of Map Lines

Description Specify the type of map lines to draw.
Options
PLAIN = Draw normal MAP lines.
DASHED = Draw dashed MAP lines.
BOLD = Draw bold MAP lines.
Default Value PLAIN

Description Specify the type of Series lines to draw.
Options
PLAIN = Draw normal SERIES lines.
DASHED = Draw dashed SERIES lines.
BOLD = Draw bold SERIES lines.
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN

Type of Block Lines

Description Specify the type of Block lines to draw.
Options
PLAIN = Draw normal Block lines.
DASHED = Draw dashed Block lines.
BOLD = Draw bold Block lines.
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN
Type of Unit Lines

Description Specify the type of Unit lines to draw.
Options
PLAIN = Draw normal Unit lines.
DASHED = Draw dashed Unit lines.
BOLD = Draw bold Unit lines.
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN

Description Specify the type of Quarter lines to draw.
Options
PLAIN = Draw normal Quarter lines.
DASHED = Draw dashed Quarter lines.
BOLD = Draw bold Quarter lines.
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN

Label NTS Lines?

Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
Label Map Lines?

Description Specify whether or not to label Map lines.
Options
YES = Label Map lines.
NO = Do not label Map lines.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
Label Series Lines?

Description Specify whether or not to label Series lines.
Options
YES = Label the SERIES lines.
NO = Do not label the SERIES lines.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
Label Block Lines?

Description Specify whether or not to label Block lines.
Options
YES = Label Block lines.
NO = Do not label Block lines.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES

Label Unit Lines?

Description Specify whether or not to label Unit lines.
Options
YES = Label Unit lines.
NO = Do not label Unit lines.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
Label Quarter Lines?

Description Specify whether or not to label Quarter lines.
Options
YES = Label Quarter lines.
NO = Do not label Quarter lines.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
Label Lower Left Corner?

Options
YES = Label lower left corner.
NO = Do not label lower left corner.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES

Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1


Description Specify color index for Map lines.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1

Description Specify color index for Series lines.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1

Description Specify color index for Block lines.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1

Description Specify color index for Unit lines.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1

Description Specify color index for Quarter lines.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1


Data Type I
Range 1 through 8

Description Pen weight of bold Map lines.
Data Type I
Range 1 through 8
Default Value 2

Description Pen weight of bold Series lines.
Data Type I
Range 1 through 8
Default Value 2

Description Pen weight of bold Block lines.
Data Type I
Range 1 through 8
Default Value 2

Description Pen weight of bold Unit lines.
Data Type I
Range 1 through 8
Default Value 2


Description Pen weight of bold Quarter lines.
Data Type I
Range 1 through 8
Default Value 2

MNTSLINE = DASHED.
Data Type R

Description Length of dash for Map lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used when
MMAPLINE = DASHED.
Data Type R

Description Length of dash for Series lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
Data Type R

Description Length of dash for Block lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MBLKLINE = DASHED.
Data Type R


Description Length of dash for Unit lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used when
MUNTLINE = DASHED.
Data Type R

Description Length of dash for Quarter lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
Data Type R
Gap Length for Dashed NTS Lines

MNTSLINE = DASHED.
Data Type R

Description Length of gap for Map lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used when
MMAPLINE = DASHED.
Data Type R

Description Length of gap for Series lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
Data Type R


Description Length of gap for Block lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MBLCKLINE = DASHED.
Data Type R

Description Length of gap for Unit lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used when
MUNTLINE = DASHED.
Data Type R

Description Length of gap for Quarter lines, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
Data Type R

Options
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN


Options
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN

Description Specify the type of label font for Series line labels.
Options
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN

Description Specify the type of label font for Block line labels.
Options
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN


Description Specify the type of label font for Unit line labels.
Options
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN

Description Specify the type of label font for Quarter line labels.
Options
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN

Options
PLAIN
SIMPLE
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN


Description Label height for NTS line labels, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when NTSLABEL = YES.
Data Type R

when MAPLABEL = YES.
Data Type R

when MSRSLABL = YES.
Data Type R

Description Label height for Block line labels in, plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MBLCKLABL = YES.
Data Type R

Description Label height for Unit line labels, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MUNTLABEL = YES.
Data Type R


Description Label height for Quarter line labels, in plotter units (in or cm). Used
when MQTRLABL = YES.
Data Type R

Description Label height for lower left corner label, in plotter units (in or cm).
Used when MLWLLABL = YES.
Data Type R
Line Type for Township Lines

Description Specify the line type for the Township borders.
Options
Data Type C*8

Line Type for Section Lines

Options
NONE = Do not draw section borders.
PLAIN = Draw normal section borders.
DASHED = Draw dashed section borders.
BOLD = Draw bold section borders.
Data Type C*8

Default Value PLAIN

Line Type for Quarter Section Lines

Description Specify the line type of the Quarter Section borders.
Options
Data Type C*8

Default Value NONE
Line Type for Line Type for Legal Subdivision Lines

Description Specify the line type for the legal sub-division lines.
Options
Data Type C*8

Default Value NONE
Display Township Labels?

Description Specify whether township labels are to be drawn.
Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES

Display Section Labels?

Description Specify whether to display section labels.
Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
Display Road Allowances?

Description Specify whether Road Allowances are to be labeled.
Options
YES = Label the road allowances.
NO = Do not label the road allowances.
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES
Height of the Township Labels

Description Height of the township labels, in plotter units (in or cm).
Data Type R

Data Type R
ZCL PROCESSES
POST NTS POST DLS

POST-PIC-STATS
Macro Name POST-PIC-STATS
Menu Option Features Projection Box
Purpose This macro draws a box on a map and posts information about the
scale, size. and projection of the map.
Description The user is allowed to specify the location of the box on the map, but
the size will always remain fixed at five inches wide and three inches
high. This macro creates a new, temporary picture on the .zgf file and
places the required scale and projection information into the new
picture. This picture is then added as an Index Map graphic feature onto
the users picture. The temporary picture created by the macro is
erased.
Placement of the box can be from the lower left corner of the box in
plotter units (X and/or Y value) or from the lower right corner in map
units (X and/or Y value). The simplest method is to place the box using
map units; move the cursor to the desired location on the map and press
mouse button 2. The user can also mix the placement units. For
example, the X coordinate can be from the lower right in map units, and
the corresponding Y coordinate can be from the lower left in plotter
units. The projection box looks best when aligned next to the title box
which is usually .5 inches from the bottom of the map.
The default color of the box is transparent. The user can optionally fill
the box with an opaque color but nothing underneath the box will be
visible.
Help text is available when creating a POST-PIC-STAT. To retrieve
help, click on the Help button.
Results Creates a projection box in the .zgf file, places the box on the
designated map, deletes the projection box picture from the .zgf file.
R2003.12.0 POST-PIC-STATS 441

POST-PIC-STATS: Parameters
*Select Graphics File

Description Select the input graphics file where the project box is to be placed
Macro Parameter ZFGNAME
Data Type C*80
Range All graphics files that reside in the chosen directory paths
Select Picture
Description Select the input picture to place the projection box onto
Data Type C*80
Range All pictures on the selected graphics file
Text Font
Description Selection of fonts for the text in the projection box
Macro Parameter FONT
Data Type C*8
Range PLAIN
SIMPLEX
COMPLEX
ITALIC
DUPLEX
Default Value PLAIN
Text Color Index

Description Color of text in projection box
Data Type Integer
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 0
R2003.12.0 POST-PIC-STATS: Parameters 442

Text Height
Description Height of text to be used in the projection box
Macro Parameter CHARSIZE
Data Type Real
Range Positive Values
Default Value .08
Line Color Border

Description Border color of the projection box
Macro Parameter LINCOLOR
Data Type Integer
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1
Line Weight
Description Thickness of the projection box border
Macro Parameter LINEWGHT
Data Type Integer
Range 2 through 8
Default Value 3
Color Fill for the Projection Box?

Description Color of the area fill for the projection box
Macro Parameter BRDRFILL
Data Type Integer
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 0 (No fill for a transparent box color)

X Lower Left Corner of Box (Plotter Units)

Description Placement of the lower left corner of the projection box on the
designated X coordinate in plotter units. If the X Lower Right
Corner of th Box (Map Units) parameter is specified this value will
not be used.
Macro Parameter XBOTLEFT
Data Type Real
Range Plot dimensions
Default Value 20
Y Lower Left Corner of Box (Plotter Units)

Description Placement of the lower left corner of the projection box - Y
coordinate in plotter units. If the Y lower Right Corner of Box
(Map Units) is specified this value will not be used.
Macro Parameter YBOTLEFT
Data Type Real
Range Plot dimensions
Default Value .5 (plotter units)
Lower Right Corner of Box (Map Units)

Description Placement of the lower right corner of the predation box - Y
coordinate in map units.
Macro Parameter YBOTRGHT
Data Type Real
Range Map dimensions
Default Value .1E+31
ZCL PROCESSES

POST-PIC-STAR
Macro Name POST-STAR
Menu Option Macros Graphics Post Z-field Star
Purpose This macro posts star symbols on the current picture for data
distributed at control points. Each spoke on the star represents a
different attribute (z field). The length of each spoke of the star is
proportional to the z field it represents. The lengths are also dependent
upon the selected symbol size; thus, if the symbol size changes, so do
the spoke lengths. The data in each z field is divided into groups, also
called class intervals, that are based upon their numeric values. Each
class interval is associated with a spoke length.
Spokes are always separated at equal angles. Thus the separation angle
is based upon the number of spokes. The first z field you specify is
always represented by the due North spoke. Subsequent z fields are
represented as shown below:
1 1
8 2
4 2 7 3
6 4
3 5
Description This macro can be used to correlate z values to other z values at each
control point. You are asked to specify:
a control point dataset containing an x field, a y field and up to
eight z fields (one for each point of the star)
the number of spokes (18); this should be equal to the number of
attribute z fields
the symbol size
the length of the increment between values
class parameter (number of divisions in attribute range)
R2003.12.0 POST-PIC-STAR 445

POST-PIC-STAR
For Fields in Data that Have No Range, Manually Input Class Limits
If the dataset for which you are posting field values has any fields with a
range of zero, you may get the following error message:
POST-STAR.ZCLMAC ERROR *** DATA RANGE IS LE 0 FOR FIELD
POST-STAR only autosets class limits if a field has a data range. If you have
a field in your dataset that does not have a range, hand type in the class
ranges, and the POST-STAR process completes normally.
Results Control points are posted with a star formation on the current picture.
Optionally, you may output a legend that shows which spoke represents
which z field and the value of the lengths. To view the results,
re-display the picture after you run this macro.
Skyline Wells with Star Symbols Representing Five Z Fields
R2003.12.0 POST-PIC-STAR 446

POST-PIC-STAR: Parameters

*Input File for Posting
Description Name of the input file. File must have x and y fields.
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for Input File
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Default Value Searches all attached MFDs.
Symbol Size
Description Height of the symbol, which is a circle, before spokes are added.
Spoke size is in plotter units (in or cm).
Macro Parameter SYMBSIZE
Data Type R
Length of the Increments

Description Increment the length of the spokes by this amount, in plotter units
(in or cm).
Macro Parameter LENINC
Data Type R
R2003.12.0 POST-PIC-STAR: Parameters 447

Location of the Legend

Description Specify the position of the legend.
Macro Parameter LOCATION
Options
ARBITRARY = Let XLOWLEFT, YLOWLEFT specify the x and y
position of the lower left corner of the legend.
OMIT = Do not plot legend.
LOWER LEFT = Place legend in y offset area of lower left corner.
LOWER RIGHT = Place legend in y offset area of lower right corner
Data Type C*12

Default Value OMIT
Arbitrary X Bottom Left Corner of the Legend (in or cm)

Description The x position of the lower left corner of the legend, in plotter units
(in or cm).
Macro Parameter XLOWLEFT
Data Type R
Default Value 1.0
Arbitrary Y Bottom Left Corner of the Legend (in or cm)

Description The y position of the lower left corner of the legend, in plotter units
(in or cm).
Macro Parameter YLOWLEFT
Data Type R
Default Value 1.0
Number of spokes (18)

Description Number of spokes for the star; this should be equal to the number of
z fields to be posted.
Macro Parameter NUMSPOKE
Data Type I
Range 1 through 8
Default Value 1

First Field to Post

Description Field to post at first spoke.
Macro Parameter POSTFLDS
Data Type I
Number of Classes for the First Field

Description The number of class divisions for the first spoke.
Macro Parameter NUMCLASS
Data Type I
Range 1 through 6
Default Value 6
Minimum Value for the First Class

Description The minimum value to post for the first z field. If a field value is less
than this value, a spoke is not drawn for the field.
Macro Parameter MINVALS
Data Type R
Default Value ZCL default minimum value for the field
Maximum Value for the First Class

Description The maximum value for the first class for the first spoke. This is
also the minimum value for the second class. Calculated so that the
data range is divided into NUMCLASS intervals.
Macro Parameter CLSLMT1S
Data Type R
Default Value ZCL default calculated so that data range is divided into
NUMCLASS intervals

Maximum Value for the Second Class

Description The maximum value for the second class for the first spoke. This is
also the minimum value for the third class. Calculated so that the
Macro Parameter CLSLMT12
Data Type R
NUMCLASS intervals
Maximum Value for the Third Class

Description The maximum value for the third class for the first spoke. This is
also the minimum value for the fourth class. Calculated so that the
Data Type R
NUMCLASS intervals
Maximum Value for the Fourth Class

Description The maximum value for the fourth class for the first spoke. This is
also the minimum value for the fifth class. Calculated so that the
Data Type R
NUMCLASS intervals
Maximum Value for the Fifth Class

Description The maximum value for the fifth class for the first spoke. This is
also the minimum value for the sixth class. Calculated so that the
Data Type R
NUMCLASS intervals

Maximum Value for the Sixth Class

Description The maximum value for the sixth class for the first spoke.
Calculated so that the data range is divided into NUMCLAS2
intervals.
Data Type R
NUMCLASS intervals
Second Field to Post

Description Field to post at second spoke.
Macro Parameter POSTFLD2
Data Type I
Number of Classes for the Second Field

Description The number of class divisions for the second spoke.
Macro Parameter NUMCLAS2
Data Type I
Range 1 through 6
Default Value 6

Description The minimum value to post for the second z field. If a field value is
less than this value, a spoke is not drawn for the field.
Macro Parameter MINVAL2
Data Type R


Description The maximum value for the first class for the second spoke. This is
also the minimum value for the second class.
Data Type R
NUMCLAS2 intervals

Description The maximum value for the second class for the second spoke. This
is also the minimum value for the third class. Calculated so that the
data range is divided into NUMCLAS2 intervals.
Data Type R
NUMCLAS2 intervals

Description The maximum value for the third class for the second spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS2 intervals

Description The maximum value for the fourth class for the second spoke. This
is also the minimum value for the fifth class. Calculated so that the
Data Type R
NUMCLAS2 intervals


Description The maximum value for the fifth class for the second spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS2 intervals

Description The maximum value for the sixth class for the second spoke.
intervals.
Data Type R
NUMCLAS2 intervals
Third Field to Post

Description Field to post at third spoke.
Data Type I
Number of Classes for the Third Field

Description The number of class divisions for the third spoke.
Data Type I
Range 1 through 6
Default Value 6


Description The minimum value to post for the third z field. If a field value is
Data Type R

Description The maximum value for the first class for the third spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS3 intervals

Description The maximum value for the second class for the third spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS3 intervals

Description The maximum value for the third class for the third spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS3 intervals


Description The maximum value for the fourth class for the third spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS3 intervals

Description The maximum value for the fifth class for the third spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS3 intervals

Description The maximum value for the sixth class for the third spoke.
intervals.
Data Type R
NUMCLAS3 intervals
Fourth Field to Post

Description Field to post at the fourth spoke.
Data Type I

Number of Classes for the Fourth Field

Description Number of class divisions for the fourth spoke.
Data Type I
Range 1 through 6
Default Value 6

Description The minimum value to post for the fourth z field. If a field value is
Data Type R

Description The maximum value for the first class for the fourth spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS4 intervals

Default Value The maximum value for the second class for the fourth spoke. This
Data Type R
NUMCLAS4 intervals


Default Value The maximum value for the third class for the fourth spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS4 intervals

Description The maximum value for the fourth class for the fourth spoke. This
Data Type R
NUMCLAS4 intervals.

Description The maximum value for the fifth class for the fourth spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS4 intervals

Description The maximum value for the sixth class for the fourth spoke.
intervals.
Data Type R
NUMCLAS4 intervals

Fifth Field to Post

Description Field to post at the fifth spoke.
Data Type I
Number of Classes for the Fifth Field

Description The number of class divisions for the fifth spoke.
Data Type I
Range 1 through 6
Default Value 6

Description The minimum value to post for the fifth z field. If a field value is
Data Type R

Description The maximum value for the first class for the fifth spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS5 intervals


Description The maximum value for the second class for the fifth spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS5 intervals

Default Value The maximum value for the third class for the fifth spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS5 intervals

Description The maximum value for the fourth class for the fifth spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS5 intervals


Default Value The maximum value for the fifth class for the fifth spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS5 intervals

Default Value The maximum value for the sixth class for the fifth spoke.
intervals.
Data Type R
NUMCLAS5 intervals
Sixth Field to Post

Description Field to post at the sixth spoke.
Data Type I
Number of Classes for the Sixth Field

Description The number of class divisions for the sixth spoke.
Data Type I
Range 1 through 6
Default Value 6


Default Value The minimum value to post for the sixth z field. If a field value is
less than this value, a spoke is not drawn for the field. Calculated so
that the data range is divided into NUMCLAS6 intervals.
Data Type R

Default Value The maximum value for the first class for the sixth spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS6 intervals

Default Value The maximum value for the second class for the sixth spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS6 intervals

Default Value The maximum value for the third class for the sixth spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS6 intervals


Default Value The maximum value for the fourth class for the sixth spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS6 intervals

Default Value The maximum value for the fifth class for the sixth spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS6 intervals

Default Value The maximum value for the sixth class for the sixth spoke.
intervals.
Data Type R
NUMCLAS6 intervals
Seventh Field to Post

Description Field to post at seventh spoke.
Data Type I

Number of Classes for the Seventh Field

Description The number of class divisions for the seventh spoke.
Data Type I
Range 1 through 6
Default Value 6

Description The minimum value to post for the seventh z field. If a field value is
Data Type R

Default Value The maximum value for the first class for the seventh spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS7 intervals

Default Value The maximum value for the second class for the seventh spoke.
This is also the minimum value for the third class. Calculated so
that the data range is divided into NUMCLAS7 intervals.
Data Type R
NUMCLAS7 intervals


Default Value The maximum value for the third class for the seventh spoke. This
is also the minimum value for the fourth class. Calculated so that
the data range is divided into NUMCLAS7 intervals.
Data Type R
NUMCLAS7 intervals

Default Value The maximum value for the fourth class for the seventh spoke. This
Data Type R
NUMCLAS7 intervals

Default Value The maximum value for the fifth class for the seventh spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS7 intervals

Default Value The maximum value for the sixth class for the seventh spoke.
intervals.
Data Type R
NUMCLAS7 intervals

Eighth Field to Post

Description Field to post at eighth spoke
Data Type I
Number of Classes for the Eighth Field

Description The number of class divisions for the eighth spoke.
Data Type I
Range 1 through 6
Default Value 6

Description The minimum value to post for the eighth z field. If a field value is
Data Type R

Default Value The maximum value for the first class for the eighth spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS8 intervals


Default Value The maximum value for the second class for the eighth spoke. This
Data Type R
NUMCLAS8 intervals

Description The maximum value for the third class for the eighth spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS8 intervals

Description The maximum value for the fourth class for the eighth spoke. This
Data Type R
NUMCLAS8 intervals

Description The maximum value for the fifth class for the eighth spoke. This is
Data Type R
NUMCLAS8 intervals


Description The maximum value for the sixth class for the eighth spoke.
intervals.
Data Type R
NUMCLAS8 intervals
ZCL PROCESSES
POST STAR SYMBOL

PROFILE-CONTOURS
Macro Name PROFILE-CONTOURS

Menu Option Macros Graphics Isopach Contouring (Profiles)
Purpose This macro contours grids that have abrupt changes in surface slope
along well-defined profile lines. The macro can contour isopach and
isochore models, and faulted horizon models created in Point Gridding
Plus. Profile Contours uses the same basic algorithms used in regular
contouring. You can set attributes, including line style, color, and
colorfill to apply to all contours. In addition, you can modify the
attributes of user-specified contour levels.
Profile Contouring does not annotate fault traces.
Description This macro requires that you specify an input grid.
To take full advantage of the macros capabilities, you may want to
specify much of the following optional input values:
a profile dataset
a fault dataset
a polygon dataset for limiting contouring
minimum, and contour maximum
colorfill and color bar information
windowing information
gradient blanking information
contour labeling information
exception contour information, including contour level, line type,
line color and fill color
Using Profile-Contours to Best Advantage

The filled grid file and the fault profiles output from Point Gridding Plus are
intended to work with this macro.
Currently Profile-Contour does not replicate the old contour algorithms
results around ordinary fault polygons on a grid Profile-Contour replicates
Contour-New algorithm
Results A contour map that reflects the input.
R2003.12.0 PROFILE-CONTOURS 468

PROFILE-CONTOURS: Parameters

*Input the Grid Name to Contour
Data Type C*24
oMFD for the Input Grid

Description The MFD that contains the grid file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Name of the Optional Fault File

Description Name of the input fault file for contour generation.
Data Type C*24
oMFD for the Faults

Description The MFD to use for storing the fault file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 PROFILE-CONTOURS: Parameters 469

Name of the Optional Profiles File

Description Name of the input profiles file with z values marking the
discontinuity in the gradient.
Data Type C*24
oMFD for the Profiles

Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Name of the Optional Polygons File

Description Name of the input vertex file that contains the polygons used for
clipping contours in the display.
Data Type C*24
oMFD
for the Polygons
Description MFD that contains the input clipping polygon file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5

Draw Contours on Output Picture

Description Specify whether or not to draw the contours on the picture.
Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value POST

Description Number of contour levels.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value ZCL default computed for input data and other criteria
Min. Contour Level for Contour Pattern

Description The lowest (and first) contour level to be drawn.
Data Type R
Max. Contour Level for Contour Pattern

Description The highest (and last) contour level to be drawn.
Data Type R

Description The interval between successive contours.
Data Type R

Clip Inside or Outside the Polygons

Description Gives you the ability to clip inside or outside polygons. Used when
a clipping file is specified.
Options
INSIDE = Clip inside the polygons.
OUTSIDE = Clip outside the polygons.
Data Type C*8

Output Contour (CNTR) File Name

Description Name of the output contour file. If no name is specified, then
contours are not output.
Data Type C*24
MFD for the Contours

Description The MFD to use for storing the output contour file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5

Contouring Smoothness
Description Specify how smooth the contour line is to be drawn. All contours
are made up of a series of connected straight lines. The longer these
Options
COARSEST = Coarsest point spacing along curves.
Approximately one grid interval
COARSE = Coarse point spacing along curves.
Approximately1/2 the grid interval.
MEDIUM = Medium point spacing along curves.
Approximately 1/4 the grid interval.
FINE = Fine point spacing along curves.
VERY FINE = Very fine point spacing along curves.
Data Type C*12

Colorfill the Plot

Description Specify whether or not to colorfill the area between contours.
Options
Data Type C*12

Default Value NO COLORFILL
Use the Contours to Generate Colorfill

Options
YES = Contours are used to generate colorfill polygons.
position between contours
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES

Fill Color Index of First Area

Description Specify the starting color index.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 56
Bump Fill Color How Often

Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1

Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES

Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value YES


Description Specify the location of the color bar.
Options
NONE = No color bar
LEFT = Left of map
RIGHT = Right of map
USER = According to user-defined coordinates
Data Type C*8

Default Value NONE
Color Bar X Minimum Plot Coordinate

Description Minimum x coordinate of the color bar, in plotter coordinates (in or
cm). Used when COLORBAR = USER.
Macro Parameter XMINBAR
Data Type R
Color Bar X Maximum Plot Coordinate

Description Maximum x coordinate of the color bar, in plotter coordinates (in or
Macro Parameter XMAXBAR
Data Type R
Color Bar Y Minimum Plot Coordinate

Description Minimum y coordinate of the color bar, in plotter coordinates (in or
Macro Parameter YMINBAR
Data Type R

Color Bar Y Maximum Plot Coordinate

Description Maximum y coordinate of the color bar, in plotter coordinates (in or
Macro Parameter YMAXBAR
Data Type R
Contour Only Within A Window

Description Specify if contouring is within a specified rectangular area limit.
Choice of Parameters for Specifying Rectangular Window

The rectangular window may be specified using the parameters
XMINWIN, XMAXWIN, YMINWIN, YMAXWIN or with the
parameters CMINWIN, CMAXWIN, RMINWIN, and RMAXWIN.
However, the two groups of parameters may not be mixed.
Macro Parameter WINDOW

Options
WINDOW = Contour within a specified rectangular limit.
NO WINDOW = Do not confine contours to a specified rectangular limit.
Data Type C*12

Default Value NO WINDOW
Window Limits: X Min

Description Minimum x coordinate of the window, in engineering coordinates.
Required when WINDOW = WINDOW. XMAXWIN, YMINWIN
and YMAXWIN are specified.
Macro Parameter XMINWIN
Data Type R

Window Limits: X Max

Description Maximum x coordinate of the window, in engineering coordinates.
Required when WINDOW = WINDOW. XMINWIN, YMINWIN
Macro Parameter XMAXWIN
Data Type R
Window Limits: Y Min

Description Minimum y coordinate of the window, in engineering coordinates.
Required when WINDOW = WINDOW. XMAXWIN, YMINWIN
Macro Parameter YMINWIN
Data Type R
Window Limits: Y Max

Description Minimum x coordinate of the window, in engineering coordinates.
Required when WINDOW = WINDOW. XMAXWIN, XMINWIN
and YMINWIN are specified.
Macro Parameter YMAXWIN
Data Type R
Window Limits: Column Min

Description Minimum of the grid column (the leftmost column) of the
windowed region. Required when WINDOW = WINDOW.
CMINWIN, RMINWIN, and RMAXWIN are specified.
Macro Parameter CMINWIN
Data Type I

Window Limits: Column Max

Description Maximum of the grid column (the right most column) of the
windowed region. Required when WINDOW = WINDOW.
CMINWIN, RMINWIN, and RMAXWIN are specified.
Macro Parameter CMAXWIN
Data Type I
Window Limits: Row Min

Description Top grid row of the windowed region. Required when WINDOW =
WINDOW. CMAXWIN, CMINWIN, and RMAXWIN are
specified.
Macro Parameter RMINWIN
Data Type I
Window Limits: Row Max

Description Bottom grid row of the windowed region. Required when
WINDOW = WINDOW. CMAXWIN, CMINWIN, and RMINWIN
are specified.
Macro Parameter RMAXWIN
Data Type I

Data Type I
Default Value 1

Rate at which Contours are Drawn Bold

contour, etc.
Data Type I
Default Value 0

Data Type I
Default Value 0

Data Type I
Default Value 0

Description Specify the method for choosing color contours. The method
chosen controls the meaning of the LINERATE parameter.
Options
STARTCLR color.
Data Type C*12



in this color.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 56
Color Index of Highlighted Contour Line

Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 3
Rate to Bump the Color Index

Description The contour color is changed at this rate. If LINCLRTP =
HIGHLIGHT, then every LINERATE -th contour is colored in the
HILTCOLR color with all other contours being colored in the
STARTCLR color. If LINCLRTP = INCREMENT, the color of
each LINERATE-th contour is changed to the next color in the
color table.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1
Contour Gradient Blanking Rate

Data Type I
Default Value 0 no contours will be gradient blanked

Gradient Blanking Distance

the distance between two contours is less than BLNKDIST.
Data Type R
Label: Number of Digits after the Decimal

Description Number of decimal places to label.
Data Type I
Default Value 0
Plot Size of all Contour Labels

Description Height of the characters in the contour label, in plotter units (in
or cm).
Data Type R
Color of All Contour Labels

Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 11

1st Contour Level to be Modified

Description Contour exception level indicating either a new contour level or
identifying which existing contour level is to have its parameters
re-specified. You can enter new values for the BOLD1, DASH1,
HACH1, LABEL1, LCOLOR, FNEWCL1 and BLANK 1
parameters.
Macro Parameter ELEVEL1
Data Type R
Bold this Contour

Description Specify if the corresponding contour exception level (ELEVEL1) is
to be drawn as a bold contour. If no value is specified, the default
value for that contour level (as determined by BOLDRATE)
remains unchanged.
Macro Parameter BOLD1
Options
YES = Bold the exception contour.
NO = Do not bold the exception contour.
Data Type C*4

Dash this Contour

to be drawn as a dashed line. If no value is specified, the default
value for that contour level (as determined by DASHRATE)
remains unchanged.
Macro Parameter DASH1
Options
YES = Draw the exception contour as dashed line.
NO = Draw the exception contour as a solid line.
Data Type C*4


Draw Hachures on this Contour

to be drawn as a hachured line. If no value is specified, the default
value for that contour level (as determined by HACHRATE)
remains unchanged.
Description HACH1
Options
YES = Draw the exception contour with hachures.
NO = Draw the exception contour without hachures.
Data Type C*4

Label this Contour

to be labeled. If no value is supplied, the label characteristic as
determined by LABLRATE is used.
Macro Parameter LABEL1
Options
YES = Label the exception contour.
NO = Do not label the exception contour.
Data Type C*4

Specify the Line Color for this Contour

Description Line color of the corresponding contour exception level
(ELEVEL1).
Macro Parameter LCOLOR1
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 1

Change the Fill Color for this Contour

Description Color index of the fill color to be used below the contour level
specified by ELEVEL1.
Macro Parameter FNEWCL1
Options
YES = Fill the exception contour.
NO = Do not fill the exception contour.
Data Type C*4

Is it OK to Gradient Blank at this Contour

to be subject to gradient blanking in steep regions.
If no value is specified for BLANK1, the gradient blanking
parameter determined by BLNKRATE controls whether that
contour is allowed to undergo gradient blanking.
Macro Parameter BLANK1
Options
YES = Perform gradient blanking on the exception contour.
NO = Do not perform gradient blanking on the exception contour.
Data Type C*4

2nd Contour Level to be Modified

Description Contour exception level specifying either a new contour level or
re-specified.
Data Type R

Bold this Contour

remains unchanged.
Options
Data Type C*4

Dash this Contour

remains unchanged.
Options
Data Type C*4


remains unchanged.
Description HACH2
Options
Data Type C*4


Label this Contour

Options
Data Type C*4


(ELEVEL2).
Data Type I
Default Value 0

specified by ELEVEL2. This is the second of a list describing up to
five level fill colors.
Options
Data Type C*4



to be subject to gradient blanking in steep regions. If no value is
specified for BLANK2, the gradient blanking parameter determined
by BLNKRATE controls whether that contour is subject to gradient
blanking.
Options
Data Type C*4

3rd Contour Level to be Modified

re-specified.
Data Type R
Bold this Contour

remains unchanged.
Options
Data Type C*4


Dash this Contour

remains unchanged.
Options
Data Type C*4


remains unchanged.
Description HACH3
Options
Data Type C*4

Label this Contour

Options
Data Type C*4



(ELEVEL3).
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255

specified by ELEVEL3. This is the third of a list describing up to
Options
Data Type C*4


blanking.
Options
Data Type C*4


4th Contour Level to be Modified

re-specified.
Data Type R
Bold this Contour

remains unchanged.
Options
NO = Do not bold the exception contour as a solid line.
Data Type C*4

Dash this Contour

remains unchanged.
Options
Data Type C*4



remains unchanged.
Description HACH4
Options
Data Type C*4

Label this Contour

Options
Data Type C*4


(ELEVEL4).
Data Type I


specified by ELEVEL4. This is the fourth of a list describing up to
Options
Data Type C*4

Default Value 0

blanking.
Options
Data Type C*4

5th Contour Level to be Modified

re-specified.
Data Type R

Bold this Contour

remains unchanged.
Options
Data Type C*4

Dash this Contour

remains unchanged.
Options
YES = Draw the exception contour as a dashed line.
Data Type C*4


remains unchanged.
Macro Parameter HACH5
Options
Data Type C*4


Label this Contour

Options
Data Type C*4


(ELEVEL5).
Data Type I
Default Value 0

specified by ELEVEL5. This is the fifth of a list describing up to
Options
Data Type C*4



blanking.
Options
Data Type C*4

ZCL PROCESSES
CONTOUR NEW

QUALITY
Macro Name QUALITY
Menu Option Macros Operations Quality Assurance (Data, Grid)
Purpose This macro performs quality assurance on a grid and a dataset.

a grid
a data file to check against the grid
an optional fault file
minimum and maximum thresholds
You can use the QUALITY macro to:
evaluate the quality of a dataset
evaluate how well a grid represents the original data
create a data file for plotting selected residuals to use as a guide in
interactive grid editing
Results The output report scrolls by in the processing window. This report
consists of:
the histogram
statistical data
Explanation of the Histogram. You are asked for a maximum
estimated residual for the histogram. The actual histogram contains 73
bins. Bins 1 and 73 contains residuals too small and too large,
respectively, to fit in the range covered by the other bins.
The histogram appears twice in the process window. First, it is
presented in a vertical format which lists the central value and the
actual number of residuals in each bin. The second histogram is
presented in a smaller, horizontal format, and is followed by statistical
data. While the first histogram may scroll by rather quickly (yet is
easily stored in a log file), this summary is small enough to fit within
the confines of the X Term window.
Examples of the output are on the following pages.
R2003.12.0 QUALITY 496

QUALITY: Results (continued)
Bin Center Value Relative Bin Population

-0.4800E+03 0 *
-0.4400E+03 0 *
-0.4000E+03 2 *
-0.3600E+03 0 *
-0.3200E+03 2 *
-0.2800E+03 7 *
-0.2400E+03 1 *
-0.2000E+03 11 *
-0.1600E+03 30 *
-0.1200E+03 106 *
-0.8000E+02 415 **
-0.4000E+02 3258 ********
0.0000E+00 20455
***********************************************
0.4000E+02 2509 *******
0.8000E+02 181 *
0.1200E+03 44 *
0.1600E+03 15 *
0.2000E+03 6 *
0.2400E+03 9 *
0.2800E+03 5 *
0.3200E+03 3 *
0.3600E+03 6 *
0.4000E+03 1 *
0.4400E+03 0 *

0.5600E+03 1 *
0.6000E+03 0 *
0.6400E+03 0 *
0.6800E+03 1 *
0.7200E+03 0 *
0.7600E+03 1 *
0.8000E+03 1 *
0.8400E+03 1 *
0.8800E+03 1 *
0.9200E+03 1 *
0.9600E+03 1 *
Vertical Histogram
R2003.12.0 QUALITY: Results (continued) 497

QUALITY: Results (continued)
:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:I.
. . .. ..... . .......III......... . . ...... .
-: : -1 : : : : 0 : : : : 1 ::+
-0.1000E+04 0.0 0.1000E+04
NUMBER OF RESIDUALS = 27106

ROOT-MEAN-SQUARE RESIDUAL = 104.4
MEAN RESIDUAL = -4.291
STANDARD DEVIATION = 104.3
MAXIMUM RESIDUAL = 1049. AT X = 0.175230E+07 Y = 0.230770E+08
MINIMUM RESIDUAL = -5396. AT X = 0.169560E+07 Y =
0.230630E+08
27106 RESIDUALS UNDER LOWER THRESHOLD.

0 RESIDUALS OVER UPPER THRESHOLD.
27106 "BAD" RESIDUALS SELECTED.
Horizontal Histogram
R2003.12.0 QUALITY: Results (continued) 498

QUALITY: Parameters

*Input Grid to Check
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for Input Grid
Description MFD that contains the input file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
*Data Set to Check Grid Against

Description Name of the data file to check against the grid.
Data Type C*24
oMFD
for Input Dataset
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 QUALITY: Parameters 499

QUALITY: Parameters
Z Field of the Data to Check

Description The z field used to calculate residuals based on the input grid.
Data Type I
Range All Z Value fields in the input data file
Output Dataset For Residuals

Description Enter the name of the output data file for residuals.
Data Type C*24
MFD for Output Dataset

Description The MFD to use for storing the output data file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Faults Used to Build the Input Grid

Data Type C*24
oMFD for the Faults

Data Type I
Range 0 through 5

QUALITY: Parameters
Select Type of Output

Description Specify criteria for producing residuals.
Macro Parameter ERRANTRS
Options
OMIT = Do not produce residual.
THRESHOLDS = Residual values fall outside the upper and lower
threshold range.
CONTOUR CROSSING = Residual is selected if the elevation interpolated
from the grid surface and the elevation
interpolated from the control point file are on
opposite sides of the plane defined by a contour
level.
EITHER = Residual is selected using either the threshold or
contour crossing criteria.
BOTH = Residual is selected only if it meets both the
threshold and contour crossing criteria.
Data Type C*16

Default Value THRESHOLDS
Output All or Only Selected Residuals

Description Specify if all residuals are to be written to the output file. Used
when output data file DATA OUT is specified.
Macro Parameter SELECT
Options
ALL = All residuals are output.
ONLY = Only selected errant residuals are output.
Data Type C*4

Default Value ALL
Maximum Residual
Description Maximum residual for histogram.
Macro Parameter MAXRESID
Data Type R
Default Value ZCL default based on input data

QUALITY: Parameters
Upper Threshold
Description Upper threshold value. Used when ERRANTRS = THRESHOLDS,
EITHER, or BOTH.
Macro Parameter THRESUPP
Data Type R
Lower Threshold
Description Lower threshold value. Used when ERRANTRS =
THRESHOLDS, EITHER, or BOTH.
Macro Parameter THRESLOW
Data Type R
Contour Interval
Description The interval between contours. Used when ERRANTRS =
CONTOUR CROSSING, EITHER, or BOTH.
Data Type R
Default Value 1.0

Description Minimum contour level. Used when ERRANTRS =
CONTOUR CROSSING, EITHER, or BOTH.
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0

QUALITY: Parameters
Contour Fit Tolerance

Description The equality tolerance is a threshold value which is applied to
either side of the contour plane. Points that lie inside this tolerance
are not considered to have crossed the contour plane. Used when
ERRANTRS = CONTOUR CROSSING, EITHER, or BOTH.
Data Type R
Default Value 0.01
ZCL PROCESSES
QUALITY ASSURE

QUICKVOL-TWOPOLS
Macro Name QUICKVOL-TWOPOLS
Menu Option CARM Quick Volumetrics (2 Polygons)
Purpose This macro executes ZCLs QUICK VOLUMETRICS process, and

thus provides a quick, although not very accurate, estimate of the
volume between the surface represented by the input grid and the flat
surface with the constant z value specified by the baseplane parameter
(BASEPLAN). Volumes are calculated over a region specified by a
polygon or polygons on an input file specified by VERTICES. To
calculate volume, this process multiplies the area of the polygon by the
numeric average of the grid nodes within the polygon.

a grid dataset
a vertex file containing polygons
scaling factors
Quick Volumetrics is More Approximate Than Precise

QUICK VOLUMETRICS is not very accurate because it uses the total area
of the polygon in its calculation rather than just that portion of the polygon
that corresponds to the grid above the baseplane. To help compensate for this
quick approach, node values that lie below the baseplane are replaced by
zero. These zero values are then used in the calculation of the numerical
average for the grid nodes above and below the baseplane.
This process trades off accuracy for speed. You can increase accuracy
by:
refining your grid to a smaller cell size
making your evaluation polygons hug the non-ZNON edges of the
grid being evaluated, e.g. OWC
incorporating a shape factor in the scale factor specified in the
macro to account for unusual geometric shapes defined by your
surfaces
Results Volumetrics printouts for each polygon/grid combination.
R2003.12.0 QUICKVOL-TWOPOLS 504

QUICKVOL-TWOPOLS: Parameters

*Name of the Input Grid
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the Grid to be Integrated
Description MFD that contains the input grid.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Name of the Polygon Vertex File

Description This file defines the area of integration. If not specified, the region
of integration is the entire area of interest of the grid.
Data Type C*24
oMFD
for the Input Vertex File
Description MFD that contains the input vertex file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 QUICKVOL-TWOPOLS: Parameters 505

The Area Scale Factor

Data Type R
Default Value 1.0
The Volume Scale Factor

Macro Parameter VOLMSCAL
Data Type R
Default Value 1.0
The Base Plane Value

Description Baseplane value, as in grid contour level. All integration takes place
above this value on the grid. Defines positive volumes, i.e., above
the base plane level.
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0
How Are the Polygons to be Used

Description Specify how the polygons in the vertex file are to be used in the
integration task.
Options
ALL = All polygons on the vertex file are used to calculate and report
on volumes for each polygon.
ONLY = User may specify up to 2 polygon I.D.s to be used to calculate
volumes within. Results and ZCL and/or to data blocks in ZCL.
EXCEPT = User may specify up to 2 polygon I.D.s to be ignored. All other
polygons are analyzed for Volumetric results and reported to the
screen in Z-MAP Plus or ZCL or to data blocks in ZCL.
Data Type C*8

Default Value ALL

First Polygon ID to Analyze

Description This is the first of up to 2 polygon Segment I.D.s.
Macro Parameter POLYIDS
Data Type R
Second Polygon ID to Analyze

Description This is the second of up to 2 polygon Segment I.D.s.
Macro Parameter POLYID02
Data Type R
ZCL PROCESSES
QUICK VOLUMETRICS

QUIKVOL-FORTYPOL
Macro Name QUIKVOL-FORTYPOL
Menu Option CARM Volumetrics (40 Polygons)
Purpose This macro executes the ZCL QUICK VOLUMETRICS process, and
thus provides a quick, although not very accurate, estimate of the
volume between the surface represented by the input grid and the flat
surface with the constant z value specified by the baseplane parameter
(BASEPLAN). Volumes are calculated within a polygon or polygons
on an input file specified by VERTICES. To calculate volume, this
process multiplies the area of the polygon by the numeric average of
the grid nodes within the polygon.

a grid dataset
a vertex file containing polygons
scaling factors
baseplane elevation
Quick Volumetrics is More Approximate Than Precise

QUICK VOLUMETRICS is not very accurate because it uses the total area
of the polygon in its calculation rather than just that portion of the polygon
that corresponds to the grid above the baseplane. To help compensate for this
quick approach, node values that lie below the baseplane are replaced by
zero. These zero values are then used in the calculation of the numerical
average for the grid nodes above and below the baseplane.
This process trades off accuracy for speed; however, increased accuracy
can be achieved by:
refining your grid to a smaller cell size
making your evaluation polygons hug the non-ZNON edges of the
grid being evaluated, e.g., OWC
incorporating a shape factor in the scale factor specified in the
macro to account for unusual geometric shapes defined by your
surfaces
Results Volumetrics printouts for each polygon/grid combination.
R2003.12.0 QUIKVOL-FORTYPOL 508

QUIKVOL-FORTYPOL: Parameters

*Name of the Input Grid
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the Grid to be Integrated
Description MFD that contains the input grid.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Name of the Polygon Vertex File

Description This file defines the area of integration. If not specified, the region
of integration is the entire area of interest of the grid.
Data Type C*24
oMFD
for the Vertex File
Description MFD that contains the input vertex file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 QUIKVOL-FORTYPOL: Parameters 509

The Area Scale Factor

Data Type R
Default Value 1.0
The Volume Scale Factor

Macro Parameter VOLMSCAL
Data Type R
Default Value 1.0
The Base Plane Value

Description Base plane value.
Data Type R
Default Value 0.0
How Are the Polygons to Be Used

Description Specify which polygons in the vertex file are used in the integration
task.
Options
ALL = All polygons on the vertex file are used to calculate and report on
volumes for each polygon.
ONLY = User may specify up to 40 polygon I.D.s to be used to calculate
volumes within. Results and ZCL and/or to data blocks in ZCL.
EXCEPT = User may specify up to 40 polygon I.D.s to be ignored. All other
polygons is analyzed for Volumetric results and reported to the
screen in Z-MAP Plus or ZCL or to data blocks in ZCL.
Data Type C*8

Default Value ALL

1st Polygon Segment I.D.

Description This is the first of up to 40 polygon Segment I.D.s.
Macro Parameter POLYIDS
Data Type R
2nd Polygon Segment I.D.

Description This is the second of up to 40 polygon Segment I.D.s.
Data Type R
3rd Polygon Segment I.D.

Description This is the third of up to 40 polygon Segment I.D.s.
Data Type R
4th Polygon Segment I.D.

Description This is the fourth of up to 40 polygon Segment I.D.s.
Data Type R
... (Each parameter name is incremented by 1 until you reach 40.)
40th Polygon Segment I.D.

Description This is the fortieth of up to 40 polygon Segment I.D.s.
Data Type R
ZCL PROCESSES
QUICK VOLUMETRICS

REDUCE-POSTING
Macro Name REDUCE-POSTING
Menu Option Macros Graphics Reduce Text Posting
Purpose This macro reduces posting of a text field in an area based on a key field
such as OPERATOR NAME or LEASE I.D.
If all wells in the area have the same value for the key field, it is posted
only once (at the first well) and not posted for the remainder of the
wells in the area.

a data file
up to three key fields on which to thin the data
name of the output well file and MFD
names of the first (second, and third) new fields
Sort File First for Field Blanking

Files also have to be sorted in order of field choice for field blanking
R2003.12.0 REDUCE-POSTING 512

REDUCE-POSTING: Results
Results A text field, such as OPERATOR NAME, is only posted at the first
well, if all entries to this field have the same value. For example:
LEASE OPERATOR
FOX OIL
LEASE 1 LEASE 1 FOX OIL
LEASE 1
LEASE 1
LEASE 1
HOGG OIL LEASE 1
LEASE 1
LEASE 2 HOGGOIL
LEASE 2 LEASE 2 FOX OIL
FOX OIL LEASE 2 WOOD OIL
WOOD OIL
LEASE 2 FOX OIL
LEASE 2 WOOD OIL
FOX OIL LEASE 2 FOX OIL
WOOD OIL
FOX OIL
One operator name is output for
Lease 1 represents a single operator and Lease 1, while all names are
Lease 2 represents multiple operators. output for Lease 2.
Single Operator Lease Vs. Multiple Operator Lease

*Select the Input Well File
Description Name of the input well file.
Data Type C*24

Description MFD that contains the input well file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 REDUCE-POSTING: Results 513

REDUCE-POSTING: Parameters
*Select a Key Field on Which to Thin

Description First of three fields to thin. This is normally the lease I.D. field, and
must be the primary sort field for the input dataset.
Macro Parameter FIELD1
Data Type C*20
Default Value NEWFLD 1
Select a Second Key Field on which to Thin

Description Second of three fields to be thinned for posting. This must be the
secondary sort field for the input dataset.
Data Type C*20
Select a Third Key Field on which to Thin

Description Third of three fields to be thinned for posting.
Data Type I
Enter the Name of the Output Well File

Data Type C*24
Default Value REDUCED LABELS

Description The MFD to use for storing the output well file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 REDUCE-POSTING: Parameters 514

REDUCE-POSTING: Parameters
Select the Name for the First New Field

Description Name of the first output field. Field type is the same as FIELD1.
Macro Parameter FLDNAME1
Data Type C*20
Select the Name for the Second New Field

Description Name of the second output field. Field type is the same as FIELD2.
Data Type C*20
Select the Name for the Third New Field

Description Name of the third output field Field type is the same as FIELD3.
Data Type C*20
ZCL PROCESSES
THIN TEXT FIELDS
R2003.12.0 REDUCE-POSTING: Parameters 515

RESAMP-W-AOIGRID
Macro Name RESAMP-W-AOIGRID
Menu Option Macros Operations Resample with AOI from Grid
Purpose This macro resamples a grid using a control grid as a source of output
grid parameters Xmin, Xmax, Xinc, Ymin, Ymax, Yinc, Ncols, and
Nrows.

name of the input grid file to resample and the MFD that contains
it
name of the (optional) input fault file and the MFD that contains it
name of the input grid file to control AOI definition and the MFD
that contains it
Results Output is a grid which matches the surface defined by the first input
grid and fault file, with grid AOI and increments from the second input
grid file.

Description Name of the input grid file to define resampled surface.
Data Type C*24
oMFD for Input Grid File

Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 RESAMP-W-AOIGRID 516

RESAMP-W-AOIGRID: Parameters
*Select Input Fault File

Description Name of the optional input fault file to define resampled surface.
Data Type C*24
Default Value None -- Use no fault file
o
MFD for Input Fault File
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
*Select Input Grid File to Control AOI

Description Name of the input grid file to define output grid AOI and
increments.
Macro Parameter AOIGRID
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for Input Grid File to Control AOI
Description MFD that contains the input grid file to define output grid AOI.
Macro Parameter AOIGRMFD
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 RESAMP-W-AOIGRID: Parameters 517

RESAMP-W-AOIGRID: Parameters
*Name of Output Grid File

Data Type C*24

Description MFD that contains the output grid file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Default Value 1 First attached MFD.
ZCL PROCESSES
RESAMPLEGRID
R2003.12.0 RESAMP-W-AOIGRID: Parameters 518

RMLOCK
Macro Name RMLOCK
Menu Option
Purpose This macro is only for use during product demonstrations.
Description
Results
R2003.12.0 RMLOCK 519

SHADE-POLYGONS
Macro Name SHADE-POLYGONS
Menu Option Features Polygons Shaded Polygons
Purpose This macro fills a set of polygons with hachured lines. You can use this
macro to hachure shade fault polygons that have been converted to a
vertex file.You can display fault polygons shaded with this option as
rendered features on a surface in the Z-3D Surfaces and Z-3D Block
applications.
Before executing this macro, you must open a picture. The shaded
polygon feature is added to the current picture. The Edit
Graphics Editor Delete Last Feature option is not functional with
macro additions to pictures.
.
Background Polygon Added Automatically

This macro automatically adds a polygon filled with the background color
behind the shaded polygon. This polygon cannot be removed with Edit menu
options.
Description As input, you are asked to specify a vertex file containing polygons.
Data fields required by the macro include:
X (EASTING)
Y (NORTHING)
SEG I.D.
A color index field for the hachured line is optional.
You are asked to input:
type of hachured line to draw
hachured line color
polygon outline color
source of hachure line color (value or color field)
Results Hachured polygons in the current picture. Redisplay the picture to see
the results of this macro.
R2003.12.0 SHADE-POLYGONS 520

SHADE-POLYGONS: Parameters

*Input File for the Polygons to Shade
Description Name of the input file.
Data Type C*24

Description The MFD that contains the input polygon file.
Macro Parameter MFDPOLYS
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
*X-field in Polygon File

Description The x field on the polygon file.
Macro Parameter X
Data Type I
*Y-field in Polygon File

Description The y field on the polygon file.
Macro Parameter Y
Data Type I
*Segment I.D. Field in Polygon File

Description Segment I.D. field on the polygon file.
Macro Parameter SEGID
Data Type I
R2003.12.0 SHADE-POLYGONS: Parameters 521

Shading Color Field in Polygon File (Optional)

Description Color field on the polygon file.
Data Type R
Type of Hachuring
Description Specify the type of hachure shading to put within the polygons.
Macro Parameter HACH
Options
NW-SW HACHURED LINES = 45 degrees up to right, lines across entire
lease, no colorfill
SW-NE HACHURED LINES = 45 degrees down to right, lines across entire
lease, no colorfill
CROSS HACHURED LINES = 45 degrees up and down to right lines
across entire lease, no colorfill
Data Type C*20
Default Value Cross Hachured Lines
Source of Color Indices for Hachured Lines

Description Indicate whether the color for hachured lines is to be determined by
the color field in the vertex file or by a specified color index
number.
Macro Parameter CLRSRCE
Options
COLOR FIELD = Use the color field on the input polygons.
COLOR VALUE = Use the color index number provided in the Color Index
for Hachured Lines prompt.
Data Type C*12
Default Value COLOR VALUE
Color Index for Hachured Lines

Description Color index from the currently active color table. It controls the
color of hachure lines.
Macro Parameter COLORID
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 20

Color Index for Polygon Outlines

Description Polygon line color value.
Macro Parameter LNCOLOR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 21
ZCL PROCESSES
DELETE FILE BRANCH
FILE UTILITY SPAWN
EXPORT IMPORT
DATA BLOCK FILE CONVERSION
LOOP DATA BLOCK
POST LEASE LOOP END

SPAWN-PROCESS
Macro Name SPAWN-PROCESS
Menu Option Tools Spawn UNIX Process
Purpose This macro spawns a process to allow another program or system

command to run within Z-MAP Plus. Any Unix executable can be
invoked by SPAWN-PROCESS. For example, awk or nawk edit
programs can be used to reformat files interactively or to create files for
export/import during macro execution.
You can use SPAWN-PROCESS to write data import format statements
on a disk file with the echo system command. Use the spawn process
again to delete them.
Anytime Z-MAP Plus exits without your permission, it locks your
MFDs. One of the first macros that you write should be to spawn and
remove lock files (.LCK, .lck) from the directory where the MFDs are
stored.
Z-MAP Plus waits for the command to finish before continuing, unless
it is invoked in the background.
Description Enter a system command. On a Unix system, the command could be

ls, cd, rm, mv, or ls - l, for example.
Results The command is executed, results are written to the Z-MAP xterm
window, then control returns to Z-MAP Plus.
Results Written to Z-MAPPLUS Xterm Window

Results from this macro appear in the ZMAPPLUS xterm window. This window
is the first one to appear when you start Z-MAP Plus, and it is automatically
iconized. The xterm window is not the same as the Z-MAP Plus System Window,
which is used for displaying most messages.
R2003.12.0 SPAWN-PROCESS 524

SPAWN-PROCESS: Parameters

Enter the Command to Process
Description Enter a system command.
Macro Parameter COMMAND
Data Type C*80
Default Value echo "xterm -sb -sl 400 &">zpterm;chmod a+x
zpterm;zpterm"
This brings up a new terminal window. There is a space (not a new
line) between a+x and zpterm.
ZCL PROCESSES
SPAWN
R2003.12.0 SPAWN-PROCESS: Parameters 525

SPECIFY-CONTOURS
Macro Name SPECIFY-CONTOURS
Menu Option Macros Graphics Color-filled Contour Intervals
Purpose This macro allows you to input special contour levels such as the OWC
(oil-water contact) or GOC (gas-oil contact) that do not fall on even
increment levels. You are asked to input up to eight levels to be
contoured. If desired, colorfill can be generated between the special
contours. When generating colorfill contours, you control whether or
not to overlay the contour lines onto the colorfill.

GRID file for contouring
optional fault (FALT) file
number of special contours (up to eight)
value of each contour
contour type and labeling parameters
colorfill control information
Results Contours of the special levels are added to the picture. You can colorfill
these contours if you wish.
R2003.12.0 SPECIFY-CONTOURS 526

SPECIFY-CONTOURS: Parameters

*Input the Grid to Contour
Data Type C*24
oMFD for Input File

Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Input the Fault File (if any)

Macro Parameter AUXFILE
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the Faults
Description MFD that contains the input profile file.
Macro Parameter MFDAUX
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 SPECIFY-CONTOURS: Parameters 527

Number of Special Contours (1-8)

Description Number of special contour levels. Up to eight contours starting with
parameter CON1 can be specified.
Colorfilling Above the Highest Special Contour Level

When FILL = COLORFILLED and NCONTOUR = the number of special
contours, the area above the highest contour is not color filled. To colorfill
above the highest special contour level, set NCONTOUR = the number of
special contours + 1. Colorfilling below the lowest contour is automatic.

Data Type I
Range 1 through 8
Default Value 1
First Contour Value

Description First of up to eight special contour levels.
Macro Parameter CON1
Data Type R
Second Contour Value

Description Second of up to eight special contour levels.
Data Type R
Third Contour Value

Description Third of up to eight special contour levels.
Data Type R

Fourth Contour Value

Description Fourth of up to eight special contour levels.
Data Type R
Fifth Contour Value

Description Fifth of up to eight special contour levels.
Data Type R
Sixth Contour Value

Description Sixth of up to eight special contour levels.
Data Type R
Seventh Contour Value

Description Seventh of up to eight special contour levels.
Data Type R
Eighth Contour Value

Description Eighth of up to eight special contour levels.
Data Type R
Contour Label Size

Description Label size for contours being generated, in plotter units (in or cm).
Data Type R

Number of Digits Right-of-Decimal

Description Number of decimal places in label.
Macro Parameter DECIMAL
Data Type I
Default Value 0
Rate to Label Contours

sixth contour; etc.
Data Type I
Default Value 1
Rate for Bold (Reference) Contours

Description Rate for drawing bold line contours. A value of 5 means to draw
every fifth contour bold.
Macro Parameter BOLD
Data Type I
Default Value 0
Rate for Hachured Contours

Description Rate for drawing hachured line contours. A value of 5 means to
draw every 5th line hachured.
Macro Parameter HACH
Data Type I
Default Value 0
Rate for Dashed Contours

Description Rate for drawing dashed line contours. A value of N means to draw
every Nth line hachured.
Macro Parameter DASH
Data Type I
Default Value 0

Colorfill the Contours

Description Specify whether to colorfill the area between contours.
Macro Parameter FILL
Options
Data Type C*12
Overlay Contours on Colorfill

Description Specify whether or not to draw the contours over the colorfill. This
parameter is only active is FILL = COLORFILLED.
Macro Parameter OVERLAY
Options
OVERLAY = Overlay contours on colorfill.
NO OVERLAY = Do not colorfill the contours.
Data Type C*12
Default: OVERLAY
Line Color for Contours

Description Initial color index used to display contours.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 3

Starting Color Index for Colorfill

Description The color of this index number (FILLCOLR) is used for the areas
with values below the lowest contour level. The color of the next
higher index number (FILLCOLR+1) is used for the area between
the lowest contour and the next higher contour. This continues
through the area with values up to the highest contour level, which
is assigned the color of index number FILLCOLR + the number of
contour levels 1.
If you desire to colorfill above the highest contour level, assign the
NCONTOUR parameter by the real number of specified contours
+1. This results in the index value for the level above the highest
contour being filled with FILLCLR + the number of contour levels.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 56
ZCL PROCESSES
CONTOUR

START
Macro Name START
Menu Option
Purpose This macro is only for use during product demonstrations.
Description
Results
R2003.12.0 START 533

STRATATHICKNESS
Macro Name STRATATHICKNESS
Menu Option Macros Operations Stratgraphic Thickness
Purpose This macro computes stratigraphic thickness for an interval defined by

top and base grids, using the DIP MAG, ATAN, and COS operations
found in Single Grid Operations and the SUBTRACT and MULTIPLY
operations found in Dual Grid Operations. The bedding dip is estimated
from the dip of the top surface only. All temporary grids that are stored
on the scratch file are deleted at the end of the macro session.
Description Typically, TVD data is used to derive vertical thickness information at

wells (isochore data) that we use to produce isochore grids. However,
in areas of high structural deformation, it is more helpful to see the
isopach representation of a formation. Making this isochore to isopach
conversion is not practical for large or irregular areas. However, using
the STRATATHICKNESS macro, an isochore grid (map) can be
converted to an isopach grid (map). You must input:
a top grid
a base grid
name of the output thickness grid
MFD for the output thickness grid
Results Creates a stratigraphic thickness grid.
R2003.12.0 STRATATHICKNESS 534

STRATATHICKNESS: Technical Notes
Technical Notes
The terms isopach and isochore are frequently used interchangeably
meaning thickness of a geologic strata. However, these two words have
distinct geologic meanings. Isochore refers to vertical thickness of one
or more strata, possibly the thickness of a formation, while isopach
refers to the stratigraphic thickness of the same unit. Even when these
terms are used to refer to thickness of the same unit, the isopach is
always less than or equal to the isochore. Thickness maps based on
either term are isopach maps or isochore maps.
Typically, most well data contains unit tops and these are subtracted to
give isochores, not isopachs. Isochore thicknesses (vertical thickness)
for conformally bedded units are related to isopach thicknesses
(stratigraphic thickness) by the cosine of the dip of the bedding planes.
Top Formation
V
Bottom Formation
Example of Strata Displayed in Cross-Sectional Form
R2003.12.0 STRATATHICKNESS: Technical Notes 535

STRATATHICKNESS: Technical Notes
Technical Approach
If strata are displayed in cross-sectional form, as illustrated in the
preceding figure, you can see that the vertical thickness (V) and
stratigraphic thickness (S) are related by S = V cos ( ) where is the
slope (dip of the top of the strata). This relationship takes a few liberties
with trigonometry and geologyin that it assumes that a right angle
triangle can be formed by the vertical thickness line (V), the
stratigraphic thickness line (S), and the base of the unit. Over short
horizontal distances it is probably reasonable to assume that the base of
the unit is a dipping plane.
On a cross section, the dip is one-dimensional. That is, you cannot see
how it varies in x and y, but only along the baseline of the section. On a
surface, the dip is in the direction of the gradient vector, a mathematical
term for an arrow drawn in the direction of most rapid change. The
vector is always perpendicular (normal) to contours. If the angle of the
dip vector (measured counterclockwise from East) is called , then the
maximum slope is computed byn = z x cos ( ) + z y sin ( )
where z x and z y are the partials of the unit top for x and y
respectively. This is the derivative (slope) of the surface in the direction
( ) of the normal vector. The declination angle can be computed for
the slope using = arc tan ( dz dn ) ,and finally, the stratigraphic
thickness can be computed using the first equation for S.
R2003.12.0 STRATATHICKNESS: Technical Notes 536

STRATATHICKNESS: Parameters

*Top Grid for the Interval
Description Name of the input top grid file.
Macro Parameter TOP
Data Type C*24
Default: No default
oMFD for the Top Grid

Description MFD that contains the top grid.
Macro Parameter MFDIN1
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
*Base Grid for the Interval

Description Name of the input base grid file.
Macro Parameter BASE
Data Type C*24
Default: No default
o
MFD for the Top Grid
Description MFD that contains the base grid.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Stratigraphic Thickness Grid

Macro Parameter ISOPACH
Data Type C*24
Default: STRATIGRAPHIC THICKNESS
R2003.12.0 STRATATHICKNESS: Parameters 537

STRATATHICKNESS: Parameters
Number of the MFD to Contain Thickness Grid

Description The MFD that contains the thickness grid.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
SINGLE GRID OPS
DUAL GRID OPS
DELETE FILE
R2003.12.0 STRATATHICKNESS: Parameters 538

SURFCORRECT
Macro Name SURFCORRECT
Menu Option CARM Surface Correction
Purpose SURFCORRECT offers a way of correcting a surface or of

conformably merging a surface with a set of new well picks. Using
residual correction techniques, SURFCORRECT ties a grid to new well
data. SURFCORRECT outputs a corrected grid and optional quality
control data files.
Description You can restrict the area of the surface to be modified by the new well
data using one of four modes:
Use default gridding to distribute the change in the surface over the
entire area (MMETHOD = DEFAULT GRIDDING).
Specify a radius of influence around the selected well data
(MMETHOD = SYNTHESIZED DATA + RADIUS).
Use one or more closed polygons to specify where you want to
change the surface grid (MMETHOD = SYNTHESIZED DATA +
POLYGON).
Use a correction grid that you build independently of the macros
execution (MMETHOD = INPUT GRID).
Results The primary output of this macro is a new grid that shows how the new
wells affect the surface. Optional output includes quality control data
files that you can save to an MFD of your choice. SURFCORRECT
also creates maps and cross sections of its results.
R2003.12.0 SURFCORRECT 539

SURFCORRECT: Summary
Summary
Surface Correct (SURFCORRECT) offers a way of correcting a surface
or comfortably merging a surface with a set of new well picks. It adds
to Z-MAP Plus, which has historically had two main uses: creating
quality base maps and assessing hydrocarbon in place using the
Volumetrics application tools.You should be well versed in the use of
Z-MAP Plus to get the most out of this macro.
SURCORRECT could be applied very successfully in several typical
scenarios, including:
Production Geology
Basin Studies
Stratigraphic Reservoir Framework Building
Production Geology
You have an offshore field with 12 producing wells in the top pay. You
model the top pay using the LANDMARK seismic and surface
modeling interpretation environment. Next, you drill a thirteenth well,
targeting the down side of a fault block that is defined seismically. The
thirteenth well comes in high to prediction. You now want to
time-merge this new top pick into the existing grid model that covers
the twelve producing wells.
You can use the following inputs with the SURFCORRECT macro:
The original seismic grid of the 12 producing wells
A data file that contains the new top pick(s) where the fields are x,
y, z, and well name
The old fault file
In addition, use either
A polygon built on the outline of the fault
A pre-determined radius of influence that will define the area of
structural change around the new well data
R2003.12.0 SURFCORRECT: Summary 540

Basin Studies
You built a regional average velocity grid using 230 wells with
multi-shot data in an offshore basin. The grid represents average time to
the base Jurassic seismic marker. When you built the surface model, all
the wells tied to the grid acceptably. You have a request to update the
original Jurassic average velocity grid with 10 new wells drilled during
the last two years. You are expected to update the velocity grid quickly.
The project geophysicist supplies you with a data file that has the same
well population, but the average velocity picks are on the base Triassic
marker. The geophysicist tells you that the form of the velocity grid for
the Triassic should mimic the contour form of the Jurassic grid and tie
the new well values.
The solution to both problems is a straightforward application of the
SURFCORRECT macro.
Tie the Jurassic velocity grid using the SYNTHESIZED DATA +
RADIUS mode.
Build the new Triassic grid using the DEFAULT GRIDDING
mode.
These two modes are further explained later in this document.
Stratigraphic/Reservoir Framework Building

Reservoirs that are defined using seismic grids usually have certain
limitations. Typically, a reservoir is defined by seismic grids for the
structure of the top sealing horizon only. Much of the internal geometry
could all happen in the two-way time thickness of a single wavelet
response on a seismic section.
When the reservoir contains conformable geometry, you can use
isochore techniques to define horizons beneath the top sealing horizon.
Using cross-contouring methods, you can isopach/isochore up or down
these surfaces, defining horizons based on each isopach unit. The
isopachs/isochores are built using well picks for the appropriate rock/
stratigraphic tops. These new surfaces derive their structural form from
a datum unit that is already structurally mapped.

You can use the SURFCORRECT macro to automate the isopach/

isochore horizon building process in several ways. For example, you
can perform these actions:
Apply the macro in default gridding mode, using bias to derive the
isochore trends interpreted in the different isopach units.
Use either the SYNTHESIZED DATA + RADIUS mode or the
SYNTHESIZED DATA + POLYGON mode.
Another good workflow for this type of problem follows:

Build the basic isochore correction grid by using the
SURFCORRECT macro.
Use the Edit/Create Data task in Z-MAP Plus to alter the isochore
correction grid to suit the interpretation.
Use the edited isochore correction grid as input for the
SURFCORRECT macro. Use the INPUT GRID mode to obtain
the automated graphic output displays.

Understanding the SURFCORRECT Macro

Some of the parameters in the SURFCORRECT macro are previewed
below.
Method of Macro Application (MMETHOD)

There are four methods, or modes, for correcting the surface. You can
choose the one that best suits your needs. The four methods are
described below.
Default Gridding
This method distributes the residual correction over the entire AOI of
the input grid. The residuals are calculated between the input grid and
the input data points, and the default, Point Gridding Plus gridding,
method is performed. The AOI and final grid increments of the residual
grid are extracted from the input grid. However, you can still assign
values for the gridding parameters reach, number of refinements, bias
direction, and bias magnitude.
The grid Zmin Zmax deltaZ is +/- 10% if the data-calculated deltaZ of
the wells back interpolated on the input grid.
Synthesized Data + Radius

This method uses the radius of influence that you supply to limit
change in structural form to an area represented by the union of all
circumference circles around the well population. To achieve the
desired limits, the method applies distance gridding on the well
locations. To prevent changes outside the radius that you specify, this
mode assigns a default value of 0.0 to synthesized data that lie outside
the radius of influence.

SURFCORRECT: Summary:
Synthesized Data + Polygon

With this mode, instead of the radius of influence defining the area of
change, a single polygon or a set of user-defined closed polygons in a
vertex file delimits areas of alteration. All of the capabilities of
synthesized data + radius method are true for this application as well.
This mode is useful in handling changes within fault blocks. You can
combine the optional faults used in gridding residuals XFL2 with a bias
technique to control surface alteration near faults. You can use the
optional faults and bias technique to perform surface correction on
either the up-thrown or down-thrown faults.
Synthesized Data + Radius and Synthesized Data + Polygon

You can control the value and density of the synthesized residual data by
assigning a constant value for the synthesized residual data, or you can allow
SURFCORRECT to query the residuals calculated against the input grid. When
using the latter method of assigning value to the synthesized residuals,
SURFCORRECT assigns the average residual. Both synthesis modes
(synthesized data + radius and synthesized data + polygon) allow these methods
of determining the value of synthesized residual data.
The macro can derive conformable surfaces, with a predetermined datum shift
outside the restricted areas of change. The data density is controlled by
specifying a GRID INTERVAL parameter for the SYNTHESIZED PSEUDO DZ
DATA.
Also of interest is that you can invoke bias gridding in default gridding and the
two synthesized data modes. However, be sure to set the number of refines=0, or
the bias effect will be obliterated by filter passes.
Input Grid
This mode uses a residual grid that you build independently of
SURFCORRECT. When you select MMETHOD = Input Grid, the
macro skips all gridding steps and just adds a user-supplied residual
grid to the input control grid. SURFCORRECT performs the data
preparation steps for calculating the residuals against the control grid.
You should use the input grid mode if your main interest is in the
automated graphic output capabilities of the macro.
The user is responsible for the quality of the supplied residual grid.
R2003.12.0 SURFCORRECT: Summary: 544

Quality Control Data File (OPRSDAT)

The quality control (QC) data file contains the original x, y, z, and
WELLID fields that you selected from the input data. In addition, it
contains FIELD5 through FIELD10. These fields are described below.
FIELD5: CONTROL TOP. This field contains the
back-interpolated z values at locations of input data file points on
the input grid.
FIELD6: DELTA Z. This field contains the isochore values

calculated between the new well picks z value and the CONTROL
TOP (FIELD5). This field is gridded in default gridding mode; it is
also merged with the synthesized data for residual gridding in
synthesized data + radius and synthesized data + polygon modes.
FIELD7: B.I.-GRIDOUT. This field contains the back-interpolated

values at the new well locations of the final output grid. These
values should match those of the z value (FIELD3).
FIELD8: B.I.-DELTAZGRID. This field contains the

back-interpolated values at the new well locations of the newly
created or user-supplied residual correction grid. These values
should duplicate those of FIELD6.
FIELD9: RESIDUAL GRIDOUT. This field contains the real new

z values at the well locations minus the final output grids values at
these locations (i.e., z value or FIELD3 FIELD7 ).The records in this
field should ideally all be 0.0 (zero value).
FIELD10: RESIDUAL DELTAZGRID. This field contains the

Real delta Z minus gridded delta Z, or FIELD6 FIELD8 . The records
in this field should ideally all be zero. If the records are not zero
values, then the RESIDUAL GRID cannot honor the residual data.
If the value for the grid interval that is preset by XGRD1 is too
coarse, it could cause nonzero values in the records for FIELD10.
The solution is to resample the input grid.
If you save this data set on a permanent MFD you can document the
quality of the fit to the data of the new surface model.

SURFCORRECT: Parameters
*Data file with new surface picks (x, y, z, ID)

Description This is the name of the input well data file containing the minimal
fields: x, y, z, and wellid. It must be on an MFD attached to
Z-MAP Plus or in the current ZCL runstream. The data is the new
well picks that the surface should tie to.
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for New Surface Picks
Description MFD that contains the input file MWELLD.
Data Type I
Default 0
*Input X-FIELD from data file

Description This is the field in the data file MWELLD that contains the x
coordinates for the well data points being used.
Macro Parameter INFLA
Data Type I
*Input Y-FIELD from data file

Description This is the field in the data file MWELLD that contains the y
coordinates for the well data points being used.
Macro Parameter INFLB
Data Type I
Default No default
R2003.12.0 SURFCORRECT: Parameters 546

Input Z-FIELD from data file

Description This is the field in the data file MWELLD that contains the z values
for use by SURFCORRECT in altering the input grid.
Macro Parameter INFLC
Data Type I
Default No default
Input WELL NAME field from data file

Description This is the field in the data file MWELLD that contains a well
identifier, such as well name. The well identifier is needed for
map posting and must be specified. However, it can be any field in
the data set MWELLD.
Data Type I
Default No default
Input GRID to be corrected

Description This is the name of the grid to be modified by the macro. This grid
represents the surface that needs new wells incorporated into it.
Macro Parameter XGRD1
Data Type C*24
o
Description MFD that contains the input grid file XGRD1.
Macro Parameter MFDINA
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Default Value 1
FAULT FILE to use with operations & graphics

Description This is the name of the fault file used to build the input grid
XGRD1. If the surface grid for XGRD1 is unfaulted, no fault file is
required.
Macro Parameter XFLT1
Data Type C*24

o
Description This is the MFD that contains the fault file XFLT1.
Macro Parameter MFDINB
Data Type I
Default 1
Optional Faults used for DeltaZ Gridding

Description This fault file is optional. You use this file if you are gridding the
residuals using any of the following three modes
default gridding
synthesized data + radius
synthesized data + polygon
You can use Delta-Z gridding if you want to correct a fault block or
one side of a fault. If you want to integrate the isochore correction
into the wall of the fault, you need a separate fault file to control the
isochore gridding. This is so synthesized Delta-Z values across the
fault are not seen during isochore gridding.
Macro Parameter XFLT2
Data Type C*24
o
Description MFD that contains the fault file XFLT2.
Macro Parameter MFDING
Data Type I
Default No default

User input Delta Z grid (optional)

Description This grid is required only if you are using input grid mode. The
macro assumes that your Delta Z grid is a grid of residuals
associated with the input well data file MWELLD. In input grid
mode, you built the Delta Z grid outside of the SURFCORRECT
macro. When you use input grid mode, SURFCORRECT adds the
Delta Z grid to input grid XGRD1 and outputs the new grid, along
with any output graphics you request.
Macro Parameter USERGRID
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for User Input DeltaZ GRID
Description This is the MFD that contains the optional Delta-Z grid
USERGRID.
Macro Parameter MFDINC
Data Type I
Default 1
POLYGON file for defining area of change

Description This polygon file is required only if you are using the synthesized
data + polygon method. It can contain multiple polygons, but they
all must be closed. The polygon file defines only the area or areas
where the structural form of the grid is to be modified by the new
data. Data that do not tie exactly with the input grid XGRD1
(outside these closed areas) produce bad results.
Macro Parameter POLYGBL
Data Type C*24

Description This is the MFD that contains the optional polygon file POLYGBL.
Macro Parameter MFDIND
Data Type I
Default 1

Method of macro application

Description You can select one of four modes for correcting the surface. The
modes are fully described in the introduction to SURFCORRECT.
Three of the modes (default gridding, synthesized data + radius,
and synthesized data + polygon) assume that SURFCORRECT is
building the grid on residuals and creating the new grid. These
modes differ in the way that they control where data-driven changes
are made to the new surface. The Point Gridding Plus algorithms
are used in all residual gridding applications.
The input grid mode skips all of the gridding steps and adds a user
supplied residual grid that corrects the input grid XGRD1.
Macro Parameter MMETHOD
Options
DEFAULT GRIDDING = Distributes the residual correction over the entire AOI of the input grid. The
residuals are calculated between the input grid and the input data points, and the
default Point Gridding Plus gridding method is performed. The AOI and final
grid increments of the residual grid are extracted from the input grid. However,
you can still assign values for the gridding parameters reach, number of
refinements, bias direction, and bias magnitude.
SYNTHESIZED = Using the radius of influence that you supply, this method limits change in
DATA+RADIUS structural form to an area represented by the union of all circumference circles
around the well population. To achieve the desired limits, the method applies
distance gridding on the well locations. To prevent changes outside the radius
that you specify, this mode assigns a default value of 0.0 to synthesized data
that lie outside the radius of influence.
SYNTHESIZED = With this mode, instead of the radius of influence defining the area of change, a
DATA+POLYGON single polygon or a set of user-defined closed polygons in a vertex file delimits
areas of alteration. All of the capabilities of synthesized data + radius are true
for this application as well. This mode is useful in handling changes within fault
blocks. You can combine the optional faults used in gridding residuals XFL2
with a bias technique to control surface alteration near faults. You can use the
optional faults and bias technique to perform surface correction on either the
up-thrown or down-thrown faults.
INPUT GRID = This mode uses a residual grid that you build independently of
SURFCORRECT. When you select MMETHOD = INPUT GRID, the macro
skips all gridding steps and just adds a user supplied residual grid to the input
control grid. SURFCORRECT performs the data preparation steps for
calculating the residuals against the control grid.
You should use the INPUT GRID mode if your main interest is in the
automated graphic output capabilities of the macro.
The user is responsible for the quality of the supplied residual grid.

SURFCORRECT
Data Type C*24

Default Value SYNTHESIZED DATA+RADIUS
(0-360) AZIMUTH for Bias Gridding DeltaZ

Description If you are using a bias in gridding residuals, this parameter controls
the direction of that bias. The default value, 0.0, is due north.
Macro Parameter ASMITH
Data Type R (compass azimuth degrees)
Default Value 0.0
STRENGTH of bias effect (1-4)

Description When you use a bias in building the grid of the residuals, this
parameter controls bias strength. To capture the effect of bias
application in Point Gridding Plus, bias strength must be greater
than 1.0. Magnitude of bias direction typically has a value from 2.0
to 4.0. The higher the value, the more pronounced the observed
bias. When trying to arrive at a good value, think of a stress
ellipsoid over an elongated, closed structure. The ratio of minor
axis to major axis as a real number is the value entry for this
parameter. If you accept the default for STRENGTH it results in no
bias during grid initialization.
Macro Parameter STRENGTH
Data Type R
Default Value 1.0
Number of Refinements for DeltaZ gridding

Description When using residual gridding applications, such as with default
gridding and the two synthesized data modes, this parameter sets
the number of grid refinements to be used in Point Gridding Plus. If
using a bias strength greater than 1.0, set the number of refinements
to 0.0. Using more than 3.0 refinements in Point Gridding Plus is
not recommended for this workflow.
Macro Parameter DEFRF
Data Type I
Default Value 2
R2003.12.0 SURFCORRECT 551

EXPAND DISTANCE used outside area

Description This specifies the distance outside the input grid XGRD1 AOI that
the gridding algorithm should search for processed residual data
values. This parameter is useful if you are working on a pilot area
of a larger input grid, because it helps make the edges converge.
Macro Parameter OUTSIDE
Data Type R (map units)
Default Value 50
RADIUS OF INFLUENCE around wells

Description When you are gridding with synthesized data + radius, this
parameter assigns the value of the radius around the wells within
which the structural form of the input grid and contours should
change. The radius is specified in map units.
Macro Parameter RWELL
Data Type R
Default Value 350
REACH to be used in gridding steps

Description This is the REACH parameter used in all residual gridding steps.
On large grids with dense, synthesized data and possibly a small
influence radius, the reach does not need to be the default within the
macro.
Macro Parameter GREACH
Default 5000
GRID INTERVAL for Synthesized Data Method

Description This parameter controls the density at which synthesized residual
data points are generated in the two synthesized data modes. When
considering a good value for the synthesized data grid interval,
think of a gridding interval that would resolve the details of the
restriction limits you are supplying. These could be combined
circular boundaries around wells or polygons.
Macro Parameter SYNGI
Default Value 50.0

METHOD for Synthesized Data Value Replacement

Description CONTECH is used with the two synthesized data modes. It gives
the macro the instruction either to obtain a user-specified value and
assign it to synthesized data locations or to calculate the average
residual from the input well data residuals and assign it to the
synthesized data locations. This average replacement value gives a
datum shift effect outside areas of defined change.
Macro Parameter CONTECH
Options
USE DATA STATS = Determine synthesized data locations by using
the average residual from the input well data
residuals.
INPUT VALUE = Determine synthesized data locations by using
the user-specified value.
Data Type C*16

Default Value INPUT VALUE
REPLACEMENT VALUE (optional)

Description DTZMEAN is the user specified value to assign to synthesized data
locations when using one of the two synthesized data modes. It is
used when INPUT VALUE is chosen for the CONTECH parameter.
The default is 0.0.
Data Type DTZMEAN
Data Type R
Default 0.0
Save output grids and QCdata file

Description This parameter instructs the macro to save key output grids and a
quality control (QC) data file to your choice of attached MFDs. If
you respond NO, SURFCORRECT does not save copies of output
grids or data, even if pictures are produced.
Macro Parameter MSAVE
Options
NO = Do not save copies of key output grids or data, even if pictures are
produced.
YES = Save copies of key output grids and a quality control data file.
Data Type C*4

Default Value NO

Enter name for structure output grid

Description This is the name of the final output structure grid. This grid is tied
to the new well data using one of the four macro application modes.
Macro Parameter OPGRD
Data Type C*24
Default Value STRUCTURE-OUTPUT
MFD for Structure Output Grid

Description This is the MFD to contain the structure output grid.
Macro Parameter MFDOUTA
Data Type I
Default Value 0 (scratch)
Enter name for DeltaZ output grid

Description This is the name of the FINAL OUTPUT RESIDUAL
CORRECTION GRID. This grid is the final product of gridding the
residuals between the input grid and the new well data. The DeltaZ
grid is added to the input grid XGRD1 to give the FINAL OUTPUT
STRUCTURE. Used when MSAVE = YES.
Macro Parameter OPDZGRD
Data Type C*24
Default Value DELTAZ-OUTPUT
MFD for DeltaZ Output Grid

Description This is the MFD to contain the Delta Z Output grid. It is used when
MSAVE = YES.
Macro Parameter MFDOUTB
Data Type I
Default Value 0 (scratch)

Enter name for QC data file

Description This is the name of the QC data file. This data file has the original x,
y, z and WELLID fields that you selected from the input data, plus
FIELD5 through FIELD10. It is used when MSAVE = YES. Saving
this data set on a permanent MFD documents the quality of the fit to
the data of the new surface model. For descriptions of the
accompanying FIELDS, see the SURFCORRECT macro
introduction.
Macro Parameter OPRSDAT
Data Type C*24
Default Value QCDATA-OUTPUT
MFD for Output QC Data File

Description This is the MFD to contain the QC data file. Used when MSAVE =
YES.
Macro Parameter MFDOUTC
Data Type I
Default 0 (scratch)
Save the Well Merged Synthesized DZ Data

Description Answering YES saves the merged real well data and the
synthesized data used to produce a residual isochore in all
application modes except input grid. You may want to save the data
so that you can use it later to build a grid of the residuals. (You can
do this interactively in Z-MAP Plus.) Once you have an output grid
from Z-MAP Plus, you can use SURFCORRECT and the input grid
mode to do a second SURFCORRECT iteration that produces the
graphic output.
Macro Parameter XSDSAVE
Data Type C*4
Default Value NO

Name for the Merged Synthesized DZ data

Description When you use XSDSAVE = YES, this parameter requests a file
name for the merged well data and synthesized data used to create
the residual correction grid.
Macro Parameter NSDSAVE
Data Type C*24
Default Value DZDATA
MFD for Merged Synthesized DZ data

Description This specifies the MFD to which the merged well and synthesized
data are written. Used when XSDSAVE = YES.
Macro Parameter MFDOUTD
Data Type I
ZCL PROCESSES
SURFACEPIC

SURFACE-INTRSECT
Macro Name SURFACE-INTRSECT
Menu Option Macros Operations Surface Intersection Curve
Purpose This macro takes two intersecting grids as input. The macro uses the
grids to produce the curve of their intersection in one of three forms:
as a FALT file
as a VERT file
as a DATA profile
When the output is a data profile, the process saves the z value from the
first input grid. The output files terminate appropriately if you supply a
FALT file used in building both input grids.
Optionally, you can add the vertex trace of the line of intersection to the
current picture. If you supply a FALT file, your faults can be added to
the picture as well.
By analyzing for bad residuals, you can highlight portions of the
resulting intersection curve that have different back interpolation
results from either grid. These residuals are obtained by a macro call of
the ZCL QUALITY ASSURE process on the data profile output. The
bad residuals calculated in QUALITY ASSURE can also be posted to
the current picture. If no upper and lower bounds are set for bad
residual analysis, the macro sets them at the STD of the residuals
encountered. The residual analysis can be useful when trying to
localize bad high and low wall fault traces that can result when working
with gridded fault planes and surfaces.
This macro is an upgrade of the SURFACE INTERSECT ZCL process.
This macro optionally allows you to incorporate the fault file that was
used to build the input (intersecting) grids, whereas the ZCL process
does not.
Description You are asked to supply these specifications:

two grid files known to cross
input fault file used to build the two input grids (optional)
choice of output file types plus names and MFDs to write them to
line drawing information for the intersections posting on a
currently displayed picture
bad residuals limits and posting control information
R2003.12.0 SURFACE-INTRSECT 557

SURFACE-INTRSECT: Results
Results Surface Intersection produces:

requested VERT, FALT, and profile DATA files
as requested, the map projection of the line of intersection as a
POLYGON LINES LGB feature on the current picture
any faults described to the macro as a FAULT TRACES LGB, with
default color index and line weight from the ZCL CONTOUR
process
analysis of bad residuals encountered during calculation of the line
of intersection
option of posting bad residuals to the currently displayed picture
Scroll Up in the Process Window to See Quality Assure Output

You can view the bad residual analysis as output from the QUALITY ASSURE
ZCL process. Scroll up two pages in the processing window after normal
termination of the macro.
R2003.12.0 SURFACE-INTRSECT: Results 558

SURFACE-INTRSECT: Parameters
* Name of the First Input Grid File

Description Name of the first input grid file.
Macro Parameter GRIDIN1
Data Type C*40
o
Description The MFD that contains the first input grid file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
* Name of the Second Input Grid File

Description Name of the second input grid file.
Data Type C*40
o
Description The MFD that contains the second input grid file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Name of the Fault File to Use (Optional)

Description Name of the FALT file used to build the two input grids.
Data Type C*40
R2003.12.0 SURFACE-INTRSECT: Parameters 559

o
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Type of Output Files

Description This parameter allows you to indicate what type of output files you
want to produce. The curve of the grid intersection can be output as
a vertex file, as a fault file, as a profile file, or all three types at once.
Macro Parameter OUTFILES
Options .
VERTICES
FAULTS
PROFILES
ALL
Data Type C*8
Default Value VERTICES
Name of the Output Vertex Dataset

Description Name of the output vertex file.
Data Type C*24
Default Value SI-VERTICES
MFD on which to Put the Vertices

Description MFD that contains the output vertex file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Default Value 1 first MFD

Name of the Output Fault Dataset

Description Name of the output fault file.
Data Type C*24
Default Value SI-FAULTS
MFD for the Faults

Description MFD to use for saving the output vertex file.
Macro Parameter MFDFALT
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Name of the Output Profile Dataset

Description Name of the output profile fault file.
Macro Parameter PROFLS
Data Type C*24
Default Value SI-PROFILES
MFD for the Profiles

Description The MFD to use for saving the output profile file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Name of the Z Field in Profile Data

Description Name of the profile data z field.
Macro Parameter ZFLDN
Data Type C*20
Default Value PROFILE Z

Add the Intersection/Profile Line to Picture

Description Determines whether the intersection line is posted on the current
picture.
Macro Parameter ADDP
Options
YES = Post the intersection line on the current picture.
NO = Do not post the intersection line on the current picture.
Data Type C*4
Default Value NO
Choose the Line Type

Description Determines whether intersection line is drawn as a solid or dashed
line.
Macro Parameter LTYP
Options
SOLID
SINGLE DASH
Data Type C*12

Default Value SOLID
Specify a Line Weight 18

Description When the intersection line is drawn to the current picture this is the
line weight to be used.
Macro Parameter LWGH
Data Type I
Range 1 through 8
Default Value 2
Color Index to Use for the Intersection Line

Description Color index used to add the intersection line to the current picture.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 55

Analyze for Bad Residuals

Description Specify whether you wish to analyze the generated intersection line
for the occurrence of bad residuals resulting from the comparison
of backinterpolation on both input grids.
Macro Parameter ANRS
Options
YES = Analyze profiles where bad residuals are present.
NO = Do not analyze profiles where bad residuals are present.
Data Type C*4
Default Value NO
Upper Threshold for Bad Residual

Description Positive upper limit for an acceptable difference between back
interpolation against either input grid. Residuals above this value
are reported on in the processing window of Z-MAP Plus and are
posted if requested. If no real number is input here, the macro
calculates what the standard deviation on the resulting residuals are.
The macro uses the positive number result as the upper threshold
for bad residuals.
Macro Parameter UPTL
Data Type R
Lower Threshold for Bad Residual

Description Negative lower limit for an acceptable difference between back
interpolation against either input grid. Residuals below this value
are reported in the processing window of Z-MAP Plus and posted if
requested. If no real number is input here, the macro calculates
what the standard deviation on the resulting residuals are. The
macro uses the negative number result as the lower threshold for
bad residuals.
Macro Parameter LWTL
Data Type R

Post Bad Residual on the Picture

Description If you ask to analyze the residuals, this parameter determines
whether they are posted to the currently displayed picture. Only the
bad residuals defined by the parameters UPTL & LWTL are posted.
Two decimal locations are requested in the posting call. If the bad
residual is smaller than this, it is posted in scientific notation.
Macro Parameter ADDR
Options
YES = Bad residuals are posted on the picture.
NO = Bad residuals are not posted on the picture.
Data Type C*4
Default Value NO
Color Index for Posting Bad Residuals

Description This is the color index for posting bad residuals to the currently
displayed picture. The same index is used for the symbol (which
uses symbol code 90) and for the numerically posted bad residual
value.
Macro Parameter COLRR
Data Type I
Range 0 through 255
Default Value 54
Size of Symbols and Posted Residuals

Description This is the size of the symbols and the bad residual values posted
above the symbols, expressed in plotter units for the currently
displayed picture
Macro Parameter SPST
Data Type R

SURFACE-INTRSECT: ZCL Processes
ZCL PROCESSES
BACK INTERPOLATE BRANCH
CONTOUR DATA BLOCK
DATA BLOCK PRINT DATA BLOCK UTILITY
DATA STATISTICS DELETE FILE
DUAL DATA OPS DUAL GRID OPS
FILE CONVERSION FILE UTILITY
POST DATA NEW QUALITY ASSURE
SURFACE INTERSECT WRITE TEXT
R2003.12.0 SURFACE-INTRSECT: ZCL Processes 565

SURFACEPIC
Macro Name SURFACEPIC
Menu Option Macros Graphics Multi-Surface Map
Purpose This macro produces a map, given up to 3 surfaces (grids) and up to 3

Z-Fields. It will produce contours for the provided surfaces and post the
Z-Fields around the control points.
Description Surface picture is a useful macro for posting multiple surfaces on a

single map. This macro is often used in conjunction with the surface
correction macro to map the results of the macro. Surface picture can
contour the original surface, the error correction grid and the final
corrected surface.
Results This macro produces a picture at a user defined scale. It contours up to
3 selected surfaces and gives the user control over color, colorfill,
contour interval and contour line type.
You can post a maximum of three Z Fields can be posted around a well
symbol. The Z Field colors match the colors selected for the surface
contour lines.
This macro supplements the macro SURFCORRECT and generates
maps from the output of SURFCORRECT.
R2003.12.0 SURFACEPIC 566

SURFACEPIC: Parameters
ZGF to write final graphic to?

Description Enter the name of the ZGF where you will store the new picture.
Macro Parameter ZFILEP
Data Type C*40
Default Value LGWSDEMO.ZGF
o
Data file with new surface picks (x,y,z,ID)
Data Type C*24
*MFD name for input

Data Type I
Default Value 0
Input WELL NAME FIELD from data file

Data Type I
Input First Z-FIELD from data file

Macro Parameter INFLZ1
Data Type I
Input Second Z-FIELD from data file

Data Type I
Input Third Z-FIELD from data file

Data Type I
R2003.12.0 SURFACEPIC: Parameters 567

Project Title
Macro Parameter PROJECTT
Data Type C*40
Choose absolute map scale

Macro Parameter MPSCAL
Data Type C*12
Options
1:200
1:500
1:1,000
1:2,500
1:4,000
1:5,000
1:10,000
1:20,000
1:25,000
1:50,000
1:75,000
1:100,000
Default Value 1:5,000
Data ground UNITS

Macro Parameter MPUNIT
Description Use this field to indicate the units of measure of the map data.
NOTE: SURFACEPIC does not convert feet to meters or meters to
feet.
Data Type C*8
Options
METERS
FEET
Default Value METERS

Parameters for constructing first surface
*Input first GRID to be contoured

Data Type C*24
*MFD name for input

Macro Parameter MFDGIN1
Data Type I
FAULT FILE to use with contouring & graphics

Macro Parameter Macro Parameter FLTIN1
Data Type C*24
MFD name for input

Macro Parameter Macro Parameter MFDFIN1
Data Type I
Title for First Surface

Macro Parameter Macro Parameter MAPTIT1
Data Type C*24
Default Value FIRST SURFACE
Color for first surface

Macro Parameter Macro Parameter SURFCOL1
Data Type I
Default Value 3
Color for first set of faults

Macro Parameter Macro Parameter FALTCOL1
Data Type I
Default Value 13

CONTOUR INTERVAL for the new Structure map

Macro Parameter Macro Parameter CONINT1
Data Type R
Draw dashed contours of control surface?

Macro Parameter DASHCON1
Data Type C*4
Options
YES
NO
Default Value NO
Colorfill First Surface?

Description Turn colorfill for the first surface on or off.
Macro Parameter COLFIL1
Data Type Data Type C*12
Options
COLORFILL
NO COLORFILL
Color for Colorfill

Description Designate the cell from the color table that contains the first color to
use when drawing the colorfill for the first surface.
Macro Parameter CFCOL1
Data Type I
Default Value 56

Parameters for constructing second surface
Input Second GRID to be contoured

Data Type C*24
MFD name for input

Data Type I
FAULT FILE to use with operations & graphics

Macro Parameter FLTIN2
Data Type C*24
MFD name for input

Macro Parameter MFDFIN2
Data Type I
Title for Second Surface

Macro Parameter MAPTIT2
Data Type C*24
Default Value SECOND SURFACE
Color for second surface

Macro Parameter SURFCOL2
Data Type I
Default Value 4
Color for second set of faults

Macro Parameter FALTCOL2
Data Type I
Default Value 14


Macro Parameter CONINT2
Data Type R

Data Type C*4
Options s
YES
NO
Default Value YES
Colorfill Second Surface?

Description Turn colorfill for the second surface on or off
Options
COLORFILL
NO COLORFILL
Color for Colorfill

Data Type I
Default Value 76

Parameters for constructing second surface
Input Third GRID to be contoured

Data Type C*24
MFD name for input

Data Type I
FAULT FILE to use with contouring & graphics

Macro Parameter FLTIN3
Data Type C*24
MFD name for input

Macro Parameter MFDFIN3
Data Type C*24
Title for Third Surface

Macro Parameter MAPTIT3
Data Type C*24
Default Value THIRD SURFACE
Color for third surface

Macro Parameter SURFCOL3
Data Type I
Default Value 5
Color for third set of faults

Macro Parameter FALTCOL3
Data Type I
Default Value 15


Macro Parameter CONINT3
Data Type R

Data Type C*24
Options
YES
NO
Default Value YES
Colorfill Third Surface?

Description Turn colorfill for the third surface on or off
Options
COLORFILL
NO COLORFILL
Color for Colorfill

Description Set the color where spread of colors begins
Data Type I
Default Value 96
ZCL PROCESSES
SURFCORRECT

THREED-T-TO-D
Macro Name THREED-T-TO-D
Menu Option Macros Geophysics 3D Time-to-Depth Conversion
Purpose This macro converts a time grid to an average velocity grid using a
special three dimensional time-slice grid in the conversion process.
Each time-slice in the three dimensional grid is a grid of the varying
velocity at a constant time
.
Restrictions
The units of the time-slice grids and the time grid to be converted must be the
same, i.e. all in seconds, all in milliseconds, etc.

pseudo 3D (velocity) grid
time grid
constant times at the first layer, bottom layer, and DeltaT
(constant) between layers
Uses for This Macro

After building a Pseudo 3D grid of velocities at constant depth increments, you
can input a depth grid to this macro and back out the average velocity grid. This
is handy for spotting velocity anomalies in gridded depth surfaces that were
derived using other time-to-depth procedures.
After building a Pseudo 3D grid of a model using grids of depth at constant time
increments, the input time grid can be converted directly to a depth grid.
R2003.12.0 THREED-T-TO-D 575

THREED-T-TO-D: Technical Notes
Technical Notes
NODES = ft./msec at t0
(Gridded to mappable)
t0
t1
+Y
t2
NCOLS = 4
ROWS = 4
+X NTIMES = 3
Visualizing the 3D Pseudo Velocity Grid
Preparing the Three-Dimensional Grid

The 3D average velocity/depth grid is essentially a concatenated series
of conventional 2D grids. You may use the TIME-SLICE macro to
build this grid, or you may build this grid at the system level. If this grid
is built at the system level by concatenating the time-slice grids into
one file, you should keep the following information in mind.
The steps for generating the 3D grid at the system level and importing it
into Z-MAP Plus are:
1. At the system level, concatenate the time-slice grids into one file,
with T0 followed by T1, and so on.
2. Select Utilities Import to specify an input grid that supplies the
values for rows, columns, XMIN, XMAX, YMIN, YMAX.
R2003.12.0 THREED-T-TO-D: Technical Notes 576

THREED-T-TO-D: Technical Notes
The values for the pseudo grid are calculated in the following way:
Value Calculated As
ROWS Number of rows in the original time grids.

COLUMNS NCOL * NTIMES where NCOL = number of grid
columns in the original time grids and NTIMES =
Number of time-slices.
XMIN3D XMIN of the original time grids.
XMAX3D XMIN + (COLUMNS-1) * XINC where XMIN =
gridding increment of the original time grids.
YMIN3D YMIN of the original time grids
YMAX3D YMAX of the original time grids

*Grid: Pseudo-Three-Dimensional Velocity
Description Name of the input file that contains the pseudo three-dimensional
input velocity grid model. This is the output grid from running the
TIME-SLICE macro.
Macro Parameter VELOGRID
Data Type C*24

Description MFD that contains the input three-dimensional velocity grid.
Macro Parameter MFDVELO
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 THREED-T-TO-D: Technical Notes 577

THREED-T-TO-D: Parameters
*Grid: Time
Description Name of the input file for the time grid. If the Pseudo
3-Dimensional Velocity grid model is made of one-way time
velocity grids between T0, T1, T2, etc., this grid must be structured
in one-way time.
Macro Parameter TIMEGRID
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the Input Time Grid
Description MFD that contains the input time grid.
Macro Parameter MFDTIME
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
*Time at First Velocity Layer

Description The time value for the top (minimum) slice in the 3D grid.
Macro Parameter TIMETOP
Data Type R
*Time at Bottom Velocity Layer

Description The time value for the bottom (maximum) slice in the 3D grid.
Macro Parameter TIMEBOT
Data Type R
Default: No default
*Delta Time Between Velocity Layers

Description The Delta time interval between each slice in the 3D grid. (Grids
are assumed to be evenly spaced.)
Macro Parameter TIMEDEL
Data Type R
Default: No default
R2003.12.0 THREED-T-TO-D: Parameters 578

THREED-T-TO-D: Parameters
*Grid: Output Interpolated Velocities

Description Name of the output grid for the interpolated average velocities/
depths.
Data Type C*24
Default: No default
MFD Number of the Output Grid

Description The MFD to use for saving the output grid of interpolated
velocities/depths.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
THREEDTIMETODEPT
R2003.12.0 THREED-T-TO-D: Parameters 579

TIME-SLICE
Macro Name TIME-SLICE
Menu Option Macros Geophysics 3D Velocity Grid (Time Slice)
Purpose This macro builds the pseudo three-dimensional velocity grid needed
for the Time-to-Depth conversion method that is provided in the
THREED-T-TO-D macro. Each of the two dimensional velocity grids
must have the same area of interest, increments, and ZNON value.
Description The procedure puts the top (shallowest) time-slice grid first, followed
by slice grid 1, slice grid 2, up to slice grid 5. Lastly, the bottom
(deepest) time-slice grid is specified.
If you have more than five time-slice Velocity Grids to concatenate, you
may make more than one pass with this macro to build the final 3D
Velocity Grid. The additional passes continue to add consecutively
deeper time-slice grids.
Technical Note
If you construct this 3D Velocity grid of derived one way time velocities at
constant time-slices of equal Delta T, then you need to remember that the input
time grid to the THREED-T-TO-D macro, which produces an interpolated result
from this 3D grid model, must be a one-way time to top of event grid using
compatible time units, where:
Velocity time-slices = ft/msec (OWT)
Time-to-Top = msec (OWT)
Output Average Velocity number = ft/msec (OWT)
Please note that you can also build one of these Pseudo 3D grids to represent
velocity of constant depth increments. Then in THREED-T-TO-D, generate the
average velocity grid to a gridded depth event.
R2003.12.0 TIME-SLICE 580

TIME-SLICE: Results
Results A pseudo three-dimensional velocity grid, as illustrated below.
Shallowest, top
Grid 1
Grid 2
Grid 3
Grid 4
Grid 5
Deepest, bottom
Enter the Top (Shallowest) Timeslice Grid

Description Name of the input file for the top (shallowest) timeslice grid.
Macro Parameter TOPTS
Data Type C*24
oMFD for the Top Grid

Description MFD that contains the top grid.
Macro Parameter TOPTSMFD
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Enter the First Time Grid (1 of 5)

Description Name of the input file for the first time grid.
Data Type C*24
R2003.12.0 TIME-SLICE: Results 581

TIME-SLICE: Parameters
o
Description MFD that contains the first input time grid.
Macro Parameter GRIDMFD1
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Enter the Second Time Grid (2 of 5)

Description Name of the input file for the second time grid.
Data Type C*24
o
Description MFD that contains the second input time grid.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Enter the Third Time Grid (3 of 5)

Description Name of the input file for the third time grid.
Data Type C*24
oMFD for the Third Grid

Description MFD that contains the third input time grid.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 TIME-SLICE: Parameters 582

Enter the Fourth Time Grid (4 of 5)

Description Name of the input file for the fourth time grid.
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the Fourth Grid
Description MFD that contains the fourth input time grid.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Enter the Fifth Time Grid (5 of 5)

Description Name of the input file for the fifth time grid.
Data Type C*24
o
Description MFD that contains the fifth input time grid.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Enter the Bottom (Deepest) Time-Slice Grid

Description Name of the input bottom (deepest) time-slice grid.
Macro Parameter BOTTS
Data Type C*24

o
MFD for the Bottom Time-Slice Grid
Description MFD that contains the bottom time-slice grid.
Macro Parameter BOTTSMFD
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Enter the Output Concatenated Grid

Description Name of the output Pseudo 3D time-slice Velocity Grid.
Data Type C*24
Default: TIMESLICE
MFD for the Output Time-Slice Grid

Description The MFD to use for storing the output grid of interpolated
velocities/depths.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
ZCL PROCESSES
THREE D TIMESLICE

TRANSFORM-COORDS
Macro Name TRANSFORM-COORDS
Menu Option Operations Transformation Coordinates (Overwrite Fields)
Purpose This macro performs coordinate transformations (map projections). It

uses an input data file to define the transformation parameters. It allows
the output coordinates to overwrite an existing field.
Description You are asked to specify these input values:

The input data file on which the map projection process will be
performed.
The fields in the input data file that will be used as input to the
projection process.
An input file for which a projection is defined. The projection
information from this file will be used to define the projection for
the transformation process. This is a data file that has had
coordinate transformation already performed on it. To see which
projection is associated with a data file (if any), run the
DATA-HISTORY macro on the file.
The direction of the transformation.
The name of the output file and the MFD that will contain the
output file.
The fields for writing the output coordinates in the output file.
The null data (ZNON) value for the output fields.
Results The output is a file with transformed coordinates.
R2003.12.0 TRANSFORM-COORDS 585

TRANSFORM-COORDS: Parameters

*Input Data file from which to read Projection Parameters
Description Name of a data file that contains projected data. This is a data file
that already had coordinate transformation performed on it. The
projection parameters from this file will be used in the projection
process.
Macro Parameter PROJFILE
Data Type C*24
Range All attached data files
o
Input Projection Parameter MASTER FILE
Description MFD containing the Input Data file from which to read Projection
Parameters.
Macro Parameter PROJMFD
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
*Input Data file to be Transformed

Description Name of a data file containing data to be projected.
Data Type C*24
oInput transformee MASTER FILE

Description MFD containing the Input Data file to be transformed.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
R2003.12.0 TRANSFORM-COORDS: Parameters 586

*Direction of Transformation
Description Direction of transformation process
Data Type C*4
Range Either LLXY (LatLon to XY) or XYLL (XY to LatLon)
Default Value LLXY
*Input Y / Latitude field

Description Field that contains the input Northing (Y) or Latitude data
Macro Parameter INFLDN
Data Type I
Range All real-valued fields on input file
Default Value First Latitude or Y field.
*Input X / Longitude field

Description Field that contains the input Easting (X) or Longitude data
Macro Parameter INFLDE
Data Type I
Default Value First Longitude or X field
*Field to Replace with Output Y or Latitude

Description Field to use for saving the output Northing (Y) or Latitude data
Macro Parameter OUTFDNLT
Data Type I
Default Value No default value
*Field to Replace with Output X or Longitude

Description Field to contain the output Easting (X) or Longitude data.
Macro Parameter OUTFDELN
Data Type I
Default Value No defaultm value

*Output Y / Latitude Field Name

Description Name for Field to contain the output Northing (Y) or Latitude data
Macro Parameter FLDNAMEN
Data Type C*20
Default Value Data type default
*Output X / Longitude Field Name

Description Name for Field to contain the output Easting (X) or Longitude data.
Macro Parameter FLDNAMEE
Data Type C*20
Default Value Data type default
ZNON for output file

Description Null data (ZNON) value for output Lat/Lon or X/Y fields
Data Type R
Default Value +1.0E+30
Output File Name

Description Name for new data file containing transformed data
Data Type C*24
Output MASTER FILE

Description MFD for new data file containing transformed data.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Default Value 1 First attached MFD.
ZCL PROCESSES
PROJECTION
TRANSFORMCOORDS

TREND-ANAL-GRID
Macro Name TREND-ANAL-GRID
Menu Option Modeling Trend Surface
Purpose This macro creates a trend grid and a residual grid by:
building a trend grid of a specified order from the supplied surface
grid
subtracting the trend grid from the supplied surface grid and
creating the residual grid
Execute This Macro Twice

You must execute the macro twice: once to view the histogram and determine the
correct number of terms and once again to perform the final trend analysis.
Typically, you would first look at a map of the residuals and a map of
the surface input grid on which contours from the trend grid have been
overlaid. Alternatively, you can display the residuals as colorfill and
overlay the contours of the input surface grid and trend grids. Using
either of these methods, localized high or low residual features, which
are geologically regarded as anomalies, can be easily identified.
Many application scenarios exist. For example, this macro may be used
to generate residuals and a trend surface from a velocity grid. Upon
examining the residuals, you could then identify high velocity, pull-up
areas.

grid from which the trend grid is to be created
number of terms desired
names of the output trend and residual grids
To Process Data Files, Use Trend Gridding

This macro only uses grid files for input. When dealing with data files, you must
use Gridding Trend Gridding.
Results A grid containing a trend surface and a grid for the residual between the
input grid and the trend grid.
R2003.12.0 TREND-ANAL-GRID 589

TREND-ANAL-GRID: Technical Notes
Technical Notes
The TREND-ANAL-GRID macro performs a Least Squares fit to grid
data to produce a grid model that represents the large scale regional
trend of the surface. The trend grid may be subtracted from the surface
grid model to reveal small scale surface features (residuals) that would
be otherwise obscured by the regional trend. This is called Trend and
Residual Analysis and it may be used to identify bad input data points.
Factors Affecting Trend Gridding Accuracy

Although the TREND-ANAL-GRID macro only accepts grid data as
input, this Technical Note discusses the use of both grid and control
point data.
Trend Gridding produces a grid of the large scale regional components
of a surface from either control point or grid data. The extent to which
the trend grid models the regional trend is controlled by the number of
terms in the polynomial expression used to compute the trend fit. In
addition, although the same data may be used to generate a trend grid
and map, drastic differences may appear when one surface trend is
generated from a grid and the other is generated directly from control
point data. Three factors that contribute to these differences are:
spatial distribution of the data
number of terms used in the computations
accuracy of the trend fit
R2003.12.0 TREND-ANAL-GRID: Technical Notes 590

Spatial Distribution
The spatial distribution of the data is of primary importance in trend
gridding. Data that is evenly spaced throughout a field, as is grid data,
produces a trend that models the surface in a consistent manner. On the
other hand, data that is clustered, such as control point data, produces a
trend grid that resembles the structure of only the clustered areas. (You
have the option of inputting control point data when executing
Gridding Trend Gridding.) For this reason, the impact type data
can strongly affect the resulting trend grid.
Control Point Data In Trend Gridding

Trend grids generated from control point data are extremely sensitive to
the spatial distribution of the data. When the control points are evenly
spaced over the surface, the trend produced closely resembles the trend
produced from a a grid. However, if the control points are clustered, the
resulting trend differs from that produced from a grid.
Unlike the evenly distributed grid nodes, clustered control points
produce a trend that only accurately models those surface areas having
the highest concentration of control points.
Control point data is of greatest use when you wish to extend trend
analysis around a cluster of control points, or when you have a random
distribution of control points throughout the area. Also, because there
are typically fewer data points in a control point file than in a grid file,
processing time is less.
You can use control point data as input when you select Gridding
Trend Gridding.
Grid Data in Trend Gridding

Trend grids generated from grid data more accurately reflect the overall
trend because the grid nodes are evenly distributed. However, grid data
files are typically large and can take a long time to process. For this
reason, interactive Trend Gridding gives you the ability to block
average. (The TREND-ANAL-GRID macro takes all the defaults found
in interactive Trend Gridding.)

Number of Terms
Another consideration is the number of terms used in the trend fit. The
higher the number, the more flexion there can be in the trend surface
and the closer it fits the data. However, it also allows the trend surface
to climb or drop steeply in regions of low data concentration near the
edge of the grid. It is desirable to use the lowest number of terms that
adequately describe the surface.
When using evenly distributed data, a higher term number may be
selected to generate a trend model that closely fits the data. However, if
the data is not evenly distributed, the great amount of flexion from the
higher term numbers causes sporadic behavior within the trend.
Select the Lowest Number of Terms Possible

Because the amount of flexion can cause inconsistency in the gridding of various
data distribution types, it is generally best to select the lowest number of terms
that adequately describe the surface.
Accuracy of the Trend Fit

To help you determine the accuracy, or fit, of a trend grid to the actual
data, the Normalized Absolute Standard Deviation of the Residuals
Graph and the Residuals in Terms of the Standard Deviation Graph
appear. These are discussed in the following paragraphs.

Normalized Absolute Standard Deviation of the Residuals

Graph
The Normalized Absolute Standard Deviation of the Residuals Graph
helps you determine the lowest number of terms that adequately
describe the surface. When viewing the display, the smaller the
absolute standard deviation of the residuals, the better the trend fit. The
number of terms needed to produce an adequate trend model can be
recognized when an addition of terms to the trend fit no longer
significantly reduces the standard deviation of the residual. If you draw
a curve through the graph, the number of terms listed where the curve
flattens out is the one to use. In the figure shown below, four to six
terms might be used as a reasonable number of terms. This is a 2nd
order trend.
NORMALIZED ABSOLUTE STANDARD DEVIATION OF THE
RESIDUALS FOR POLYNOMIAL OF GIVEN NUMBER OF TERMS
MAXIMUM VALUE = 0.27539E+02
I + +
I + +
I + + +
I + + + + + + + + + +
I + + + + + + + + + +
I + + + + + + + + + +
I + + + + + + + + + +
I + + + + + + + + + +
I + + + + + + + + + +
I + + + + + + + + + +
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910
RESIDUAL MEAN = -0.13525E-05
STANDARD DEVIATION = 0.16910E+0

Residuals in Terms of the Standard Deviation Graph

This graph helps you determine how well the number of terms selected
fits the data. A good fit produces a normal distribution of approximately
0. In a typical normal distribution, less than 1% of the data is expected
to have a standard deviation greater than 3. Data points that fall into this
category are poorly fitted and are randomly distributed throughout the
surface. Points in this area may represent bad data. If the curve is
skewed, there is at least one region of the surface that is poorly modeled
by the trend. In the figure below, there is a significant number of data
points that are poorly modeled, due to clustering of the data.
RESIDUAL MEAN = -0.13525E-05
STANDARD DEVIATION = 0.16910E+0
*** CALCULATING TREND FIT RESIDUALS ***
RESIDUALS IN TERMS OF THE STANDARD DEVIATION
FROM 3.0.SIGMA TO -3.0.SIGMA IN 0.5.SIGMA BINS
I + +
I + +
I + +
I + +
I + +
I + +
I + + + + +
I + + + + + +
I + + + + + + + +
I + + + + + + + + + + +
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91011121314

Block Averaging
Block averaging divides your grid file into a set of blocks, each
containing an equal number of rows and columns. The grid nodes
within each block are averaged to produce a mean z value for each
block. These mean values are used to determine the trend fit instead of
the individual grid node values. Block averaging drastically reduces the
CPU time required by the Trend Gridding Algorithm without
significantly changing the results.
For Block Averaging, Use Trend Gridding

Block Averaging is currently not available in the TREND-ANAL-GRID macro;
however, it is provided in Gridding Trend Gridding.
Output Grid Parameters

When you use a grid file, the default parameters are identical to those of
your input grid. However, the Trend Gridding option gives you the
ability to modify the output trend grid by selecting different (x,y)
minimums, maximums, and grid increments.When you process
multiple grids, the gridding parameters must be compatible with all
others.

Limiting Z Values
Limiting the minimum and maximum z values of the grid eliminates
drastic overshoot of the grid values above and below the data values,
especially when you are using 3rd order, or higher polynomials. Set the
minimum z value slightly smaller than the smallest data value, and the
maximum z value slightly larger than the largest data value.
****** PROCESS DUALGRIDOPS USE 15508 ******
Apply operation SUBTRACT
to grid ONE WAY TIME TO TOP and

to grid trend 1 ,
GRID FILE:ONE WAY TIME TO TOP

CREATED: 20 JAN 93
AT: 21:03
GRID FILE:trend 1
CREATED: 21 JAN 93
AT: 13:33
GRID FILE: resid 1

CREATED: 21 JAN 93
AT: 13:33
NUMBER OF ROWS = 156

NUMBER OF COLUMNS = 156
NUMBER OF Z-VALUE NODES = 24246
NUMBER OF ZNON NODES = 90
MINIMUM X COORDINATE = 635550.00
MAXIMUM X COORDINATE = 638650.00
MINIMUM Y COORDINATE = 5441880.0
MAXIMUM Y COORDINATE = 5444980.0
Grid statistics X INTERVAL BETWEEN COLUMNS = 20.000000
on the residual Y INTERVAL BETWEEN ROWS = 20.000000
MAXIMUM SURFACE VALUE = 68.618958
MINIMUM SURFACE VALUE = -29.918396
SURFACE RANGE = 98.537354
MEAN OF Z = -0.15759882
ROOT MEAN SQUARE OF Z = 16.731031
STANDARD DEVIATION OF Z = 16.730289
RELATIVE VARIATION OF Z = -106.15745
ROOT MEAN SQUARE CURVATURE OF Z = 0.52230442E-02
****** PROCESS MACROEND USE 15509 ******
****** PROCESS STOP USE 55 ******
** NORMAL TERMINATION **
PROCESSING FINISHED PLEASE CONTINUE

Table 1: Trend Orthogonal Polynomials
Polynomial Number
Expression
Order of Terms
0 1 A (Constant)
1st 2 x
3 y
2nd 4 x2
5 xy
6 y2
3rd 7 x3
8 x2y
9 xy2
10 y3
4th 11 x4
12 x3y
13 x2y2
14 xy3
15 y4
5th 16 x5
17 x4y
18 x3y2
19 x2y3
20 xy4
21 y5
6th 22 x6
23 x5y
24 x4y2
25 x3y3
26 x2y4
27 xy5
28 y6
For example, a second order (6 term) polynomial would consist of the

following expression:
A + k 1 x + k 2 y + k 3 x 2 + k 4 xy + k 5 y 2
where kn, the coefficients, are calculated from the data.

TREND-ANAL-GRID: Parameters

*Name of Input Grid File
Data Type C*24

Macro Parameter MFDGIN
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Name of the Output Trend Grid

Description Name of the output trend grid.
Macro Parameter TRENDOUT
Data Type C*24
Default: TREND GRID
Name of Trend Grid MFD

Description Specify the MFD to use for storing the output trend grid.
Macro Parameter MFDTOUT
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Name of the Output Residual Grid

Description Name of the output residual grid.
Macro Parameter RESIDOUT
Data Type C*24
Default Value RESIDUAL GRID
R2003.12.0 TREND-ANAL-GRID: Parameters 598

TREND-ANAL-GRID: Parameters
Name of Residual Grid MFD

Description Name of the MFD for the residual grid.
Macro Parameter MFDROUT
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Default Value 1
Number of Terms for Trend Grid (3, 6, 10-28)

Description Specify the number of TERMS in the output trend grid; for
example, a flat planar surface has 3 terms. Refer to the plot of the
Normalized Absolute Standard Deviation of the Residuals for
Polynomial of Given Number of Terms on page 593 to determine
the number of terms to enter. A good rule of thumb is to start out
with the term number that corresponds to where the histogram
flattens out.
Macro Parameter NTERMS
Data Type I
Default Value 3
ZCL PROCESSES
TREND GRIDDING DUAL GRID OPS
R2003.12.0 TREND-ANAL-GRID: Parameters 599

USER-FILTER
Macro Name USER-FILTER
Menu Option Modeling User-Defined Filter
Description This macro filters a grid by means of a user-defined filter operator grid.
The filter operator grid may originate either from a GRID file on an
attached MFD or as an external disk file that is imported. This filter
operator may possess ring symmetry. Ring symmetry means that the
values in the grid nodes that are equal distance from the centerpoint of
the grid are equal. The macro can handle up to 99 rings.
The input grid file may contain undefined values. These values may
exist within the grid itself or may be caused by faults crossing the grid.
The macro employs one of two methods to handle undefined values. If
the operator is ring symmetric, a ring-symmetric compensation method
is used; otherwise, an asymmetric compensation method is used. If no
compensation is desired, it may be turned off.
Specify these parameters:
the GRID file to be filtered
an optional FALT file
the GRID file for the filter operator grid
symmetry type of the filter operator grid
whether to compensate for null nodes in the filter operator grid
origin of the ring symmetric filter operator grid (optional)
name of the external file for the ring
symmetric operator grid (optional)
name of the output GRID file
Results An output grid file for the filtered grid.
R2003.12.0 USER-FILTER 600

USER-FILTER: Parameters

*Enter the Grid File to be filtered
Data Type C*24

Description MFD that contains the input grid file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Enter Any Faults to be Used

Data Type C*24
Default Value None, use no file
o
Description MFD that contains the input fault file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Enter the Filter Operator Grid

Description Name of the grid file to be the filter operator.
Macro Parameter GRIDFN
Data Type C*24
Default Value None, use no file
R2003.12.0 USER-FILTER: Parameters 601

o
MFD for Filter Operator Grid
Description MFD that contains the filter operator grid file.
Macro Parameter MFDFN
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Enter the Name of the Output Grid File

Description Name of the filtered grid file.
Data Type C*24
MFD for Output Grid

Description MFD that contains the output grid file.
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Symmetry of the Filter Operator Grid

Description Symmetry type of the filter grid.
Macro Parameter SYMMETRY
Options
NONE = Node weights are not symmetric.
RING = Node weights are defined in concentric rings.
Data Type C*8
Default Value NONE
Compensate when Encountering Null Nodes

Description Indicate whether to compensate for null values in grid nodes.
Macro Parameter CMPNSATE
Options
YES = Apply compensation.
NO = Do not apply compensation.
Data Type C*4
Default Value YES

Origin of the Ring Symmetric Filter Grid

Description Source for a ring symmetric filter grid.
Required If SYMMETRY = RING

If the SYMMETRY parameter is set to RING, you must set a value for this
field. The SYMMETRY parameter is set in the Symmetry of the Filter
Operator Grid fields value in the macro interface.
Macro Parameter RINGIN

Options
GRID = Obtain the filter from a GRID file.
ASCII = Obtain the filter from an external ASCII file.
Data Type C*8
Default Value GRID
Enter External File with Ring Weights

Description Name of external file containing grid ring weights.
Required if RINGIN = ASCII

If the RINGIN parameter is set to ASCII, you must designate the file that
contains the grid ring weights. The RINGIN parameter is set in the Origin of
the Ring Symmetric Filter Grid field of the macro interface.

Data Type C*80
Default Value None
ZCL PROCESSES
BRANCH DATA BLOCK
DATA BLOCK LOAD DELETE FILE
FILE UTILITY GRID STATISTICS
IMPORT SELECT
SPAWN USER GRID FILTER

VEL-FUN-T-TO-D
Macro Name VEL-FUN-T-TO-D
Menu Option Macros Geophysics Velocity-function Time-to-Depth
Purpose This macro executes Velocity-Function Time to Depth Conversion. The

time-to-depth conversion is accomplished on a one-surface-per-run
basis. There are two basic models:
T2 T1
Average Velocity Approach: 2 = V 0 ------------------ + Z
S
Acceleration Function Approach: A ( T2 T1 ) L
= -------- + Z 1 exp --------------------------- ---
LV
A S A
All approaches require the user to input three grids:
(T1) Time to the top of the interval being evaluated. For example,
Time-to-Water Bottom.
(Z1) Depth to the event (T1). For example, this could be the last
surface converted to depth or to gridded bathymetry.
(T2) Time to the top of the event being converted to depth. For
example, a gridded time horizon from interpolated digitized
seismic files.
The average velocity model V0 is defined between T1 and T2 and may
be entered as a grid or constant. Alternatively, V0 could come from the
THREED-T-TO-D macro, where average velocity is output as a grid. It
could also be built from a data file of calculated move-out velocities or
even well derived velocities from multi-shot surveys. For the
acceleration function: LV, A and S (SCALE) can all be constants, or LV
and A can be grids. Note that in the acceleration model, LV is always
the velocity at the surface.
If You Do Not Have Grids of T1 or Z1

If you dont have grids of T1 or Z1 and want to use constants, you can produce
them with the EVALUATE-CONGRID macro. Alternatively, you could take your
T2 grid and use Single Grid Operations, CLIPMIN CLIPMAX the node values
to that of the desired constant.
R2003.12.0 VEL-FUN-T-TO-D 604

VEL-FUN-T-TO-D: Description

the type of formation to use
a grid representing the depth at the top of the interval (Z1) the
last derived depth surface above
a grid representing the time at the top of the interval (T1) the
last time surface above
a grid representing the time at the bottom of the interval (T2)
your digitized time events, next event deeper
An optional Grid representing the Velocity at the surface (LV)
for acceleration function only
an optional grid representing the interval velocity (V0)
an optional grid representing the acceleration (A)
constant velocity at the top of the surface (LV)
constant interval velocity (V0)
constant acceleration (A)
constant time scale value (S)
Results A grid dataset representing the depth at the bottom of the interval.
R2003.12.0 VEL-FUN-T-TO-D: Description 605

VEL-FUN-T-TO-D: Parameters

Help for this Macro
information on values needed for this macro.

for the macro.
Macro Parameter COMMENTA
Data Type C*60
Default Value All formulas have Z1, T1 and T2 as input grids
R2003.12.0 VEL-FUN-T-TO-D: Parameters 606

Velocity Function Model

Description The type of time-to-depth function to use.
Options
CONSTANT = The CONSTANT Interval Velocity Function uses
the formula:
T2 T1
Z 2 = V 0 ------------------ + Z 1
S
where V0 and S are constants.
GRIDDED = The GRIDDED Interval Velocity Function uses the

formula:
T2 T1
Z 2 = V 0 ------------------ + Z 1
S
where S is a constant and V0 is a grid.
LINEAR CONSTANT = The LINEAR CONSTANT (Acceleration Model).

Velocity Function uses the formula:
A ( T 2 T 1 ) LV
Z 2 = -------- + Z 1 exp --------------------------- --------
LV
A S A
where LV, S and A are constants.
LINEAR GRIDDED = The LINEAR GRIDDED (Acceleration Model)

Velocity Function uses the formula:
A ( T 2 T 1 ) LV
Z 2 = -------- + Z 1 exp --------------------------- --------
LV
A S A
where S is a constant and LV and A are grids.

Data Type C*16
Default Value CONSTANT
*Grid: Depth at Top (Z1)

Description Name of the input file for the depth grid at the top of the formation.
Macro Parameter TOPDGRID
Data Type C*24

o
MFD for the Depth Grid at Top
Description MFD that contains the depth grid at the top of the target formation.
Macro Parameter MFDTOPD
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
*Grid: Time at Top (T1)

Description Name of the input file for the time grid at the top of the formation.
Macro Parameter TOPTGRID
Data Type C*24
o
MFD for the Time Grid at Top
Description MFD that contains the time grid at the top of the formation.
Macro Parameter MFDTOPT
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
*Grid: Time at Bottom (T2)

Description Name of the input file for the time grid at the bottom of the
formation.
Macro Parameter BOTTGRID
Data Type C*24
oMFD for the Time Grid at Bottom

Description MFD that contains the time grid at the bottom of the formation.
Macro Parameter MFDBOTT
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5

Grid: Velocity at Surface (LV)

Description Name of the input file containing velocity at the surface. Required
if METHOD = LINEAR GRIDDED.
Macro Parameter TOPVGRID
Data Type C*24
oMFD for the Velocity Grid at Top

Description MFD that contains the velocity grid at the top of the target
formation.
Macro Parameter MFDTOPV
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Grid: Interval Velocity (V0)

Description Name of the input file for the interval velocity. Required if
METHOD = GRIDDED.
Macro Parameter INTVGRID
Data Type C*24
oMFD
for the Interval Velocity Grid
Description MFD that contains the interval velocity grid.
Macro Parameter MFDINTV
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5

Grid: Acceleration (A)

Description Name of the input file for the acceleration. Required if METHOD =
LINEAR GRIDDED.
Macro Parameter ACCLGRID
Data Type C*24
oMFD for the Acceleration Grid

Description MFD that contains the acceleration grid for the target formation.
Macro Parameter MFDACCL
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5
Output Grid: Depth at Bottom (Z2)

Description Name of the output file which contain the depth at the bottom of the
target formation.
Macro Parameter BOTDGRID
Data Type C*24
MFD for Depth at Bottom

Description The MFD to use for storing the depth at bottom.
Macro Parameter MFDBOTD
Data Type I
Range 0 through 5

Velocity Time Conversion Factor

Description Conversion factor to convert between units of velocities and times.
2000 converts two way millisecond seismic times to be unit
compatible with meters per second. That is, the seismic times
originally in two way time (milliseconds) are divided by 2000,
giving one way time and seconds. This is unit compatible with a
velocity grid in meters second.
Macro Parameter SCALE
Data Type R
Velocity at Top (if Linear Constant - LV)

Description The velocity at the surface. Required if METHOD = LINEAR
CONSTANT. This is the datum velocity for the top surface in the
interval used for calculating constant Acceleration (A).
Macro Parameter TOPVELO
Data Type R
Interval Velocity (if Constant - V0)

Description If METHOD = CONSTANT, this value is used for the constant
velocity for depth conversion.
Macro Parameter INTVELO
Data Type R
Acceleration (if Linear Constant - A)

Description Constant acceleration through the formation. Required if
METHOD = LINEAR CONSTANT.
Macro Parameter ACCELER
Data Type R
ZCL PROCESSES
VEL FUN TIME TO DEPT

VERT-TO-DGRID
Macro Name VERT-TO-DGRID
Menu Option Macros Utility Distance-to-Vertex Grid
Purpose The VERT-TO-DGRID macro records the shortest distance from each
grid node to any point along any line segment in a user-specified input
vertex file of the form (x,y,seg id). The AOI of the output grid is defined
by a user-specified input grid. As part of the macro process, the input
vertex file is resampled at a rate equivalent to half the cell size of the
input grid. The resampled vertex file may be saved as a data file.
Once you have interactively digitized your interpretation of a stream
channel centerline, you may use this macro to produce a form grid that
records distances to the digitized centerlines. The resulting grid may be
used to guide Trendform Gridding. When you edit the digitized
centerlines, you can use the initial form grid as a template for creating a
new form grid.
Description You must specify these parameters:

the input vertex file and the name of the MFD that contains it
the input grid file and the name of the MFD that contains it
the name of the output distance grid and the MFD to which it is to
be written
the name of the output data file and the MFD to which it is to be
written (Optional)
Results A distance grid is created for use in Z-MAP Plus Trendform Gridding.
R2003.12.0 VERT-TO-DGRID 612

VERT-TO-DGRID: Parameters

Select input VERT file
Description The name of the input vertex file
Data Type VERT
Default Value None
MFD name for the input vertex file

Description The name of the MFD that contains the input vertex file
Data Type I
Default Value None
Select input GRID file

Description The name of the input grid file
Data Type GRID
Default Value None
MFD name for the input grid file

Description The name of the MFD that contains the input grid file
Macro Parameter MFDGIN
Data Type I
Default Value None
Select name for output distance grid

Description Name of the output distance grid
Data Type GRID
Default Value None
R2003.12.0 VERT-TO-DGRID: Parameters 613

VERT-TO-DGRID: Parameters
MFD name of output distance grid

Description The name of the MFD that contains the output distance grid
Macro Parameter MFDGOUT
Data Type 1
Default Value None
Save resampled vertex file as data?

Description Indicate whether to save the resampled vertex file to a data file
Macro Parameter SAVEOUT
Options Yes = save vertex file to data file
No = do not save vertex file to data file
Data Type DATA
Default Value No
Select output DATA file

Description The name of the output data file
Data Type DATA
Default Value None
MFD name for the output data file

Description The name of the MFD that contains the output data file
Data Type I
Default Value None
ZCL PROCESSES
GRID STATISTICS DATA BLOCK UTILITY
LINERESAMPLING FILECONVERSION
FILEUTILITY DELETE FILE
POINTGRIDPLUS
R2003.12.0 VERT-TO-DGRID: Parameters 614

ZGF-SUMMARY
Macro Name ZGF-SUMMARY
Menu Option File Info Graphics File Summary
Purpose This macro generates a report for each picture in your graphics file
(ZGF). This report includes:
name of the picture
area of interest details
a list of the features (graphic segments) in the file
Description You are asked to input a graphics file.
Results A printout containing information about all the pictures on the graphics
file. Projection information is included in the report.
For example:
PICTURE NAME:
REEF WITH SLOPES
MIN MAX RANGE MAP SCALE

X: 0. 40.000 40.000 2.0000
Y: 8.0000 42.000 34.000 2.0000
PLOT SIZE: X-DIMENSION = 22.000 Y-DIMENSION = 22.000
GRAPHICS SEGMENT (LGB) TYPES:

BORDERS
CONTOURS
POSTED CONTROL POINTS AND VALUES
BORDER LABELS AND TICK MARKS
TITLE BLOCK
R2003.12.0 ZGF-SUMMARY 615

ZGF-SUMMARY: Parameters

*Enter the Name of the Graphics File
Description Name of the graphics file (ZGF) whose information is displayed.
(In ZCL, specify the full system path name.)
Macro Parameter ZGF
Data Type C*80
ZCL PROCESSES
ZGF INFO
R2003.12.0 ZGF-SUMMARY: Parameters 616

Running Macros
Overview
Macros executed from Z-MAP Plus are called Z-MAP Plus macros,
and those executed from a ZCL command stream are called ZCL
macros. The structure of these two types of macros is slightly different,
and is covered in Macro Structure starting on page 649. You can run
Z-MAP Plus macros as ZCL macros, but you cannot run ZCL macros
from Z-MAP Plus. Z-MAP Plus macros can also be classified as either
user-supplied or Landmark-supplied.
R2003.12.0 Overview 617

Running a Macro in Z-MAP Plus

To run a macro in Z-MAP Plus, follow these steps:
1. Verify that Z-MAP Plus can locate the macro you want to run:
Select File Directory Paths in the Z-MAP Plus window. In the
Directory Paths dialog box that appears, display the Macros tab.
Make sure one of the Directory Input Paths names the directory
that contains the macro. The Z-MAP Macro Library contains all
the macros supplied with Z-MAP Plus. Its location is usually
determined at installation. If you do not know the location, consult
your system manager.
2. You can select many Z-MAP Plus macros from the Macros menu.
R2003.12.0 Running a Macro in Z-MAP Plus: Running Macros 618

3. Once you select a macro, its name appears in the status area. If a
macro abstract is available, it scrolls by in the Z-MAP Plus System
Window, and an Execute Macro dialog box appears. The abstract
typically provides a summary of the macros purpose, a list of
input requirements and options, and output results.
4. In the Execute Macro dialog box, click the Fill in Macro
Parameter Defaults button.
The author of a macro can override standard ZCL parameter

defaults when writing the macro. If you click Fill in Macro
Parameter Defaults, you use the authors default values. You can
view the default values as you work through the macros parameter
windows. If you do not click Fill in Macro Parameter Defaults,
the macro uses standard ZCL defaults for the macros processes.
ZCL Default Value Does Not Appear in the Macro Dialog Box
ZCL default values do not appear in macro dialog boxes. However, they
are still used if the macro user does not provide a value for a
user-controlled macro parameter.
Next, click View Parameter Panels, Change/Assign Parameter

Values to view and respond to all prompts and panels for the
macro.
Prompts for an input file or field appear in the status area as a
selection list window appears. Making a selection saves the
selection, closes the list window, and continues the macro.
Other prompts (and default values) appear in parameter entry
dialog boxes. Enter or select values. Click OK to save the
settings, close the window, and continue the macro.

Once you respond to all prompts, no more dialog boxes appear.

To execute the macro, click Apply in the Execute Macro dialog
box. The Z-MAP Plus System Window displays the macro abstract
(if one is available), the ZCL error-checking report, and the ZCL
processing report.
When the macro is completed, the following words and the
macros abstract appear in the system window:
** NORMAL TERMINATION **
Click Save to close the Execute Macro dialog box and return to the
Z-MAP Plus window.
If you run a macro in Z-MAP Plus, the ZCL command file
TEMPMACRO.ZCL is written to your Z-MAP Plus project
directory. This file records all user-specified macro parameters and
their values. This file is overwritten every time you run a macro.

Running a Macro from ZCL

You call a macro from a ZCL command stream exactly as if it were a
ZCL process, using all of the same ZCL syntax rules. The macro name
is substituted for the ZCL process name (described in the ZCL
Operators Manual). The macro name is followed by macro parameter
and value pairsthe parameters defined in the macros Parameter
Definition Records section.
The following example shows the appearance of a ZCL command file
that calls the example macro UNITTHICKNESS.ZCLMAC and
specifies values for four macro parameters:
C ZCL to run default macro
C
C Attach MFDs
C
MFDS: NUMMFDS=1, MFD1=TEST.MFD /
C
UNITTHICKNESS: TOP = STRATTOP,
BASE = STRATBASE,
ISOPACH= ISOPACH GRID,
MFDOUT= 1 /
STOP: /
An all defaults call of the macro might look like the following example:
MFDS: NUMMFDS=1, MFD1=TEST.MFD /
C
BASE = STRATBASE,
STOP: /
In both macro calls, the parameters TOP and BASE are specified
because they are required parameters (preceded by * when defined).
ZCL reports an error if these values are omitted.
A macro call can also be generated from the ZCL command stream
TEMPMACRO.ZCL written to your home directory when you execute
the macro in Z-MAP Plus. This file contains all user-specified macro
parameter values. Macro parameters that use default values are not
written.
R2003.12.0 Running a Macro from ZCL: Running Macros 621

For example, the file generated by running the macro

GRIDANDMAPX.ZCLMAC might read:
GRIDANDMAPX :10,00
ZGF =./REEF.ZGF,
OLDZGF =OLD,
PIC =Grid and Map Macro,
WELLS =REEF DATA,
MFD1 = 1 ,
WELLFILD = 3 ,
MFDFAL = 0 ,
INTERVAL = 100.00000 ,
/
STOP:55,00 /
Note that the MFDS process would have to be added at the top of this
ZCL command stream before it could be used to call the macro
GRIDANDMAPX. This is because this command stream was built
from running the macro in Z-MAP Plus, and since MFDs were attached
prior to running the macro, the MFDS process does not appear here.
R2003.12.0 Running a Macro from ZCL: Running Macros 622

Creating a Macro
Overview
A macro is a set of Z-MAP Command Language (ZCL) process
commands that are packaged together and are called and executed as a
group, either by Z-MAP Plus or by a ZCL command stream.
Z-MAP Plus includes over 70 macros that are supplied by Landmark.
You can also write custom macros and store them for later use by
yourself and others.
Macros are often used to package procedures, making difficult
procedures easier to execute for the novice user. Packaging procedures
is also an excellent way to document a workflow and is useful for
storing a complex workflow you may need to duplicate later.
Since macros have access to all ZCL functionality, you can also use
them to access ZCL functions that are not yet available through the
current Z-MAP Plus interface.
Macros you execute from Z-MAP Plus are called Z-MAP Plus macros,
while those you execute from a ZCL command stream are called ZCL
macros. The structure of these two types of macros is slightly different
and is covered later in this section. You can run Z-MAP Plus macros as
ZCL macros, but you cannot run ZCL macros from Z-MAP Plus.
Z-MAP Plus macros can also be classified as either user-supplied or
Landmark-supplied.
Macros, like ZCL command streams, consist of ASCII text. The first
step in building a macro is to build the ZCL command stream with the
functions you want the macro to perform. You can write the ZCL
command stream with a standard text editor or by using the
Z-MAP Plus Process Logging function. The basic form of the macro is
discussed in the section Macro Structure starting on page 649.
This section covers these topics:
Creating a log file with Z-MAP Plus Tools Process Logging
Creating a macro from a ZCL command stream or Z-MAP Plus
log file
Common errors in user-created macros
Storing macros for use by Z-MAP Plus or ZCL
R2003.12.0 Overview 623

The following macro, UNITTHICKNESS.ZCLMAC, illustrates the parts

of a macro.
Macro Name Record
(required) MACRO NAME = UNITTHICKNESS
!
Comment (optional) *TOP, INPUT, GRID / Top of Interval
MFDTOP, MFDNUM, 1, 0, 0, 5 / MFD for Top of
Interval Grid
Macro Parameter
Definition Records *BASE, INPUT, GRID / Base of Interval
(required) MFDBASE, MFDNUM, 1, 0, 0, 5 / MFD for Base of
Interval Grid
ISOPACH, OUTPUT, GRID, Isopach Grid / Output Isopach Grid
MFDOUT, MFDNUM, 1, 1, 0, 5 / MFD for Output Isopach
Grid
!
END PARAMETERS
!
BEGIN ABSTRACT
Abstract (optional) This macro computes stratigraphic thickness (isopach) for an

good for interval defined by top and base grids. It uses the top
documentation grid
to determine local dip for trigonometric conversion from
vertical
thickness to isopach.
INPUT
-Top of interval (required)
-Base of interval(required)
-Output grid name (defaults to Isopach Grid)
OUTPUT
Prompts (optional) -A stratigraphic thickness grid for the interval
required for
Z-MAP Plus END ABSTRACT
execution. !
Prompts must be in BEGIN PROMPTS
the same order as the !
parameters!
TOP, Select a top grid for the unit
MFDTOP, MFD for the top grid
BASE, Select a base grid for the unit
MFDBASE, MFD for the base grid
ISOPACH, Input a name for Isopach grid
MFDOUT, MFD for output grid
!
END PROMPTS
R2003.12.0 Overview: Creating a Macro 624

!
SINGLEGRIDOPS:001,000
OPNAME = DIPMAG, ! hard-wired
GRIDIN = &TOP, ! user
controlled
GRIDOUT = DIP MAG GRID, ! hard-wired
MFDOUT = 0, ! hard-wired
MFDIN = &MFDTOP, ! user-
controlled
/
C
OPNAME = ATAN, ! hard-wired
GRIDIN = DIP MAG GRID, ! hard-wired
GRIDOUT = DIP GRID, ! hard-wired
/
C
Core
OPNAME = COS, ! hard-wired
ZCL Commands
GRIDIN = DIP GRID, ! hard-wired
(required) GRIDOUT = COS DIP GRID, ! hard-wired
/
C
DUALGRIDOPS:001,000
OPNAME = SUBTRACT, ! hard-wired
GRIDIN1 = &TOP, ! user-
controlled
GRIDIN2 = &BASE, ! user-
controlled
GRIDOUT = VERT THICK GRID, ! hard-wired
MFDIN1 = &MFDTOP, ! user-
controlled
MFDIN2 = &MFDBASE, ! user-
controlled
/
C
DUALGRIDOPS:002,000
OPNAME = MULTIPLY, ! hard-wired
Macro End Record GRIDIN1 = VERT THICK GRID, ! hard-wired
(required) GRIDIN2 = COS DIP GRID, ! hard-wired
GRIDOUT = &ISOPACH, ! user-
controlled
MFDOUT = &MFDOUT, ! user-
controlled
/
C
MACRO END: /
Example Macro UNITTHICKNESS.ZCLMAC
R2003.12.0 Overview: Creating a Macro 625

Creating a Log File with Z-MAP Plus

A Z-MAP Plus log file records the ZCL process commands for all
functions you execute in Z-MAP Plus while Process Logging is active.
This log file contains a ZCL command stream, so it can be used as the
ZCL commands core of a macro.
1. Test the macro workflow in Z-MAP Plus.
2. Make sure appropriate MFDs are attached.
3. Select Tools Process Logging.
4. When the Process Logging dialog box appears, click the Logging
Option button and select Begin Logging from the drop-down list.
Enter a file name for the log file, using the default extension .LOG,
as seen in the following example.
Click OK to close the Process Logging dialog box and begin

recording the log file.
5. Z-MAP Plus records every action you make until you terminate
logging. Carry out the processes you want in the macro.
Executing a Macro While Process Logging Not Recommended

If you record the execution of a macro, the log file contains the macro call,
macro parameter values, and the ZCL process calls the macro makes. This
requires extra editing.
6. When you finish recording the workflow, turn off the Process
Logger. Select Tools Process Logging, then select Terminate
Logging from the Logging Option popup menu. Click OK to close
the dialog box and stop logging.
The .LOG file now consists of ZCL process commands that will form
the core ZCL for your macro. (See Creating Macros on page 627.)
R2003.12.0 Creating a Log File with Z-MAP Plus: Creating a Macro 626
Creating Macros
This section gives you a step-by-step procedure to create a macro from
core ZCL commands. Everyone develops their own approach and style
for building ZCL macros. However, if you are just starting, it is helpful
to know the basic steps in the process. The basic procedure is:
Create the core ZCL process commands using a text editor or
Z-MAP Plus Process Logging.
Naming Macros
You must save the file you create in the text editor or through Process
Logging with a .ZCLMAC extension after the file name. For the program to
recognize files as macros, they must have this extension.
Test and debug the ZCL command file.

Convert the core ZCL command stream to an all defaults macro.
When you create the all defaults macro, the first thing you are
prompted to do is fill in the name of the macro. This name must
exactly match the file name you assigned in the first step without
the .ZCLMAC extension. For example, the macro name might be
SURFCORRECT while the file that contains the macro is named
SURFCORRECT.ZCLMAC.
Test the default macro.
Identify parameters within the ZCL command file that should be
a) user controlled, b) hard-wired by you, or c) allowed to default.
Delete from the ZCL command stream ZCL parameters that you
want to default. Set those parameters that you want hard-wired to
your own values.
Select ZCL parameter values that will be user-controlled and
replace with macro parameters.
Build the Parameter Definition section of the macro.
Add an abstract section to the macro (optional).
Add a prompts section to the macro.
Test the macro.
R2003.12.0 Creating Macros: Creating a Macro 627

Steps for Creating a Macro

1. Create a ZCL Command Stream containing processes that together
carry out the function of the macro. This is the core of the macro.
Z-MAP Plus users can use Process Logging to complete this step;
as described in Creating a Log File with Z-MAP Plus on
page 626.
Example of a ZCL command stream created with Process
Logging:
C
MFDS:
NUMMFDS = 1,
MFD1 = BASIN2.MFD,
/
C
OPNAME = DIPMAG,
GRIDIN = UPPER TOP,
GRIDOUT = DIP MAG GRID,
MFDOUT = 0,
MFDIN = 1,
MFDFAULT = 0,
ZNON = 0.10000000E+31,
/
C
OPNAME = ATAN,
GRIDIN = DIP MAG GRID,
GRIDOUT = DIP GRID,
MFDOUT = 0,
MFDIN = 0,
MFDFAULT = 0,
ZNON = 0.10000000E+31,
/
C
OPNAME = COS,
GRIDIN = DIP GRID,
GRIDOUT = COS DIP GRID,
MFDOUT = 0,
MFDIN = 0,
MFDFAULT = 0,
ZNON = 0.10000000E+31,
/
C

DUALGRIDOPS:001,000
OPNAME = SUBTRACT,
GRIDIN1 = UPPER TOP,
GRIDIN2 = UPPER BASE,
GRIDOUT = VERT THICK GRID,
MFDOUT = 0,
MFDIN1 = 1,
MFDIN2 = 1,
ZNON = 0.10000000E+31,
AOISRCE = GRIDIN1,
XINCSRCE = GRIDIN1,
YINCSRCE = GRIDIN1,
XINC = 2000.0000 ,
YINC = 2000.0000 ,
/
C
DUALGRIDOPS:002,000
OPNAME = MULTIPLY,
GRIDIN1 = VERT THICK GRID,
GRIDIN2 = COS DIP GRID,
GRIDOUT = STRAT THICK GRID,
MFDOUT = 1,
MFDIN1 = 0,
MFDIN2 = 0,
ZNON = 0.10000000E+31,
AOISRCE = GRIDIN1,
XINCSRCE = GRIDIN1,
YINCSRCE = GRIDIN1,
XINC = 2000.0000 ,
YINC = 2000.0000 ,
/
C
STOP: /
Adding ZCL Processes to the Log File

The MFDS and STOP processes were added to the ZCL command stream
in the log file because they are needed for the next step (testing the macro)
and Process Logging did not add them.
2. Test and debug the ZCL command file.

Use the ZCL program to execute the ZCL command file. Since our
example command stream was written using Process Logging, it
does not contain errors unless they have been incorrectly edited
into the file. However, a ZCL command stream written with a text
editor often contains syntax errors and must be debugged.

3. Convert the ZCL Command Stream to an All Defaults Macro.

Rename the command file (or the edited log file created by
Z-MAP Plus Process Logging) as MACRONAME.ZCLMAC
where MACRONAME is a maximum of 16 characters long and
contains no blanks, numbers, or underbars. The file name must
match the name of the text file you created in step 1.
Open the file in a text editor such as vi.
Remove the STOP process from the core ZCL command
stream, as well as any other ZCL processes that will be
executed before the macros is run, such as the MFDS process.
All other processes remain.
MFDS Process in Macro ZCL Commands

If a macro run in Z-MAP Plus contains an MFDS process in the ZCL
commands, the scratch MFD is re-initialized, erasing all temporary
files. To avoid this possible loss of data, it is best to always remove any
MFDS process from a ZCL command stream used as the core of a
macro. MFDs should be attached before the macro is executed.
At the top of the command stream, add the MACRO NAME

record, using the same name as you gave the file when you
renamed it. Macro names have no extensions and can be up to
16 characters long. They cannot contain numbers, blanks or
underbars. For additional information, see Macro Name
Record on page 652.
Immediately following the macro name, add the END
PARAMETERS record.
At the bottom of the ZCL processes, add the MACRO END
process command.
The macro should now work when called, but does not allow you
to specify any parameter values. See the example on the following
page.

Example of initial conversion of a ZCL command stream to an all

defaults macro:
MACRO NAME = UNITTHICKNESS
END PARAMETERS
!
! The ZCL core of the Macro follows
!
!
! Note that the MFDS process has been removed. Z-Map Plus
! will already have the MFDs attached when the macro is
run.
!
OPNAME = DIPMAG,
GRIDIN = UPPER TOP,
GRIDOUT = DIP MAG GRID,
MFDOUT = 0,
MFDIN = 1,
MFDFAULT = 0,
ZNON = 0.10000000E+31,
/
C
OPNAME = ATAN,
GRIDIN = DIP MAG GRID,
GRIDOUT = DIP GRID,
MFDOUT = 0,
MFDIN = 0,
MFDFAULT = 0,
ZNON = 0.10000000E+31,
/
C
OPNAME = COS,
GRIDIN = DIP GRID,
GRIDOUT = COS DIP GRID,
MFDOUT = 0,
MFDIN = 0,
MFDFAULT = 0,
ZNON = 0.10000000E+31,
/

C
DUALGRIDOPS:001,000
OPNAME = SUBTRACT,
GRIDIN1 = UPPER TOP,
GRIDIN2 = UPPER BASE,
GRIDOUT = VERT THICK GRID,
MFDOUT = 0,
MFDIN1 = 1,
MFDIN2 = 1,
ZNON = 0.10000000E+31,
AOISRCE = GRIDIN1,
XINCSRCE = GRIDIN1,
YINCSRCE = GRIDIN1,
XINC = 2000.0000 ,
YINC = 2000.0000 ,
/
C
DUALGRIDOPS:002,000
OPNAME = MULTIPLY,
GRIDIN1 = VERT THICK GRID,
GRIDIN2 = COS DIP GRID,
GRIDOUT = STRAT THICK GRID,
MFDOUT = 1,
MFDIN1 = 0,
MFDIN2 = 0,
ZNON = 0.10000000E+31,
AOISRCE = GRIDIN1,
XINCSRCE = GRIDIN1,
YINCSRCE = GRIDIN1,
XINC = 2000.0000 ,
YINC = 2000.0000 ,
/
C
!
! Note that the STOP process has been removed
! and the MACRO END process has been added.
!
MACRO END: /
4. Test the all defaults macro.

You can test the macro by running it from Z-MAP Plus (as
described in Running a Macro in Z-MAP Plus on page 618), or
call it from a ZCL command stream (as described in Running a
Macro from ZCL on page 621). It is a default macro in either
case, so it has no user-defined parameters.

The ZCL command stream used to test the macro might look like
this:
C Attach MFDs
C
MFDS: NUMMFDS=1, MFD1=TEST.MFD/
C
C Call the macro
C
UNITTHICKNESS: /
C
STOP: /
5. Identify parameters within the ZCL command stream that should

be a) user controlled, b) hard-wired by you, or c) allowed to
default. A good way to do this is to print the default macro and
then use a highlighter or pen to mark up the hard copy of the
macro.
User-controlled parameters are those the user needs to control,
such as input files, output file names, and basic parameters such
as contour interval, for example. This is a difficult and
subjective step; you must put yourself in the place of the macro
users and try to decide what they need to have control over.
User Control of Associated Parameters

When input or output file parameters are to be user-controlled, the
associated MFDIN and MFDOUT parameters must also be user-
controlled. Similarly, if the user-controlled parameter is a FIELD type
parameter, then it follows that the input file and input MFD parameters
must also be user-controlled.
Hard-wired parameter values are those that you do not want the
user to have control over, but that you also do not want to
default. These are generally not parameter values whose
defaults are data-dependent, since hard-wired values do not
change with new input data.
Parameters that you want to allow to default to ZCLs defaults
are those parameters that the user does not need control over.
These are often parameter values whose defaults are data-
dependent. Or they may be parameter values whose defaults are
not data-dependent, but are satisfactory. Most parameter values
in your macro will fall into this category.

Each parameter/value pair in the example below is marked as

either user-controlled, remove, or hard-wired:
END PARAMETERS
!
GRIDIN = UPPER TOP, ! user controlled
MFDIN = 1, ! user-controlled
MFDFAULT = 0, ! remove-ZCL default
ZNON = 0.10000000E+31, ! remove-ZCL default
/
C
MFDIN = 0, ! remove-ZCL default
/
C
GRIDOUT = COS DIP GRID, ! hard-wired
MFDIN = 0, ! remove-ZCL default
/

C
DUALGRIDOPS:001,000
GRIDIN1 = UPPER TOP, ! user-controlled
GRIDIN2 = UPPER BASE, ! user-controlled
MFDIN1 = 1, ! user-controlled
MFDIN2 = 1, ! user-controlled
AOISRCE = GRIDIN1, ! remove-ZCL default
XINCSRCE = GRIDIN1, ! remove-ZCL default
YINCSRCE = GRIDIN1, ! remove-ZCL default
XINC = 2000.0000 , ! remove-ZCL default
YINC = 2000.0000 , ! remove-ZCL default
/
C
DUALGRIDOPS:002,000
GRIDIN1 = VERT THICK GRID, ! hard-wired
GRIDIN2 = COS DIP GRID, ! hard-wired
GRIDOUT = STRAT THICK GRID, ! user-controlled
MFDOUT = 1, ! user-controlled
MFDIN1 = 0, ! remove-ZCL default
MFDIN2 = 0, ! remove-ZCL default
AOISRCE = GRIDIN1, ! remove-ZCL default
XINCSRCE = GRIDIN1, ! remove-ZCL default
YINCSRCE = GRIDIN1, ! remove-ZCL default
XINC = 2000.0000 , ! remove-ZCL default
YINC = 2000.0000 , ! remove-ZCL default
/
C
MACRO END: /

6. Delete ZCL parameter/value pairs whose values you want to

default. Set those parameter values that you want hard-wired to
your own values.
END PARAMETERS
!
GRIDIN = UPPER TOP, ! user
controlled
MFDIN = 1, ! user-
controlled
/
C
/
C
/

C
DUALGRIDOPS:001,000
GRIDIN1 = UPPER TOP, ! user-
controlled
GRIDIN2 = UPPER BASE, ! user-
controlled
MFDIN1 = 1, ! user-
controlled
MFDIN2 = 1, ! user-
controlled
/
C
DUALGRIDOPS:002,000
GRIDOUT = STRAT THICK GRID, ! user-
controlled
MFDOUT = 1, ! user-
controlled
/
C
MACRO END: /

7. Select ZCL parameter values that will be user-controlled and

replace with macro parameters. Replace each identified parameter
value with an ampersand (&) followed by a logical macro
parameter name of up to eight characters. Do not place quotes
around the new string. If the parameter is an input or output
parameter, then the input or output MFD parameter must also be
included as a user-controlled parameter. The UNITTHICKNESS
macro would now look like this:
END PARAMETERS
!
controlled
controlled
/
C
/

C
/
C
DUALGRIDOPS:001,000
controlled
controlled
controlled
controlled
/
C
DUALGRIDOPS:002,000
controlled
controlled
/
C
MACRO END: /
8. Build the Parameter Definition section of the macro.

Between the MACRO NAME record and the
END PARAMETERS record, insert each macro parameter
name assigned in the previous step on a new line.
Using commas as separators and spaces for alignment, add
other terms for defining each macro parameter; see Parameter
Definition Records on page 652 for specifics.
Place an asterisk (*) in front of the name of each required
parameter. For more information, see Required Parameter
Flag on page 657.
Following the record terminator (/) you can write any descriptive
information you like. These comments are ignored when
executing.

The UNITTHICKNESS macro would now look like this:

*TOP, INPUT, GRID / Top of Interval
MFDTOP, MFDNUM, 1, 0, 0, 5 / MFD for Top of Interval Grid
*BASE, INPUT, GRID / Base of Interval
MFDBASE, MFDNUM, 1, 0, 0, 5 / MFD for Base of Interval
Grid
MFDOUT, MFDNUM, 1, 1, 0, 5 / MFD for Output Isopach Grid
END PARAMETERS
!
GRIDIN = &TOP, ! user controlled
MFDIN = &MFDTOP, ! user-controlled
/
C
/
C
/

C
DUALGRIDOPS:001,000
GRIDIN1 = &TOP, ! user-controlled
GRIDIN2 = &BASE, ! user-controlled
MFDIN1 = &MFDTOP, ! user-controlled
MFDIN2 = &MFDBASE, ! user-controlled
/
C
DUALGRIDOPS:002,000
GRIDOUT = &ISOPACH, ! user-controlled
MFDOUT = &MFDOUT, ! user-controlled
/
C
MACRO END: /

9. Add an optional abstract between the end parameters record and

the ZCL commands. (For details, see Abstract on page 663.)
The abstract is useful for documentation, and appears if you run
the macro in Z-MAP Plus.
!
MFDBASE, MFDNUM, 1, 0, 0, 5 / MFD for Base of Interval
Grid
!
END PARAMETERS
!
BEGIN ABSTRACT
This macro computes stratigraphic thickness (isopach) for an

interval defined by top and base grids. It uses the top grid
to determine local dip for trigonometric conversion from vertical
INPUT
OUTPUT
-A stratigraphic thickness grid for the interval
END ABSTRACT
!

/
C
/
C
/
C
DUALGRIDOPS:001,000
GRIDIN1 = &TOP, ! user-controlled
GRIDIN2 = &BASE, ! user-controlled
MFDIN1 = &MFDTOP, ! user-controlled
MFDIN2 = &MFDBASE, ! user-controlled
/
C
DUALGRIDOPS:002,000
GRIDOUT = &ISOPACH, ! user-controlled
MFDOUT = &MFDOUT, ! user-controlled
/
C
MACRO END: /

10. Add a Prompts section to the macro if you have user-controlled

parameters. The prompts section is not used if the macro is run
using a ZCL call. However, it is required if the macro is run within
Z-MAP Plus. See Abstract on page 663 for specifics.
Prompt Order
Prompts must be listed in the same order as the parameters.

!
MFDBASE, MFDNUM, 1, 0, 0, 5 / MFD for Base of Interval Grid
!
END PARAMETERS
!
BEGIN ABSTRACT
This macro computes stratigraphic thickness (isopach) for an

interval defined by top and base grids. It uses the top grid
to determine local dip for trigonometric conversion from vertical
INPUT
OUTPUT
-A stratigraphic thickness grid for the interval
END ABSTRACT
!
BEGIN PROMPTS
!
!
END PROMPTS
!

/
C
/
C

/
C
MACRO END: /
Placement of Prompts for Associated Parameters

The MFDNUM parameter prompt must immediately follow the associated
INPUT or OUTPUT parameter prompt.
The FIELD parameter prompt must immediately follow the associated
INPUT or OUTPUT and MFDNUM parameter prompts.
11. Test the macro again. Follow the procedure in step 4 on page 632.
This time supply parameter values for user-controlled parameters.
If you test the macro in Z-MAP Plus, you are prompted for the
parameter values. If you test the macro in ZCL, include parameter/
value pairs for user-controlled parameters as shown in the
following example:
C Attach MFDs
C
MFDS: NUMMFDS=1, MFD1=TEST.MFD/
C
C Call the macro
BASE = STRATBASE,
ISOPACH= ISOPACH GRID,
MFDOUT = 1 /
C
STOP: /

Common User Errors

If the macro does not execute, edit the macro at the system level,
checking the file for errors reported. Common errors when writing a
macro include:
missing master file prompt for input member file

misspellings
missing commas, colons, quotes or equals signs
missing terminators
wrong use of case: upper or lower
files created by the macro already exist
R2003.12.0 Common User Errors: Creating a Macro 646

Storing and Gaining Access to Macros

Once a macro is built, you must make it accessible to the application.
Z-MAP Plus access is a simple as specifying the directory path to the
macro. ZCL access depends on your hardware system.
Z-MAP Plus Access

Z-MAP Plus lists the macros located in the directory paths specified for
macros. To specify search paths for macros, select Files Directory
Paths in the Z-MAP Plus window. In the Directory Paths dialog box
that appears, use the Macro tab to set the path for the Z-MAP Macro
Library (the macros provided with Z-MAP Plus) and up to four other
directories for user-supplied macros.
R2003.12.0 Storing and Gaining Access to Macros: Creating a Macro 647

ZCL Storage and Access

The location and manner of storing macros for ZCL depends on the
type of hardware system you use. The method you use for starting ZCL
affects the way you define the disk location of your macros.
Using the Z-MAP Plus Command Menu

If you are running OpenWorks concurrently with Z-MAP Plus, select
Applications Z-MAP Plus / PowerView from the OpenWorks
Command Menu.

The Z-MAP Plus Command Menu appears. Select Applications

ZCL.
The ZCL window appears:
In the Macros Directory box, enter the absolute path for the disk
location of your macros. In this example, an absolute path location for
Landmark-supplied macros is shown. You can access your own user-
supplied macro by entering the correct absolute path in this field.

Using the RZCL Script

If you are not running in the OpenWorks environment or if your system
administrator has set up your account to run ZCL from the ASCII
interface, you will run the RZCL script. You are prompted to enter the
name of the ZCL command file:
Enter the name of the command file
At this prompt, enter the name of the file that contains the ZCL
command stream that calls your macro. You will not be prompted for
the macros directory path. The RZCL script uses the Unix
environmental variable MACUNIT to identify the disk location of a
macro. This variable is set in the RZCL script to default to your current
working directory (for example, ./). If your macro resides in a directory
other than your current working directory, you can do one of the
following:
Copy the macro to your current working directory.
Remove the line from RZCL script that sets MACUNIT. Use the
Unix command setenv to manually set MACUNIT as follows:
setenv MACUNIT absolute directory path

Macro Structure
Overview
This section discusses the different parts of a macro and how a macro is
structured. If you plan to create your own Z-MAP Plus or ZCL macros,
read this section.
The major parts of a macro are summarized below. Each of these parts
is described in detail in the discussion that follows, with special
attention to the terms of the parameter definition record.
Macro name record Required

Parameter definition records Optional
END PARAMETERS Required
Abstract: BEGIN ABSTRACT Optional
Abstract (macro description) records
END ABSTRACT
Prompts: BEGIN PROMPTS Optional
Parameter prompt records
END PROMPTS
ZCL commands Required
MACRO END: / Required
A parameter definition record, abstract record, or ZCL command can

begin in any column. Spaces can be used to align text for easier
reading. All other records start in column 1.
ZCL Reminders
All macro names, parameter names, parameter types, and file types are in
capital letters. Abstracts and prompts may contain lower case letters.
No single record in a macro can exceed 80 characters in length.
Do not use the <Tab> key to align text in a macro; use spaces.
All parameter definition records and ZCL command calls must end with a
record terminator (/). Text that follows the / in the parameter definition record
is comment text.
R2003.12.0 Overview 649

The following example shows the UNITTHICKNESS.ZCLMAC macro.

Macro Name Record
(required) MACRO NAME = UNITTHICKNESS
!
Comment (optional) *TOP, INPUT, GRID / Top of Interval
MFDTOP, MFDNUM, 1, 0, 0, 5 / MFD for Top of
Interval Grid
Macro Parameter
Definition Records *BASE, INPUT, GRID / Base of Interval
(required) MFDBASE, MFDNUM, 1, 0, 0, 5 / MFD for Base of
Interval Grid
MFDOUT, MFDNUM, 1, 1, 0, 5 / MFD for Output Isopach
Grid
!
END PARAMETERS
!
BEGIN ABSTRACT
Abstract (optional) This macro computes stratigraphic thickness (isopach) for an

good for interval defined by top and base grids. It uses the top
documentation grid
to determine local dip for trigonometric conversion from
vertical
INPUT
OUTPUT
Prompts (optional) -A stratigraphic thickness grid for the interval
required for
Z-MAP Plus END ABSTRACT
execution !
BEGIN PROMPTS
!
!
END PROMPTS
R2003.12.0 Overview: Macro Structure 650

!
controlled
controlled
/
C
/
C
Core OPNAME = COS, ! hard-wired
ZCL Commands GRIDIN = DIP GRID, ! hard-wired
(required) GRIDOUT = COS DIP GRID, ! hard-wired
/
C
DUALGRIDOPS:001,000
controlled
controlled
controlled
controlled
/
C
DUALGRIDOPS:002,000
controlled
controlled
/
Macro End Record C
(required) MACRO END: /
Example Macro UNITTHICKNESS.ZCLMAC
R2003.12.0 Overview: Macro Structure 651

Parts of a Macro
Macro Name Record

The macro name record must be the first record in the macro. The
macro name record has one of the following forms:
MACRO NAME = DESIRED-MACRO-NAME
MACRO = DESIRED-MACRO-NAME
The macro name does not have an extension like its file name. It can be
a maximum of 16 characters long and can contain no spaces, numbers,
or underbars. The macro name appears in the Z-MAP Plus status area
while the macro runs. As the macro runs, the Z-MAP Plus System
Window displays more details about the macro.
Parameter Definition Records

Parameter Definition records list user-controlled parameters for the
macro and define the following for each parameter:
file types that will be included in list windows that the user sees
when running the macro
error checking parameters and valid data ranges or options for
user-controlled parameters
default values for the user-controlled parameters
The elements of a Parameter Definition record vary depending on the
parameter type. All Parameter Definition records list the actual
parameter name first, followed by the parameter type. Following is a
list of the possible elements contained in a Parameter Definition
Record, a series of tables to illustrate different Parameter Types, and a
detailed description of each possible element.
R2003.12.0 Parts of a Macro: Macro Structure 652

Possible Elements of a Parameter Definition Record
Element When Required
Required flag (*) Optional

Parameter name Required
Parameter type Required
COLOR or FONT Required for color or font widget
File type Required for parameter types INPUT and
OUTPUT
Field type Required for parameter type FIELD
Maximum length Required for parameter types ETEXT and
STRING
Precision value Required for numeric parameters
Default value Optional
Range Required for ETEXT, MFDNUM, color widget
Terminator (/) Required
Comments Optional
Options Required for ETEXT

Example Macro Parameter Definition Records
Parameter Parameter Default File

Flags ZIMS File Type / Comments
Name Type Name
* GRIDOUT , OUTPUT , GRID /

FILEOUT , OUTPUT , CNTR /
RESULTS , OUTPUT , DATA /
* TOPICT , OUTPUT , PICTNAME /
TOZGF , OUTPUT , PICTFILE /
* FILEOUT , OUTPUT , ALL /
FAULTOUT , OUTPUT , FALT FAULT1 /
* DATAOUT1 , OUTPUT , NOTGRID /
* DATAOUT , OUTPUT , DATA+CNTR+FALT+VERT+SSEC /
CONGRID , INPUT , GRID /
* DATAIN , INPUT , DATA /
FAULTS , INPUT , FALT /
* FILEIN , INPUT , GRID+CNTR /
* MFD1 , INPUT , MFDFILE /
VERTICES , INPUT , VERT V-FILE /
* ZGFNAME , INPUT , PICTFILE /
* PICTURE , INPUT , PICTNAME /
AOIFILE , INPUT , GRID+DATA /
VERTICES , INPUT , VERT+FALT /
* DATAIN , INPUT , TEXT /
* DATAIN , INPUT , DATA+CNTR+FALT+VERT+DWEL /
PICTFILE and PICTNAME

PICTFILE and PICTNAME are not ZIMS member file types. PICTFILE is a
ZGF name, and PICTNAME is a picture name on a ZGF.

Parameter Parameter No. of Words

Flags Default, Min, Max
Name Type (4 Bytes)
MFDOUT , MFDNUM , 1, 1, 0, 5
MFDIN , MFDNUM , 1, 0, 0, 5
MFDGRID , MFDNUM , 1, 1, 0, 5
MFDFAULT , MFDNUM , 1 0, 0, 5
* HOWMANY , INTEGER , 1
* DATASIZE , INTEGER , 1
USE , INTEGER , 1, 0
NCONTOUR , INTEGER , 1, 0
* NUMMFDS , INTEGER , 1, 0
LINECOLR , INTEGER , COLOR
XMIN , REAL , 1
ZNON , REAL , 1, 1.E30
XEXPAND , REAL , 1, 0.0
ZMIN , REAL , 1, -1.E30
SMOOTH , REAL , 1, 0.2, 0.0, 1.0
MFDIN & MFDOUT Special Rules

All inputs that call data from an MFD must be followed by MFDIN.
All outputs that create a file to be saved in an MFD should be followed by
MFDOUT.
Parameter Parameter
Flags Field Type Comments...
Name Type
INFLD , FIELD , 3, /
* INFLD , FIELD , REAL /

INFLD , FIELD , ALL /

LINEYFLD , FIELD , ALL /
LINELFLD , FIELD , CHAR /
TEXTFLD , FIELD , CHAR /
OXFLD , FIELD , 4 /
LINXFLD , FIELD , 1 /
Parameter Parameter Number of Default,

Flags
Name Type Characters Min, Max
NAME , STRING , 4 /
LUN2 , STRING , 20 /
* VALUE1 , STRING , 80 /
* RELATION , STRING , 4 /
HEADER , STRING , 80 /
POSITION , STRING , 6, CENTER /
Number of
Parameter Parameter Default,
Flags Characters (n
Name Type Min, Max
x4)
DATATYPE , ETEXT , 4 , ,1,6 /
DATA
FALT
VERT
TEXT
SSEC
XSEC
* DISCONTN , ETEXT , 4, 1,1,2 /
YES
NO
COORDSYS , ETEXT , 16, 1,1,3 /
DMS
DECIMAL
DEGREES
GRADS

Detailed Descriptions of Parameter Definition Elements

The elements of a parameter definition record, except the required flag,
are separated by commas. Quotes are not used around text strings. Text
that follows the record terminator is considered comment text.
Required Parameter Flag

Parameters that are required are denoted by preceding the parameter
name with an asterisk (*). A parameter that is required for the ZCL
process should be a required parameter in the macro unless a default is
specified in the parameter definition record. Default values for required
parameters are ignored.
Parameter Name
Parameter names may have up to eight characters. Do not use blanks in
the parameter name on the parameter definition record. However,
parameter names in ZCL command records may contain blanks.
Parameter Type
There are eight types of parameter definition records:
INPUT REAL
OUTPUT INTEGER
MFDNUM STRING
FIELD ETEXT
While the different types of parameter definition records are similar in
structure, each invokes a unique response in ZCL, and the meanings of
some of the term locations vary.

Table 1: Parameter Definition Types and Their Terms

Type Example and Description
INPUT * FILEIN , INPUT , DATA+VERT+FALT+XSEC+SSEC+WLOG+DWEL+CNTR /
Use INPUT for selecting an input member file. The next record must be an MFDNUM record so
that ZCL can search all attached MFDs. Z-MAP Plus lists all available member files of the
specified file type. In ZCL, the user types in the member file name. For a list of File Types, see
Appendix B, File and Field Codes.
OUTPUT * VERTOUT , OUTPUT , VERT,PROFILE VERT 11111 /

Use OUTPUT to create an output member file of the file type specified. The next record must be
an MFDNUM record. For a list of File Types, see Appendix B, File and Field Codes.
MFDNU MFDIN , MFDNUM , 1, 0, 0, 5 /

M MFDFOUT , MFDNUM , 1, 1, 0, 5 /
MFDNUM is a special type of parameter definition record; its meaning depends on whether it
follows an INPUT record (first example) or an OUTPUT record (second example). When
MFDNUM follows an INPUT record, the default value is zero, which tells ZCL to search all
attached MFDs for the specified input file; Z-MAP Plus generates a selection list. When
MFDNUM follows an OUTPUT record, Z-MAP Plus creates a popup menu of the attached MFDs
in the same order that they appear in the status area; the default value refers to the MFD in that
position, with zero representing the scratch file.
In either case, use single precision and range extremes of 0 and 5.
FIELD * ZFLD , FIELD , 3 /
Use FIELD for selecting an input field or creating an output field of the specified field type,
Z VALUE in this example. For input field, Z-MAP Plus lists all fields of the appropriate field type
on the selected input file. For a list of Field Type numbers, see Appendix B, File and Field Codes.
REAL SCALE , REAL , 1, .03 /
A REAL number is used for setting values such as x and y limits, scales, etc. Use REAL for all
REAL ZCL parameters except MFD numbers, which use MFDNUM. If a REAL number must be
positive, you may specify a range start of 0.0; a range end would not be necessary. Use double
precision (2) only for those ZCL parameters which are double precision; refer to the ZCL Process
Descriptions.
INTEGER LINECOLR, INTEGER, COLOR, 1, 25, 0, 255 /

NCONTOUR, INTEGER, 1, 50, 0, 256 /
An INTEGER number is used for setting whole number values such as number of contours or
color index number. INTEGERs are always single precision, and often have specified defaults and
ranges, as in the examples. Note that the term COLOR, which creates a color button widget, is an
extra term inserted between the parameter type and the precision value.
STRING DISKFILE, STRING , 80 /
Use STRING for character text that the user must type in, such as the name of an external disk
file, output picture, or output field. The maximum length of the string (80 in the example) must be
divisible by 4 and cannot exceed the maximum length for the parameter as specified in the ZCL
Process Description.

Table 1: Parameter Definition Types and Their Terms (Continued)

Type Example and Description
ETEXT DRAW , ETEXT , 20, 3, 1, 3 /

NONE
LINE+FILL
SEISMIC+LINE+FILL
Use ETEXT for a parameter that has a list of specified options. Maximum length is limited as for
STRING. Range extremes are 1 and the number of options (3 in the example); the default value is
the number of an option, counting down the list from 1 at the top (3, or SEISMIC+LINE+FILL, in
the example). Z-MAP Plus creates a popup menu of the options. Use ETEXT for a ZCL parameter
that has options listed in the Process Description. Note that the record terminator is only used on
the parameter definition record; no terminator is used for the options list records.
The parameter type is used by ZCL to error check the users input to the
macro. If the value specified for a parameter does not match the
parameter type, an error report appears and ZCL stops without
executing commands. *
Color Button Widget

To generate a color button in a Z-MAP Plus dialog box, include the
term COLOR between the parameter type and the precision value. The
color button displays the default value color index.
Default color index displayed
MQTRCLR, INTEGER, COLOR, 1, 1, 0, 255

}
Term for generating Range of acceptable values

a color button Single precision
Font Widget
To generate a font popup menu in a Z-MAP Plus dialog box, include
the term FONT between the parameter type and the precision value.
Note that you must still specify options.
MNTSFONT, ETEXT, FONT, 8, 1, 1, 5
}
PLAIN Range of options

SIMPLEX
COMPLEX Default option
ITALIC Maximum number of characters for each optio
DUPLEX Term for generating the font popup menu
*For information on debugging a ZCL command stream, see page 2-8 of the ZCL Operators Manual.

File Type
If the parameter type is INPUT or OUTPUT, the next term in the
parameter definition record identifies the supported file types.
Z-MAP Plus uses this information to generate a selection list. ZCL uses
this information during the error checking pass. If the parameter value
does not match the specified file type, an error report appears and ZCL
stops without executing commands.
Debugging
For information about debugging ZCL command streams, see the ZCL
Operators Manual.
Table 2: File Type Options by Input Type

Input/Output Type File Type Options
Member file of an MFD Any Z-MAP Plus file type; see the
Data File Type Codes Table, on B-1.
Two or more file types connected by
plus signs (+); see the example on
page 653
ALL, for all file types
NOT a file type, such as NOTGRID
ZGF graphics file PICTFILE
Picture in a ZGF graphics PICTNAME
file

Field Type
The term following the FIELD parameter type identifies the supported
field type. Z-MAP Plus uses this information to generate a selection
list. ZCL uses this information during the error checking pass. If the
parameter value does not match the specified field type, an error report
appears and ZCL stops without executing commands.
Table 3: Supported Field Types

Field Type Description
N A specific Z-MAP Plus field type
CHAR A field of FORTRAN data type CHAR
REAL A field of FORTRAN data type REAL
ALL All Z-MAP Plus field types
Maximum Length
The term following the ETEXT or STRING parameter type identifies
the maximum number of characters allowed in the parameter value.
This number must be a multiple of 4, and cannot exceed the maximum
length for the parameter as specified in the ZCL Process description.
Precision Value
The term following the REAL, INTEGER, or MFDNUM parameter
type designates single precision (1) or double precision (2). Double
precision can only be used for parameters that are designated double
precision in the ZCL process description.

Default Value
The default value is used when the macro user does not specify a macro
parameter value. If no value is specified by the macro parameter default
or the user, then the ZCL parameter default is used if one exists.
If the optional default value is omitted and a range is specified, use a
space and comma to hold the place of the default value. For example:
NCONTOUR, INTEGER , 1, , 0, 256 /
If there is no range specified, no place holder is needed, as in the
FIELD records in the example on page 653. If you want ZCL to
calculate a default, include the place holder comma before the
terminator; for example:
CONMIN , REAL , 1, /
Range
Range terms identify the supported lower and upper limits for the
parameter value. If a value is outside these limits, ZCL reports the error
and does not execute commands. You can specify only a lower range
limit. For example, a lower limit of 0.0 specifies a range of all positive
numbers. ZCL has default ranges for some process parameters, but it is
best to include any applicable range limits when you write a macro.
End Record Symbol

The parameter definition record is terminated by a slash (/). Text that
follows the / in the parameter definition record is comment text.
Options
Whenever the Parameter Type is ETEXT, a list of options follows the
parameter definition record terminator. See descriptions and examples
in the table on page 659 and Font Widget on page 659.

Comments
Text that follows the / in the parameter definition record is comment
text, typically used to describe the parameter.
Comment records between parameter definition records are identified
by an exclamation point (!) in column 1; subsequent characters in the
record are ignored by ZCL. There is no record terminator. Do not use
the letter C to start a comment line in the Parameter Definition portion
of a macro.
End Parameters
The record following the last parameter definition record must read:
END PARAMETERS
This line has no record terminator.
Abstract
The abstract summarizes the macro. It is printed out in ZCL or in the
Status/Report window in Z-MAP Plus when the macro is accessed.
The abstract may be written in any form. A suggested format is:
BEGIN ABSTRACT
purpose, explanation
INPUT: -list of input requirements and options
RESULT: description of result
END ABSTRACT
The BEGIN ABSTRACT and END ABSTRACT lines must be in
capital letters and start in column 1. These lines have no record
terminator. The abstract may be a maximum of 20 lines with 80
characters each. Comment records in this section must begin with a !
(exclamation point) followed by a blank.
Prompts
Prompts appear in the status area or a new dialog box if the macro is
executed in Z-MAP Plus. Prompts are ignored if the macro is executed
from ZCL. The format for the prompts section of a macro is:
BEGIN PROMPTS
Parameter prompt records
END PROMPTS
The BEGIN PROMPTS and END PROMPTS lines must be in capital
letters and start in column 1. These lines have no record terminator.

Parameter Prompt Records

Parameter prompt records determine the order and number of
parameters in Z-MAP Plus dialog boxes. Example parameter prompt
records:
CONINT ,Contour interval
DATAIN, Input the Data File Name
MFDIN, MFD for the Input Data
MFDIN, dummy
MFDIN, ,
The parameter name is followed by a comma and the prompt that
appears in Z-MAP Plus. Spaces on either side of the comma may be
used to align text. The prompt starts with the first non-blank character
after the comma. The prompt can contain a maximum of 44 characters.
No record terminator is used.
A prompt for the source MFD must immediately follow a prompt for an
input dataset. The MFD prompt does not appear, but if it is omitted the
input dataset prompt does not appear.
A prompt for selecting a field must come after the prompt for selecting
the input dataset MFD.
New Dialog Box Control

A macro running in Z-MAP Plus automatically generates a new
selection list dialog box for each INPUT/MFDNUM parameter type set
or FIELD type parameter and a new dialog box for every nine
parameters of any other type. To control how many parameters appear
in a dialog box, insert a NEWPANEL record. No record terminator is
used. The maximum number of parameters per dialog box is still nine.

For example:
BEGIN PROMPTS
GRIDIN ,Input GRID name
Selection list
MFDIN ,MFD number for the Input Grid
generates for each
input dataset
PROFILES,Name of the PROFILE file
MFDPROF ,MFD number for the Profiles
SMOOTH, Contouring Refinement
These parameters CONINT ,Contour Interval or Increment
appear in one CONMIN ,Minimum Contour Level
dialog box in this CONMAX ,Maximum Contour Level
order NCONTOUR,Number of Contours to be drawn
NEWPANEL
LABLRATE,Rate at which to LABEL contours
These parameters LABLSIZE,Size of the LABELS on contours
appear in one LABLCOLR,Contour Label Color INDEX number
dialog box in this BOLDRATE,Rate at which contours are BOLD
order HACHRATE,Rate at which contours are HACHURED
DASHRATE,Rate at which contours are DASHED
NEWPANEL
These parameters LINCLRTP,Contour Line Color Selection method
appear in one STARTCLR,Color index of FIRST contour line
dialog box in this HILTCOLR,Color index of HIGHLIGHTED contour
order LINERATE,Rate at which to CHANGE Line color
NEWPANEL
COLORFIL,Include COLORFILLED contours ?
CNTRFILL,Use the Contour LINES to generate colorfill?
These parameters POSTCNTR,Draw Contour Lines on the Picture?
appear in one COLORBAR,COLORBAR location (if any)
dialog box in this FILLCOLR,Color index of FIRST FILL color
order FILLRATE,Rate at which to CHANGE Fill color
FILBELOW,Colorfill below lowest contour ?
FILABOVE,Colorfill above highest contour ?
Selection list POLYGONS,Name of the POLYGON file
generates MFDPOLY ,MFD number for the Polygons
POLYCLIP,Clip INSIDE or OUTSIDE the polygon ?
BLNKRATE,Rate to BLANK contours with high gradient ?
These parameters BLNKDIST,Minimum allowed Distance for Blanking ?
appear in one PLOTPROF,Draw the Profile Lines on the Picture ?
dialog box in this PROFCOLR,Color for the Profile Lines
order PLOTPOLY,Draw the Polygon on the Picture ?
POLYCOLR,Color for the Polygon
END PROMPTS
NEWPANEL records were used to divide the prompts into logical

groups. Since the input polygon file parameter automatically generates
a new selection list dialog box, NEWPANEL records were not needed.

ZCL Commands
After END PROMPTS is the core of the macro the ZCL commands
that substitute macro parameter values for ZCL process parameter
values.
For more information about ZCL, see the ZCL Operators Manual.
This volume is available in printed, hardcopy format only.

Z Macros

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Z Macros

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Macro

Macro Reference Manual

Part No. 161336 October 2003

Landmark Graphics Corporation

About This Guide.............................................................................................. 2

Macro Descriptions ............................................................................... 5

Macro Description Table .................................................................................. 6

Macros Called by Menu Options ..................................................................... 12

R2003.12.0 Contents iii

Macro Descriptions .......................................................................................... 15

DIP-PLOT-DATA ................................................................................................. 100

DIP-PLOT-GRID ................................................................................................. 105

ENVELOPE ........................................................................................................ 110

Summary of the ENVELOPE Macro........................................................... 111

FASTCONTOURMAP ........................................................................................ 171

FASTMAPFROMGRID ....................................................................................... 174

FAULT-BACKFILL-FLDS ................................................................................... 177

FAULT-CONTOURS ........................................................................................... 186

FAULT-DIP-SYMBOL ......................................................................................... 197

FAULT-PROFILING ............................................................................................ 208

FAULT-SHRINKER ............................................................................................. 214

FILL-BORDER ................................................................................................... 225

FISHNET-PLOT .................................................................................................. 227

GRIDANDMAPX ................................................................................................ 242

GRID-LT-EQ-GT ................................................................................................. 246

GRID-TO-SEISMIC ............................................................................................ 249

HAND-CONTOUR .............................................................................................. 252

IMPORT-CPS-FILE ............................................................................................ 257

INTERPOLATION .............................................................................................. 275

LABL-FOUR-CRNS ........................................................................................... 277

LEASE-DRAWING ............................................................................................. 281

Technical Notes........................................................................................... 283

MAKEMAPGENERAL ....................................................................................... 313

NEW-CONTOUR ................................................................................................ 318

NIV-DATA ........................................................................................................... 330

NIV-GRIDS ......................................................................................................... 336

PENETRATE-GRIDS ......................................................................................... 346

PENETRATE-ONEGRD ..................................................................................... 354

R2003.12.0 Contents vii

PICT-NTS-DLS ................................................................................................... 385

PICTURE-STATS ............................................................................................... 394

POLYGON-CLOSE ............................................................................................ 395

POLYGON-FILL ................................................................................................. 397

POST-NTS-DLS ................................................................................................. 423

POST-STAR ....................................................................................................... 445

PROFILE-CONTOURS ...................................................................................... 468

QUALITY ............................................................................................................ 496

QUICKVOL-TWOPOLS ..................................................................................... 504

REDUCE-POSTING ........................................................................................... 512

RESAMP-W-AOIGRID ....................................................................................... 516

SPAWN-PROCESS ............................................................................................ 524

SPECIFY-CONTOURS ...................................................................................... 526

START ................................................................................................................ 533

STRATATHICKNESS ......................................................................................... 534

Technical Notes........................................................................................... 535

R2003.12.0 Contents viii

SURFCORRECT ................................................................................................ 539

Parameters for constructing first surface................................................. 569

Technical Notes........................................................................................... 576

Technical Notes........................................................................................... 590

USER-FILTER .................................................................................................... 600

VEL-FUN-T-TO-D ............................................................................................... 604

Running Macros ....................................................................................... 617